Home

ACH550-UH User`s Manual

1. X1 J1 ISCR Signal cable shield screen G 42 IAN External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC Q 5 Al2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings A 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA H Z Aao ACOTA H9 AGND Analog output circuit common sb 0 4 20 MA 7 57 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC l111GND Auxiliary voltage output common L_l72 DGOMm Digital input common for all LU 3 D1 Start Stop Activate to start drive 7 M4 DI2 Run enable Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 15 DI3 Not configured 16 DI4 Not configured 17 DI5 Not configured 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A Default operation Started gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A Xx Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B f 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 57 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 13 E BYPASS 1608 START ENABLE 1 0 NOT SEL 1201 CONST SPEED SEL O NOT SEL 2108 START INHIBIT 1 ON 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STA
2. I A SCR Signal cable shield screen G 2 Al External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC Q 5 Al2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings LO 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA HIS Ribak A t79 AGND Analog output circuit common 3p 0 4 20 mA 7 z 40f24v Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 11411 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 12 DCOM Digital input common for all UU 43 DI1 Timer enable Activate to start stop drive from timer LU M41 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 7 15 DI3 Timer override Activate to start drive _ __l16 Dl4 Safety interlock 1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 L_ __l171 DI5 Safety interlock 2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A fi Default operation Started gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A fa Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B f 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A Mx Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 27 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 8 INT TIMER 1609 START ENABLE 2 5 DI5 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 11 TIMER1 3207 SUPE
3. E R7 R8 Cabinet Door p5 S 1 To open the cabinet door loosen the quarter ag i 4 turn screws that hold the cabinet door closed a WVYV R7 R8 Side Panels The side panels were removed to take the cabinet off the pallet Installation access is easier if these panels are kept off throughout the installation 7 Ja R70020 Installation 14 Mount the Drive R1 ig R1 R6 UL type 1 Position the ACH550 onto the mounting screws or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners Note Lift the ACH550 by its metal chassis Non English speaking locations Add a warning sticker in the appropriate language over the existing warning on the top of the module R6 UL type 12 ACH550 UH User s Manual IP2002 For the UL type 12 enclosures rubber plugs are required in the holes provided for access to the drive mounting slots As required for access remove the rubber plugs Push plugs out from the back of the drive R5 8 RE Align the sheet metal hood not shown in front of the drive s top mounting holes Attach as part of next step Position the ACH550 onto the mounting screws or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners Note Lift the ACH550 by its metal chassis Re install the rubber plugs 5 Non English speaking locations Add a warning sticker in the appropriate language
4. Modbus Internal Location ABB DRV LIM DCU PROFILE ABB DRV FULL Ref All Profiles 5305 0 5305 1 5305 2 00001 CONTROL WORD BitO OFF1 STOP OFF1 00002 CONTROL WORD Bit1 OFF2 START OFF2 00003 CONTROL WORD Bit 2 OFF3 REVERSE OFF3 00004 CONTROL WORD Bit3 START LOCAL START 00005 CONTROL WORD Bit4 N A RESET RAMP OUT ZERO 00006 CONTROL WORD Bit5 RAMP HOLD EXT2 RAMP HOLD 00007 CONTROL WORD Bit6 RAMP IN ZERO RUN DISABLE RAMP IN ZERO 00008 CONTROL WORD Bit7 RESET STPMODE R RESET 00009 CONTROL WORD Bit8 N A STPMODE EM N A 00010 CONTROL WORD Bit9 N A STPMODE C N A 00011 CONTROL WORD Bit 10 N A RAMP 2 REMOTE CMD 00012 CONTROL WORD Bit 11 EXT2 RAMP OUT 0 EXT2 00013 CONTROL WORD Bit 12 N A RAMP HOLD N A 00014 CONTROL WORD Bit 13 N A RAMP IN 0 N A 00015 CONTROL WORD Bit 14 N A REQ LOCALLOCK N A 00016 CONTROL WORD Bit 15 N A TORQLIM2 N A 00017 CONTROL WORD Bit 16 Does not apply FBLOCAL CTL Does not apply 00018 CONTROL WORD Bit 17 FBLOCAL REF 00019 CONTROL WORD Bit 18 START DISABLE1 00020 CONTROL WORD Bit 19 START DISABLE2 00021 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 00032 00033 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 00034 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 00035 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 00036 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4
5. Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Setting modbus DCU N2 FLN BACnet ABB DRV PROFILE 1401 RELAY 35 Relay Output 1 40134 bit 0 or 00033 BO7 40 BOO OUTPUT 1 COMM controlled by fieldbus 1402 RELAY 35 Relay Output 2 40134 bit 1 or 00034 BO8 41 BO1 OUTPUT 2 COMM controlled by fieldbus 1403 RELAY 35 Relay Output 3 40134 bit 2 or 00035 BOO 42 BO2 OUTPUT3 COMM controlled by fieldbus 1410 RELAY 35 Relay Output 4 40134 bit 3 or 00036 BO10 43 BO3 OUTPUT 4 COMM controlled by fieldbus 1411 RELAY 35 Relay Output 5 40134 bit 4 or 00037 BO11 44 BO4 OUTPUT 5 COMM controlled by fieldbus 1412 RELAY 35 Relay Output 6 40134 bit 5 or 00038 BO12 45 BO5 OUTPUT 6 COMM controlled by fieldbus 1 More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module For example To control relays 1 and 2 using serial communication Set parameters 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 and 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 COMM Then for example using N2 To turn Relay 1 On Force object B07 to On To turn Relay 2 On Force object B08 to On To turn both Relay 1 and 2 On Force objects B07 and B08 On Note Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below Protocol Reference Drive E Value Settin Modbus Parameter g N2 FLN BACnet ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0122 RO 1 3 Relay 1 3 40122 0
6. 124 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 36 Timer Functions Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3609 STOP DAY 2 1 7 1 1 Defines timer 2 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3610 START TIME 3 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines timer 3 daily start time See parameter 3602 3611 STOP TIME 3 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines timer 3 daily stop time See parameter 3603 3612 START DAY 3 1 7 1 1 Defines timer 3 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3613 STOP DAY 3 1 7 1 1 Defines timer 3 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3614 START TIME 4 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines timer 4 daily start time See parameter 3602 3615 STOP TIME 4 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines timer 4 daily stop time See parameter 3603 3616 START DAY 4 1 7 1 1 Defines timer 4 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3617 STOP DAY 4 1 7 1 1 Defines timer 4 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3622 BOOSTER SEL 6 6 1 0 Selects the source for the booster signal 0 NOT SEL Booster signal is disabled 1 DI1 Defines DI1 as the booster signal 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines DI2 DI6 as the booster signal 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the booster signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital inout DI2 DI6 as the booster signal 3623 BOOSTER TIME 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 Defines the booster ON time Time is started whe
7. 76 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 11 Reference Select Code Description Range Resolution Default S Analog Input Reference Correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table Value Al reference is calculated as following Setting C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value 50 of reference value B value C B C value 50 of reference value B value Where e C Main Reference value 1204 COMM for values 9 10 and 17 All for values 14 17 wee e B Correcting reference 100 ABA Oe FEF ET Al1 for values 9 10 and Al2 for values 14 17 Alat aan TE AA Example HA Kata CA PG 29 14 4 The figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where BL aa a NSN er ae a C 25 40 10 15 e P 4012 SETPOINT MIN O e P 4013 SETPOINT MAX O Sop che err a ee B varies along the horizontal axis G 2 8 gt REF1 SELECT 9 100 B 20 KEYPAD RNC Defines the control panel as the reference source A Stop command resets the reference to zero R stands for reset Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 does not copy the reference 21 KEYPAD NC Defines the control panel as the reference source A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 does n
8. 284 TEMOVE COVE 022 a AA 13 reports FLN fieldbus 202 Index 308 reset automatic analog input less than min parameter 112 delay time parameter 112 external fault parameter 112 number of trials parameter 112 overcurrent parameter 112 parameter group trial time parameter 112 undervoltage parameter 112 resonance avoiding select parameter 2 4 104 revolution counter data parameter 65 ANG UGS 2 NA ah Nap aaa a eee eee 276 RS232 baud rate parameter 142 panel parameter group 142 parity parameter a 142 station id parameter 142 RS232 counts buffer overruns parameter 142 CRC errors parameter 142 frame errors parameter 142 ok messages parameter 142 parity errors parameter 142 ROSAS daa An aaa NANA a 287 RS485 comm a 160 run enable source select parameter 88 run time data parameter 63 65 S E paaa EE TET E EAT E EET 3 scalar control mode 2 2005 61 scaling actual value FBA ABB drives profile 245 actual value FBA generic profile 247 actual values EFB comm 170 FLN actual
9. Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM AI1 or COMM AI1 the reference is scaled as follows ABB Drives and DCU Profiles 100 0 5 Par 1105 100 0 5 par 1105 Value Reference Setting Al Reference Scaling REF1 COMM AI1 COMM Al 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 100 Al1 Input Signal 0 m gt 50 100 Embedded Fieldbus 192 ACH550 UH User s Manual ABB Drives and DCU Profiles Value i Reference Setting Al Reference Scaling REF1 COMM AI1 COMM Al 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 200 1 l l l 100 l l Al1 Input Signal 100 0 5 par 1105 gt p 0 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM Al 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1108 1 l l l 100 l l Al1 Input Signal 100 0 5 par 1108 HI p oe 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM Al 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus Reference 4 Correction Coefficient 200 1 l l l 100 l l i Al1 Input Signal 096 5 gt 0 50 100 Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual Reference Handling 193 Use group 10 p
10. 102 protection branch circuit a 270 enclosure standard 297 environmental aa asaan 294 protocol BACnet technical data 216 protocol implementation conformance statement see BACnet pics PT100 temperature sensor 120 PTC temperature sensor 120 R radiation limits conducted EN 61800 3 0 0 0 0 281 ramp pair accel decel parameter 100 VALINGS AAAH 266 r c snubber drive input protection 285 reference analog input corrections 76 corrections for parameter values 76 keypad control parameter 74 maximum parameters 77 minimum parameters 77 select source parameter 75 select parameter group 74 reference scaling EFB ABB drives profile 191 FBA ABB drives profile 242 FBA generic profile 246 reference step PFA parameters 145 regulator by pass control parameter 154 relative humidity environment limit aa aaan 295 shipping limit a 295 relay output activation condition parameters 83 off delay parameters 84 on delay parameters 84 parameter group aa 83 status data parameter 64 relays specifications
11. Center to center dimension Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual R7 R8 Mounting Dimensions 291 UL type 1 and UL type 12 Dimensions for each Frame Size Ref oe Top View mm in W 806 31 7 D 659 25 9 a 675 26 6 b 474 5 18 7 c 61 2 4 d 65 5 2 6 Mounting Hardware 11 mm 13 32 Weight R1 R7 The following table lists typical maximum weights for each frame size Variations within each frame size due to components associated with voltage current ratings and options are minor R6 Weight Enclosure R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib UL type 1 6 5 14 3 9 0 19 8 16 35 0 24 53 0 34 75 69 152 UL type 12 8 2 18 1 11 2 24 7 18 5 40 8 26 5 58 4 38 5 84 9 86 190 R8 Weight Enclosure R7 R8 kg Ib kg Ib UL type 1 224 490 354 776 UL type 12 245 535 354 776 Technical Data 292 ACH550 UH User s Manual Outside Dimensions R1 R6 Outside dimensions depend on frame size and enclosure type as defined below D e H H3 LF l O O X0031 UL type 1 Outside Dimensions by Frame Size R1 R6 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 Ret mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in 125 49 125 49 203 8 0 203 8 0 265 10 4 300 11
12. 4003 DERIVATION TIME 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Defines the PID Controller s derivation time Error Process Error Value e You can add the derivative of the error to the PID controller output The derivative is the error value s rate of change For example if the 100 N79 process error value changes linearly the derivative is a constant added to the PID controller output The error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter The time constant of the filter is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the error derivative part of the PID controller output 0 1 10 0 Derivation time seconds PID output D part of controller output Gain_ P 401 t a at P4003 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0s 0 1s 1 0s Defines the filter time constant for the error derivative part of the PID controller output Before being added to the PID controller output the error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter Increasing the filter time smooths the error derivative reducing noise 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the error derivative filter 0 1 10 0 Filter time constant seconds 4005 ERROR VALUE INV 0 1 0 Selects either a normal or inverted relationship between the feedback signal and the drive speed 0 NO Normal a decrease in feedback signal increases drive speed Error Ref Fok 1 YES Inverted a decrease in feedback signal decreases drive speed Error F
13. AGH550 xx 059A 4 Internal ACS400 1F41 3 Internal ACS400 1F41 3 ACH550 xx 072A 4 ACH550 xx 078A 4 Note 2 Note 2 ACH550 xx 097A 4 ACH550 xx 077A 4 R5 100 m 330 ft Note 1 100 m 330 ft Note 1 Internal Internal ACH550 xx 096A 4 ACH550 xx 125A 4 Note 2 Note 2 ACH550 xx 124A 4 R6 100 m 330 ft ACH550 xx 157A 4 internal ACH550 xx 180A 4 AGH550 xx 246A 4 ACH550 xx 245A 4 R7 100m 330 ft Note 1 Internal ACH550 xx 316A 4 R8 ACH550 xx 368A 4 ACH550 xx 414A 4 ACH550 xx 486A 4 ACH550 xx 526A 4 ACH550 xx 602A 4 ACH550 xx 645A 4 Does Not Apply 1 For any motor cable length up to the100 m maximum length limit compliance does not require an additional filter 2 Data not available at time of publication Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual A 283 Warning Do not use RFI EMC filters in a floating or impedance grounded network e For EN 61800 3 First Environment Unrestricted Distribution CISPR11 Class B compliance with conducted emission limits all drives require an additional external RFI EMC filter and cable lengths are limited as specified in the table below The RFI EMC filters are separate options and installation must conform to the instructions in the filter package for all cable screen connections Note The filter does not assure compliance with radiated emissions limits Maximu
14. Actual speed t t Ho gt Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set acceleration compensation e Rule of thumb Set this parameter between 50 and 100 of the sum of the mechanical time constants for the 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN 0 1 1 0 Starts automatic tuning of the speed controller 0 OFF Disables the Autotune creation process Does not disable the operation of Autotune settings 1 ON Activates speed controller autotuning Automatically reverts to OFF Procedure Note The motor load must be connected Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40 of the rated speed Change the autotuning parameter 2305 to ON The drive Accelerates the motor e Calculates values for proportional gain integration time and acceleration compensation Changes parameters 2301 2302 and 2304 to these values e Resets 2305 to OFF Start Up 104 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 25 Critical Speeds This group defines up to three critical speeds or ranges of speeds that are to be avoided due for example to mechanical resonance problems at certain speeds Group 25 Critical Speeds Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 0 1 1 0 Sets the critical speeds function on or off The critical speed foutput function avoids specific speed ranges 0 OFF Disables the critical speeds function 1 ON Enables the critical speeds functio
15. Bit 2 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 1 signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal See DI1 INV above Drive Started START STOP COMMAND Par Group 10 START ENABLE SIGNAL Params 1608 amp 1609 Relay Energized Relay STARTED De energized RELAY STATUS Par Group 14 Damper Open l Damper i Damper Closed Closed DAMPER lt gt STATUS Damper Damper Opening Closing Time i Time RUN ENABLE SIGNAL from the damper end switch when the damper is fully opened Parameter1601 MOTOR STATUS lt lt an GA AN a Acceleration Deceleration Time Time Par 2202 Par 2203 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 91 Group 16 System Controls Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1609 START ENABLE 2 6 7 1 0 Selects the source of the start enable 2 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal This digital input must be activated for start enable 2 signal If the voltage drops an
16. CMD_AO_2 PI2_STPT 3 MIN_SPD Ng MAX_SPD MB_PARAM nn MB_DATA START STOP START REVERSE a PWD j REV PAN LOCK RUN ENAB OPEN LOCKI ED DISABLE ENABLE R1 2_SEL PLT RSET CMD_RO_1 CMD_RO_2 CMD_RO_3 CMD RO 4 CMD RO 5 CMD RO 6 RST RTIM RST_KWH ton RESET OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFE ON TORFU NON OFF ON EX Tl F EX TE 82 j OFF m RESET OFF RESET PID_SEL SETI SET2 N2_LOC_Cc N2_LOC_R SAV PRMS READ MB WRITE MB 7 AUTO N2 i RUTO 7 N2 OFE SAVE NO j READ NO WRITE 201 Embedded Fieldbus 202 FLN Protocol Technical Data Overview ACH550 UH User s Manual The FLN fieldbus connection to the ACH550 drives is based on an industry standard RS 485 physical interface The FLN Floor Level Network Fieldbus protocol is a serial communication protocol used by the Siemens APOGEE system The ACH550 interface is specified in Siemens application 2734 Supported Features The ACH550 supports all required FLN features Reports The ACH550 provides seven pre defined reports Using a report request generated from the FLN fieldbus controller select one of the following sets of points By
17. Warning Do not operate the drive outside the nominal input line voltage range Over voltage can result in permanent damage to the drive Input Power Specifications Input Power Connection Specifications 208 220 230 240 VAC 3 phase or 1 phase 15 10 for ACH550 xx xxxx 2 units Voltage U 400 415 440 460 480 VAC 3 phase 15 10 for ACH550 xx xxxx 4 units 500 525 575 600 VAC 3 phase 15 10 for ACH550 xx xxxx 6 units Prospective short Maximum allowed prospective short circuit current in the supply is 100 kA circuit current in a second providing that the drive s input power is protected with IEC 629 appropriate fuses US 100 000 AIC Frequency 48 63 Hz Imbalance Max 3 of nominal phase to phase input voltage Fundamental power 0 98 at nominal load factor cos Cable Temperature 90 C 194 F rating minimum Rating Branch Circuit Protection The ACH550 does not include a disconnect device A means to disconnect input power must be installed between the AC power source and the ACH550 This branch circuit protection must e Be sized to conform to applicable safety regulations including but not limited to both National and local electrical codes e Be locked in the open position during installation and maintenance work The disconnect device must not be used to control the motor Instead use the control panel or commands to the I O terminals for mot
18. Displays a warning 2006 Al1 Loss or 2007 Al2 LOSS and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds Warning If you select CONST SP7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the analog input signal is lost 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 1 3 1 1 Defines the drive response to a control panel communication error 1 FAULT Displays a fault 10 PANEL LOSS and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP7 Displays a warning 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 3 LAST SPEED Displays a warning 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds Warning If you select CONST SP7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the control panel communication is lost 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 6 6 1 0 Defines the External Fault 1 signal input and the drive response to an external fault 0 NOT SEL External fault signal is not used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the external fault input Activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input e See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the external fault input e De activating the digital input indicates a fault T
19. The table below shows the ACH550 PFA motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 where the settings are either 31 PFA or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is enabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV value gt 0 v Parameter Setting ACH550 Relay Assignment Taya yaya ya ye Autochange Enabled 4141 41 14 41 41 1 ROT RO2 RO3 RO4 RO5 ROG 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Hae kod a 2 v 31 31 X X X X 1 PFA PFA X X X X 31 31 31 X X X 2 PFA PFA PFA X X X x 3T1 31 X X X 1 X PFA PFA X X X XIX X 31 X 31 1 x X X PFA X PFA 31 31 X X X X 0 PFA PFA X X X X No auxiliary motors but the autochange function is in use Working as standard PID control 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 1 TEST MODE Forces the interval to value 36 48 s 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL 0 0 100 0 0 1 50 0 Sets an upper limit as a percent of output capacity for the autochange logic When the output from the PID PFA control block exceeds this limit autochange is prevented For example use this parameter to deny autochange when the Pump Fan system is operating near maximum capacity Autochange Overview The purpose of the autochange operation is to equalize duty time between multiple motors used in a system At each autochange operation A different motor takes a turn connected to the ACH550 output the speed regula
20. 101 CONTROLNET 5102 FB PAR 2 FB PAR 26 0 65535 1 0 5126 For more information on these parameters refer to the user s manual supplied with the FBA module 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH Validates any changed fieldbus parameter settings 0 DONE Refreshing done 1 REFRESH Refreshing e After refreshing the value reverts automatically to DONE 5128 FILE CPI FW REV 0000 FFFF hex 1 0000 hex Displays the CPI firmware revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter configuration file Format is xyz where x major revision number e y minor revision number e z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 5129 FILE CONFIG ID 0000 FFFF hex 1 0000 hex Displays the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module s configuration file identification e File configuration information is drive application program dependent 5130 FILE CONFIG REV 0000 FFFF hex 1 0000 hex Contains the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module configuration file Example 1 revision 1 5131 FBA STATUS 0 6 1 0 Contains the status of the adapter module 0 IDLE Adapter not configured 1 EXEC INIT Adapter is initializing 2 TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive 3 CONFIG ERROR Adapter configuration error e The revision code of the adapter s CPI firmware revision is older than required CPI firmware version defined in the drive s configu
21. 20 mA N 9 AGND Analog output circuit common NO 122 140 24v Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 147 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 1121DCOM Digital input common for all o 143 DI1 Start Stop Activate to start drive 14 DI2 Not configured Uo 115 DI3 Constant Preset speed 1 P 1202 Lo 116 DI4 Safety interlock Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 17 DI5 Not configured 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A Default operation Ready gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B f 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A N Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B M 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A m Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 27 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value None Default macro Start Up ACH550 User s Manual Supply Fan 47 This macro configures for supply fan applications where the supply fan brings fresh air in according to signals received from a transducer When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 44 X1 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen Q BOP Al
22. 380 480 V Units P 2603 Py kW 3 75 15 37 132 IRcomp V 18 15 12 8 3 f Hz gt B IR Compensation P 2604 When enabled IR Compensation provides an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds Use IR Compensation for example in applications that require a high breakaway torque 2604 R COMP FREQ 0 100 1 80 Sets the frequency at which IR compensation is 0 V in of motor frequency 2605 U f RATIO 1 2 1 1 Selects the form for the U f voltage to frequency ratio below field weakening point 1 LINEAR Preferred for constant torque applications 2 SQUARED Preferred for centrifugal pump and fan applications Square is more silent for most operating frequencies Start Up 106 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 26 Motor Control Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2606 SWITCHING FREQ 1 4 8 12 kHz 4 kHz Sets the switching frequency for the drive Also see parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL and section Switching frequency derating on page 265 Higher switching frequencies mean less noise The 1 4 and 8 kHz switching frequencies are available for all frame sizes R1 R6 The 12 kHz switching frequency is available only if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ e The 12 kHz switching frequency is available for 200 V and 400 V frame sizes R1 R4 except for the ACH550 UH
23. Condenser This macro configures for condenser and liquid cooler applications where fan speed is controlled according to signals received from a transducer When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 44 X1 J1 ISCR Signal cable shield screen Q 2 JAH External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC Q 5 Al2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common Ji J i umper Settings H H7 AOT Output frequency 0 4 20 mA Sp an AYA a ia ox lt i 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA H K ia tt 19 AGND Analog output circuit common 2 B AI2 0 4 20 mA F 5 40f24v Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 144 GND Auxiliary voltage output common M2 DCOM Digital input common for all H3 D Start Stop Activate to start drive UU M41 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 LU 115 DI3 Constant Preset speed 1 P 1202 _ __l16 Dl4 Safety interlock 1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 Lo 47 DI5 Safety interlock 2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A fi Default operation Started gt 19 connected to 21
24. This object is the Process PID output signal s deviation from its setpoint The corresponding drive parameter is 0132 Percent AV12 EXT PID FBCK This object is the External PID feedback signal The corresponding drive parameter is 0131 Percent Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 225 Instance ID Object Name Description Units Present Value Access Type AV13 EXT PID DEV This object is the External PID output signal s deviation from its setpoint The corresponding drive parameter is 0133 Percent R AV14 RUN TIME R This object indicates in hours the drive s accumulated run time since the last reset The value can be reset to zero The corresponding drive parameter is 0114 Hours AV15 MOTOR TEMP This object indicates the drive s motor temperature as set up in parameter Group 35 The corresponding drive parameter is 0145 AV16 INPUT REF 1 This object sets Input Reference 1 Control requires parameter 1103 value COMM Percent AV17 INPUT REF 2 This object sets either e Input Reference 2 Control requires parameter 1106 value COMM e Process PID setpoint Control requires parameter 1106 value PID1 OUT and parameter 4010 value COMM Percent AV18 LAST FLT This object indicates the most recent fault entered in the drive s fault log The corresponding drive parameter is 0401 N
25. Use the parameter backup mode to export parameters from one drive to another The parameters are uploaded from a drive to the control panel and downloaded from the control panel to another drive Two options are available Par Backup Mode The Assistant Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters The Par Backup mode has these functions Upload to Panel Copies all parameters from the drive to the Control Panel This includes user sets of parameters if defined and internal parameters such as those created by the Motor Id Run The Control Panel memory is non volatile and does not depend on the panel s battery To upload parameters to control panel follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu CT 1 Select PAR BACKUP with the UP DOWN buttons and select ENTER 4 2 k G Scroll to Upload to Panel and select SEL CA 3 N4 u Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual The text Copying parameters and a progress diagram is displayed v4 4 Select ABORT if you want to stop the process The text Parameter upload successful is displayed and the v4 control panel returns to the PAR BACKUP menu Select EXIT to return to the main menu Now you 5 can disconnect the panel Download Full Set Restores the full parameter set from the Control Panel to the drive Use this option to restore a drive or to configure identical drives This dow
26. secure seal to the exhaust box Maintenance ACH550 UH User s Manual 265 Capacitors The drive intermediate circuit employs several electrolytic capacitors Their life span is from 35 000 90 000 hours depending on drive loading and ambient temperature Capacitor life can be prolonged by lowering the ambient temperature It is not possible to predict a capacitor failure Capacitor failure is usually followed by a input power fuse failure or a fault trip Contact ABB if capacitor failure is suspected Replacements for frame size R5 and R6 are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts Control Panel Cleaning Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display window Battery A battery is only used in Assistant control panels that have the clock function available and enabled The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during power interruptions The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years To remove the battery use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel Replace the battery with type CR2032 Note The battery is NOT required for any control panel or drive function except the clock Maintenance 266 Technical Data Ratings ACH550 UH User s Manual By type code the table below provides ratings for the ACH550 adjustable speed AC drive including IEC ratings e NEMA
27. the drive terminals See Wiring Requirements on page 15 IP2004 Note For R5 frame size the minimum power cable size is 25 mm 4 AWG For R6 frame size refer to Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size on page 276 Route the control cables through the conduit As naa not the same conduit as either input power or motor wiring Use available secure points and tie strap landings to permanently secure control wiring at a minimum distance of 14 from power wiring Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper screen into a pig tail Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at drive end Connect the ground screen pig tail for RS485 cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive end IP2005 Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See Wiring Requirements on page 15 Install the conduit box cover 1 screw Installation ACH550 UH User s Manual 21 R1 R6 Wiring UL type 12 Enclosure 1 3 Route the power wiring through conduit Step depends on Frame Size e Frame Sizes R1 R4 Remove and discard the cable seals where conduit will be installed The cable seals are cone shaped rubber seals on the bottom of the drive IP5013 e Frame Sizes R4 and R5 Use punch to create holes for conduit connections as needed af For each conduit run input power motor and control wiring must be
28. 0103 OUTPUT FREQ AL SCR Signal cable shield screen GQ 2 Al External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC Q 5 Al2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common Ji Jumper Settings 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA Sp An ora a oe on DED 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA H ra t9 AGND Analog output circuit common zZ gt Al2 0 4 20 MA 5757 14 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 111GND Common for DI return signals 112 DCOM Auxiliary voltage output common LL 3 D1 Start Stop Activate to start drive LU 14 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 U 115 DI3 Setpoint selection Activate to select Set2 _ __l16 Dl4 Safety interlock 1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 L_ __ 17 DI5 Safety interlock 2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A fi Default operation Started gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A fa Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B f 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A fr Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 27 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 11 DUAL SETPNT 4010 SETPOINT SEL 19 INTERNAL 1201 CONST SPEED SEL O NOT SEL 4011 INTE
29. 1 START no op Reverse direction This bit XOR d with the sign of the reference defines direction 2 REVERSE oO Oo o Forward direction 3 LOCAL 1 Local mode When the fieldbus sets this bit it steals control and the drive moves to fieldbus 0 External mode local control mode 4 RESET gt 1 Reset Edge sensitive other no op 5 EXT2 1 Switch to EXT2 0 Switch to EXT1 6 RUN_DISABLE 1 Run disable Inverted run enable 0 Run enable on 7 STPMODE_R 1 Normal ramp stop mode 0 no op Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 185 DCU Profile CONTROL WORD See Parameter 0301 Bit Name Value Command Req Commenis 8 STPMODE_EM 1 Emergency ramp stop mode 0 no op 9 STPMODE_C 1 Coast stop mode 0 no op 10 RAMP_2 1 Ramp pair 2 0 Ramp pair 1 11 RAMP OUT 0 1 Ramp output to 0 0 no op 12 RAMP HOLD 1 Ramp freeze 0 no op 13 RAMP IN 0 1 Ramp input to 0 0 no op 14 RREQ_LOCALLOC 1 Local mode lock In lock drive will not switch to local 0 no op mode 15 TORQLIM2 1 Torque limit pair 2 0 Torque limit pair 1 DCU Profile CONTROL WORD See Parameter 0302 Bit Name Value Function Comments 16 26 Reserved 27 REF_CONST 1 Constant speed ref These bits are only for supervision 0 moa purposes 28 REF_AVE 1 Average speed ref
30. 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 3 See parameter 2503 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 105 Group 26 Motor Control This group provides controls for fine tuning the motor control Group 26 Motor Control Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2601 FLUX OPTIMIZATION 0 1 1 0 Changes the magnitude of the flux depending on the actual load Flux Optimization can reduce the total energy consumption and noise and should be enabled for drives that usually operate below nominal load 0 OFF Disables the feature 1 ON Enables the feature 2602 FLUX BRAKING 0 1 1 0 Provides faster deceleration by raising the level of magnetization in the motor when needed instead of limiting Braking Torque Rated Motor Power the deceleration ramp By increasing the flux in the motor 22kW the energy of the mechanical system is changed to thermal 120 W O Flux Braking o 15 KW energy in the motor 3 37 kW 0 OFF Disables the feature 80 1 ON Enables the feature 4 75 kW 2603 IR COMP VOLT 0 100 V Sets the IR compensation voltage used for 0 Hz e Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR SPEED Keep IR compensation as low as possible to prevent overheating e Typical IR compensation values are A IR Compensated B No compensation
31. 8 1 1 Selects the motor start method 1 AUTO Selects the automatic start mode VECTOR control modes Optimal start in most cases The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor SCALAR FREQ mode Immediate start from zero frequency 2 DC MAGN Selects the DC Magnetizing start mode Note The DC Magnetizing start mode cannot start a rotating motor Note The drive starts when the set pre magnetizing time param 2103 has passed even if motor magnetization is not complete VECTOR control modes Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time This selection guarantees the highest possible break away torque SCALAR SPEED mode Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time 3 SCALAR FLYSTART Selects the flying start mode VECTOR control modes Not applicable SCALAR control mode The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor useful if the motor is already rotating and if the drive will start smoothly at the current frequency 4 TORQ BOOST Selects the automatic torque boost mode SCALAR SPEED mode only e May be necessary in drives with high starting torque e Torque boost is only applied at s
32. FB STATUS WORD bit 0 STOP 40301 bitO BIH 23 BVO 0301 FB STATUS WORD bit 2 REV 40301 bit2 Bl2 21 BV1 Note With Modbus any parameter can be accessed using the format 4 followed by the parameter number Mailbox Read Write The ACH550 provides a Mailbox function to access parameters that have not been pre defined by the protocol Using mailbox any drive parameter can be identified and read Mailbox can also be used to adjust parameter settings by writing a value to any parameter identified The following table describes the use of this function Protocol Reference Name Description 7 Modbus N2 FLN BACnet Mailbox Enter the number of the drive parameter Does not AO19 95 AV25 Parameter to access apply Mailbox Contains the parameter value after a AO20 96 AV26 Data read or enter the desired parameter value for a write Mailbox A binary value triggers a read the value BO19 97 BV15 Read of the Mailbox Parameter appears in Mailbox data Mailbox A binary value triggers a write the drive BO20 98 BV16 Write value for the Mailbox Parameter changes to the value in Mailbox data Embedded Fieldbus 170 ACH550 UH User s Manual 1 As noted above Modbus provides direct access to all parameters using the format 4 followed by the parameter number Actual Value Scaling The scaling of actual values can be protocol dep
33. This object controls the output state ON OFF C Note For Present Value Access Types R Read only W Writeable C Commandable Commandable values support priority arrays amp relinquish defaults Binary Value Object Instance Summary The following table summarizes the Binary Value Objects supported Instance ID Object Name Description Active Inactive Text Present Value Access Type BVO RUN STOP ACT This object indicates the drive Run Status regardless of the control source RUN STOP R BV1 FWD REV ACT This object indicates the motor s rotation direction regardless of the control source REV FWD BV2 FAULT ACT this object indicates the drive s fault status FAULT OK BV3 EXT 1 2 ACT This object indicates which control source is active External 1 or External 2 EXT2 EXT1 BV4 HAND AUTO ACT This object indicates whether the drive is under Hand or Auto control HAND AUTO BV5 ALARM ACT This object indicates the drive s alarm status ALARM OK BV6 MAINT REQ This object indicates the drive s maintenance status Refer to Group 29 in the drive s parameter descriptions MAINT OK BV7 DRIVE READY This object indicates whether the drive is ready to accept a run command READY NOT READY BV8 AT SETPOINT This object indicates whether the drive is at the commanded setpoin
34. hex Read only copy of the Status Word 2 e See parameter 0303 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 69 Group 03 Actual Signals Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0305 FAULT WORD 1 1 0000 hex Read only copy of the Fault Word 1 e When a fault is active the corresponding bit for the active fault is set in the Fault Words e Each fault has a dedicated bit allocated within Fault Words e See Fault Listing in section Diagnostics for a description of the faults e The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displays a 0001 All zeros and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 Bit 0305 FAULT WORD 1 0306 FAULT WORD 2 0307 FAULT WORD 3 0 OVERCURRENT UNDERLOAD EFB 1 1 DC OVERVOLT THERM FAIL EFB 2 2 DEVOVERTEMP OPEX LINK EFB 3 3 SHORT CIRC OPEX PWR Incompatible software type 4 Reserved CURR MEAS Reserved 5 DCUNDERVOLT SUPPLY PHASE Reserved 6 Al1 LOSS ENCODER ERROR Reserved 7 Al2LOSS OVERSPEED Reserved 8 MOT OVERTEMP Reserved Reserved 9 PANEL LOSS DRIVE ID Reserved 10 ID RUN FAIL CONFIG FILE System Error 11 MOTOR STALL SERIAL 1 ERR System Error 12 Reserved EFB CON FILE System Error 13 JEXT FLT 1 FORCE TRIP System Error 14 EXT FLT 2 MOTOR PHASE Hardware Error 15 EARTH FAULT OUTPUT WIRING Param Setting Fault 0306 FAULT WORD 2 1 0000 hex Read only copy of the Fault Word
35. 1 Constant speed 2 1203 0 O 1 Constant speed 3 1204 1 1 0 Constant speed 4 1205 0 1 0 Constant speed 5 1206 1 0 O Constant speed 6 1207 0 O 0 Constant speed 7 1208 13 DI3 4 5 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 DI4 and DI5 e See above DI1 2 3 INV for code 14 DI4 5 6 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI4 DI5 and DI6 e See above DI1 2 3 INV for code 1202 CONST SPEED 1 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 360 US 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 6 0 US Sets value for Constant Speed 1 The range and units depend on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Range 0 30000 rpm when 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED Range 0 500 Hz when 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ 1203 CONST SPEED 2 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 360 US 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 12 0 US Sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above 1204 CONST SPEED 3 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 720 US 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 18 0 US 1205 CONST SPEED 3 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 1080 US 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 18 0 US Sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above 1206 CONST SPEED 3 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 1440 US 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 24 0 US Sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above 1207 CONST SPEED 3 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 1800 US 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 30 0 US Sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above 1208 CONST SPEED 3 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 2880
36. 100 100 0 5 par 1105 Fieldbus Adapter ACH550 UH User s Manual 243 ABB Drives Profile FBA Reference Value Setting Al Reference Scaling REF1 COMM AI1 COMM Al 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus Reference ACorrection Coefficient 200 3 0 l 100 l Alt Input Signal 100 0 5 par 1105 gt 0 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM Al 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus Reference A Correction Coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1108 7 l l i 100 7 aha Alt Input Signal 100 0 5 par 1108 gt 0 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM Al 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus Reference A Correction Coefficient 200 100 s l l Al1 Input Signal 0 Paga 0 50 100 Fieldbus Adapter 244 Reference Hanaling ACH550 UH User s Manual Use group 10 parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location EXT1 and ExT2 The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 and REF2 Note fieldbus references are bipolar that is they can be positive or negative ABB Drives Profile Parameter Value Setting Al Reference Scaling 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD Resultant Ref Max Ret mmm PA ABT r i l l T TE l l l l l l Fieldbus
37. 12 TIMER 1 4 Defines the Timer as the control for enabling external PID control Timer active enables external PID control e See parameter Group 36 Timer Functions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control e Activating the digital input disables external PID control e De activating the digital input enables external PID control 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control e See DI1 INV above 4229 OFFSET 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Defines the offset for the PID output e When PID is activated output starts from this value When PID is deactivated output resets to this value e Parameter is not active when 4230 TRIM MODE not O trim mode is not active 4230 TRIM MODE 0 2 1 0 Selects the type of trim if any Using the trim it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference 0 NOT SEL Disables the trim function 1 PROPORTIONAL Adds a trim factor that is proportional to the rom Hz reference 2 DIRECT Adds a trim factor based on the control loop s maximum limit 4231 TRIM SCALE 100 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Defines the multiplier as a percent plus or minus used in the trim mode Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 139 Group 42 Exter
38. 20 mA 9 PP Alt 0 4 20 mA ON A 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA E ABALA ki ou 7 9 AGND Analog output circuit common 3p 0 4 20 MA 7 z 8 40l24v Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 1411 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 12 DCOM Digital input common for all _ __ 431DI1 Start Stop Activate to start drive LU 14 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 U 115 DI3 Constant Preset speed 1 P 1202 T16 Di4 Safety interlock 1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 LU 471DI5 Safety interlock 2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A fi Default operation Started gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B f 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A lt _ Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B f 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A Default operation Fault 1 525 connected to 27 57 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 6 BOOSTERPUMP 2203 DECELER TIME 1 5 0s 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 DI2 4001 GAIN 1 0 1609 START ENABLE 2 5 DI5 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0 s 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 5 0s Start Up 52 Pump Alternation ACH550 User s Manual This macro configures for pump alternation applications usually used in booster stations To adjust maintain
39. 21 RO1B f 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A fx Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B M 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A fx Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 27 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 5 CONDENSER 2203 DECELER TIME 1 10 0 s 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 D12 4005 ERROR VALUE INV 1 YES 1609 START ENABLE 2 5 DI5 4101 GAIN 1 0 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 10 0 s 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0s Start Up ACH550 User s Manua l Booster Pump 51 This macro configures for booster pump applications where the pump speed is controlled according to a signal received from a transducer When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 44 X1 1 TSCR Signal cable shield screen G Lij2 Ali External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC re 5 lAl2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4
40. 25 9 Additional Free Space Recommendations In addition to the free space requirements for cooling Cooling on page 287 allow 800 mm 31 5 in in front of R7 R8 enclosures room for the cabinet door to swing open 305 mm 12 in above R7 R8 IP54 UL type 12 enclosures room for fan replacement Technical Data 294 ACH550 UH User s Manual Degrees of Protection Available enclosures UL type 1 NEMA 1 IP 21 enclosure The site must be free of airborne dust corrosive gases or liquids and conductive contaminants such as condensation carbon dust and metallic particles UL type 12 NEMA 12 IP 54 enclosure This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions Compared to the UL type 1 enclosure the UL type 12 enclosure has The same internal plastic shell as the UL type 1 enclosure A different outer plastic cover An additional internal fan to improve cooling Larger dimensions The same rating does not require a derating Plenum Rating ACH550 drives UL type 1 amp 12 have been evaluated in accordance with the requirements of UL508 meets all of the requirements for plenum rated drives and is Suitable for Installation in a Compartment Handling Conditioned Air Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual 295 Ambient Conditions The following table lists the ACH550 environmental requirements A
41. 3 status 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS Relay 4 6 status Analog Output Control Using the fieldbus for analog output control e g PID setpoint requires Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied analog value s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 135 COMM VALUE 1 Analog Output 1 controlled by writing to parameter 0135 0135 COMM VALUE 1 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling pa nla values 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 1506 FILTER AO1 Filter time constant for A01 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 136 COMM VALUE 2 Analog Output 2 controlled by writing to parameter 0136 0136 COMM VALUE 2 1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling values 1511 MAXIMUM A02 1512 FILTER AO2 Filter time constant for A02 Fieldbus Adapter ACH550 UH User s Manual 235 PID Control Setpoint Source Using the fieldbus for the PID control setpoint requires Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied setpoint value in the appropriate location As defined in Analog Output Control above Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 4010 SETPOINT SEL 8 COMM VALUE 1 Se
42. 303 fe 87 o WA 10 E earth fault Tault Code Ah ABA Naa ka 251 parameter eee eee 110 earthing see ground efficiency cc ee eee 287 EM3 SCreW bedi pa AMAG Nha Nawa ph a 274 embedded field bus see comm EFB EMC CE marking eee ea eee 298 C Tick marking 20000055 298 motor cable requirements 280 emergency deceleration time parameter 101 stop devices a 272 stop select parameter 99 EN 61800 3 first environment restricted distribution radiation limits 281 unrestricted distribution radiation limits 283 enclosure protection class code 9 enclosure UL type 12 air filter maintenance 262 fan replacement n anan a 260 encoder err fault code 251 encoder data parameters 66 environment first definition nananana anaana 298 second definition 298 error value inversion PID parameter 130 exception codes EFB modbus 181 external comm module parameter group 140 external commands selection parameter 72 external control selection parameter 74 external fault automatic reset parameter 112 fault codes a 250 parameters 2 22 aaa 108 external reference data parameter 63 F fan drive module maintenance interval 258 repla
43. 3626 TIMER FUNC1 SRC Timer 2 3627 TIMER FUNC2 SRC Timer 3 3628 TIMER FUNC3 SRC Timer 4 3629 TIMER FUNC4 SRC A parameter can be connected to only one time Timer1 3626 TIMER FUNC1 SRC Timer2 3627 TIMER FUNC2 SRC Pg 1001 EXT 1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT 2 COMMANDS 1102 EXT 1 2 SEL 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 4027 PID PARAM SET 8126 TIMED AUTOCHANGE Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 123 Group 36 Timer Functions Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3601 TIMERS ENABLE 6 7 1 0 Selects the source for the timer enable signal 0 NOT SEL Timed functions are disabled 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal e The digital input must be activated for timed functions enable 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the timed function enable signal 7 ENABLED Timed functions are enabled 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal e This digital input must be de activated for timed function enable 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the timed function enable signal 3602 START TIME 1 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines the daily start time e The time can be changed in step
44. 4126 is analogous with Process PID set 1 PID1 parameters 4001 4026 PID parameter set 2 can be selected by parameter 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Group 41 Process PID Set 2 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4101 See 4001 4026 4126 Start Up 138 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 42 External PID This group defines the parameters used for the second PID controller PID2 of ACH550 The operation of parameters 4201 4221 is analogous with Process PID set 1 PID1 parameters 4001 4021 Group 42 External PID Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4201 See 4001 4021 4221 4228 ACTIVATE 6 12 0 Defines the source for enabling the external PID function e Requires 4230 TRIM MODE O NOT SEL 0 NOT SEL Disables external PID control 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control e Activating the digital input enables external PID control e De activating the digital input disables external PID control 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control e See DI1 above 7 DRIVE RUN Defines the start command as the control for enabling external PID control e Activating the start command drive is running enables external PID control 8 ON Defines the power on as the control for enabling external PID control e Activating power to the drive enables external PID control 9
45. ACH550 UH User s Manual 4 Attach terminal lug to the drive Wire Size Crimpl N t rimping o 0 mm2 kemil Manufacturer Ring Lug Tool Crimps AWG i E Burndy YAV6C L2 MY29 3 1 lIsco CCL 6 38 ILC 10 2 i a Burndy YA4C L4BOX MY29 3 1 lIsco CCL 4 38 MT 25 1 Burndy YA2C L4BOX MY29 3 2 35 2 Ilsco CRC 2 IDT 12 1 lIsco CCL 2 38 MT 25 1 Burndy YA1C L4BOX MY29 3 2 lIsco CRA 1 38 IDT 12 1 50 1 lIsco CCL 1 38 MT 25 1 Thomas amp Betts 54148 TBM 8 3 Burndy YA25 L4BOX MY29 3 2 lIsco CRB 0 IDT 12 1 55 1 0 lIsco CCL 1 0 38 MT 25 1 Thomas 8 Betts 54109 TBM 8 3 Burndy YAL26T38 MY29 3 2 lIsco CRA 2 0 IDT 12 1 70 2 0 lIsco CCL 2 0 38 MT 25 1 Thomas amp Betts 54110 TBM 8 3 Burndy YAL27T38 MY29 3 2 lIsco CRA 3 0 IDT 12 1 95 3 0 lIsco CCL 3 0 38 MT 25 1 Thomas 8 Betts 54111 TBM 8 3 Burndy YA28R4 MY29 3 2 lIsco CRA 4 0 IDT 12 1 95 3 0 lIsco CCL 4 0 38 MT 25 2 Thomas amp Betts 54112 TBM 8 4 Compression Lugs Use the following procedure to attach cables 2 if compression lugs are supplied and can be 1 used 1 Attach the supplied compression lugs to the drive end of the cables 2 Attach compression lug to the drive X X60003 277 Technical Data 278 ACH550 UH User s Manual Motor Connections A Warning Never connect line power to the drive output terminals U2 V2 or W2 Line vo
46. Activate to start stop drive from timer LU M4 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 U 115 DI3 Timer override Activate to start drive LU 116 DI4 Safety interlock 1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 Ll 147 DI5 Safety interlock 2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A fu Default operation Started gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A fx Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B f 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A Default operation Fault 1 525 connected to 27 27 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 9 INT TIMER CS 3416 SIGNAL 3 MIN 200 0 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS O NOT SEL 3417 SIGNAL 3 MAX 200 0 1103 REF1 SEL O KEYPAD 3419 OUTPUT 3 DSP UNIT 4 96 1106 REFS SEL 2 Al2 3420 OUTPUT 3 MIN 200 0 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 15 TIMER1 3421 OUTPUT 3 MAX 200 0 1301 MINIMUM Al1 0 0 3622 BOOST SEL 3 D13 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 4001 GAIN 1 0 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 DI2 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0 s 1609 START ENABLE 2 5 DI5 4101 GAIN 1 0 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0 s 3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM 0105 TORQUE 4110 SETPOINT SEL 1 A11 Start Up ACH550 User s Manual 55 Floating Point This application macro is for applications where spe
47. FLN fieldbus 205 AI TIOWS mat naglaan kt mah Na ated na Napataas 287 alarm CODES aa nana RU RD hah ba NN Gan 255 enable display parameter 91 Sting maa pada NAGA NAL Paa 255 altitude environment limit 2 0 295 shipping Mmt rrea petrn pa k s AA 295 altitude derating 0 0 269 analog cable requirements 0c eee eee 285 analog I O connections a n eee 286 specifications 20005 286 ACH550 UH User s Manual analog input BACnet object listing 223 data parameter 2 2005 64 fault limit parameters 110 filter parameters 2 000 82 less than min auto reset parameter 112 less than min fault parameter 108 loss fault codes 0005 250 maximum parameters 82 minimum parameters 82 N2 object listing 000 196 parameter group eee eee 82 ref correction formula 76 analog output BACnet object listing 223 content max parameters 86 content min parameters 86 current max parameters 86 current min parameters 86 data content parameters 86 data parameter 2 200 64 filter parameters 2 000 87 N2 object listing a 19
48. Note Low Frequency 1 value must be between e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 1 e 8109 START FREQ 1 8113 LOW FREQ 2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 30 0 Hz US Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary motor e See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The second auxiliary motor stops if e Two auxiliary motors are running e ACH550 output frequency drops below the limit 8113 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8113 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8114 LOW FREQ 3 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 30 0 Hz US Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third auxiliary motor e See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The third auxiliary motor stops if Three auxiliary motors are running ACH550 output frequency drops below the limit 8114 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8114 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8115 AUX MOT START D 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 1s 5 0s Sets the Start Delay for the auxiliary motors The output frequency must remain above the start frequency limit parameter 8109 8110 or 8111 for this time period before the auxiliary motor starts e See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 1s 3 0s Sets the Stop Delay for the auxiliary motors The output frequency must remain below the low frequency l
49. P REF 2 oe P1106 0 17 A REF2 O Panel REF2 ai PID Setpoint na a o Al P4016 G40 Current PID1 Torque Power Al P4017 1P4014HP4015 F Current Torque PID Act Value Power Panel REF 1 P1103 P1107 DI baa Piio4 P11 Al 4 Speed 05 Comm REF 1 EXT 2 Panel REF 2 ll P1106 GTZ Const Al Speed Comm REF 2 P1106 ganel bi ra P4010 PID Setpoint 0 17 P1107 F P4012 P1108 Ale P4013 19 Comm Internal G40 Al P4016 PID1 Current PID1 Out Torque owe P4014 P4015 Current 4017 PID Act Value Torque Power Note In order to activate and use the PID controller Parameter 1106 must be set to value 19 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 129 PID Controller Advanced ACH550 has 2 separate PID Controllers e Process PID PID1 and e External PID PID2 Process PID PID1 has 2 separate sets of parameters e Process PID PID1 SET1 defined in Group 40 and e Process PID PID1 SET2 defined in Group 41 You can select between the 2 different sets by using parameter 4027 Typically two different PID Controller sets are used when the load of the motor changes considerably from one situation to another You can use External PID PID2 defined in Group 42 in 2 different ways Instead of using additional PID controller hardware you can set outputs of the ACH550 to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve In this case set Parameter 4230 to va
50. R 100 9 o gt BTT gene 6 AGND Analog input circuit common connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 MQ 7 AO1 Analog output programmable Default frequency 0 20 mA load lt 500 Q 8 AO2 Analog output programmable Default current 0 20 mA load lt 500 Q 9 AGND Analog output circuit common connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 MQ 10 24V_ Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 250 mA reference to GND short circuit protected 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common connected internally as floating 12 DCOM Digital input common To activate a digital input there must be 2410 V or lt 10 V between that input and DCOM The 24 V may be provided by the y ACH550 X1 10 or by an external 12 24 V source of either polarity 3 2113 Dit Digital input 1 programmable Default start stop w 14 DI2 Digital input 2 programmable Default not configured 15 DIZ Digital input 3 programmable Default constant preset speed 16 DI4 Digital input 4 programmable Default safety interlock 17 DI5 Digital input 5 programmable Default not configured 18 DI6 Digital input 6 programmable Default not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable Default Ready 20 RO1A Maximum 250 VAC 30 VDC 2A TN Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA Ri 21 RO1B __ 3 22 RO2ZC Relay output 2 programmable Default Running 5 Maximum 250 VAC 30 VDC 2
51. SPEED 06 LAI CURRENT 07 LAI TORQUE 08 LAI POWER 09 LAI DRIVE TEMP 10 LAI DRIVE KWH 11 LAI DRIVE MWH 12 LAI RUN TIME 13 LAI DC BUS VOLT 14 LAI OUTPUT VOLT 17 LAI MOTOR TEMP 18 LAI MREV COUNTER 21 LDI FWD REV 23 LDI STOP RUN 25 LDI EXT1 2 ACT 27 LDI DRIVE READY 28 LDI AT SETPOINT 33 LDI HANDAUTO ACT 34 LDI ENA DIS ACT 36 LDI FLN LOC ACT Drive I O FLN Drive I O Report Point eT ype Subpoint Name Data 40 LDO RO 1 COMMAND Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight controls YE LDO RO 2 COMMAND oa data reported for each point and the 42 LDO RO 3 COMMAND 43 LDO RO 4 COMMAND 44 LDO RO5 COMMAND Embedded Fieldbus 204 ACH550 UH User s Manual FLN Drive I O Report Point Ea Subpoint Name Data 45 LDO RO 6 COMMAND 46 LAO AO 1 COMMAND 47 LAO AO 2 COMMAND 70 LDI DI 1 ACTUAL 71 LDI DI2 ACTUAL 72 LDI DI3 ACTUAL 73 LDI DI 4 ACTUAL 74 LDI DI 5 ACTUAL 75 LDI DI 6 ACTUAL 76 LDI RO1 ACTUAL 77 LDI RO 2 ACTUAL 78 LDI RO3 ACTUAL 79 LDI RO 4 ACTUAL 80 LDI RO5 ACTUAL 81 LDI RO 6 ACTUAL 85 LAI AO 2 ACTUAL Drive Config FLN Drive Config Report Point Ena Subpoint Name Data 30 LAO CURRENT LIM Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight controls 31 LAO ACCEL TIME 1 HAI kaha data reported for each point and the 32 LAO DECEL
52. US 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 48 0 US Sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 81 Group 12 Constant Speeds Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1209 TIMED MODE SEL T2 1 2 v Defines timer activated constant speed mode Timer can be used to change between external reference and a maximum of three constant speeds or to change between a maximum of 4 selectable speeds i e constant speeds 1 2 3 and 4 1 EXT cs1 2 3 Selects an external speed when no timer is active selects Constant speed 1 when Timer 1 is active Selects Constant speed 2 when Timer 2 is active and selects Constant speed 3 when both Timers 1 and 2 are active TIMER TIMER2 Function 0 0 External reference 1 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 Constant speed 3 1204 2 CS1 2 3 4 Selects Constant speed 1 when no timer is active selects Constant speed 2 when Timer 1 is active selects Constant speed 3 when Timer 2 is active selects Constant speed 4 when both timers are active TIMER TIMER2 Function 0 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 Constant speed 2 1203 1 Constant speed 3 1204 1 Constant speed 4 1205 7 0 7 ZS S a Start Up 82 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 13 Analog Inputs This group defines the limits and the filtering fo
53. e Uses three digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated Function No constant speed Constant speed 1 1202 Constant speed 2 1203 Constant speed 3 1204 Constant speed 4 1205 O N g os DI1 Constant speed 5 1206 Constant speed 6 1207 Constant speed 7 1208 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 al O oj ol O ol ol ol o P A PR PER R PAR 13 D13 4 5 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI3 DI4 and DI5 e See above DI1 2 3 for code 14 DI4 5 6 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI5 DI6 and DI7 e See above DI1 2 3 for code 15 18 TIMER 1 4 Specifies the timer used to select a Constant Speed as the reference The reference selection depends on the state of the selected timer and the value of 1209 TIMED MODE SEL See table To enable and set timers see Group 36 Timer Functions 1201 15 16 17 18 Reference Timer 1 2 3 4 1209 1 1209 2 Timer 0 External reference Constant Speed 1 State 1 Constant Speed 1 Constant Speed 2 15 18 TIMER FUNCTION 1 4 Selects Constant speed 1 when Timer Function is active See Group 36 Timer Functions 19 TIMER 1 amp 2 Selects a constant depending on the state of Timers 1 amp 2 See parameter 1209 1 DI1 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI1 e Inverse operati
54. gt 50 4 At the Control Panel select e Select Parameters e Select Group 99 Select Parameter 9910 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 63 Group 01 Operating Data This group contains drive operating data including actual signals The drive sets the values for actual signals based on measurements or calculations You cannot set these values Group 01 Operating Data Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0101 SPEED amp DIR The calculated speed of the motor rom amp motor direction 0102 SPEED 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm The calculated speed of the motor rpm 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz The frequency Hz applied to the motor Also shown by default in OUTPUT display 0104 CURRENT 0 0 1 5 low 0 1A The motor current as measured by the ACH550 Also shown by default in OUTPUT display 0105 TORQUE 200 200 0 1 Output torque Calculated value of torque on motor shaft in of motor nominal torque 0106 POWER 1 5 1 5 Pn 0 1 kW The measured motor power in kw 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0 V 2 5 Vgn 1V The DC bus voltage in VDC as measured by the ACH550 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE OV 2 0 Van 1V The voltage applied to the motor 0110 IDRIVE TEMP 0 C 150 C 0 1 C The temperature of the drive power transistors in Centigrade 0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 500 Hz 0 1 Hz External reference REF1 in rom o
55. l A lt CW Bit6 0 CW Bit5 1 gt KEY RFG ACCELERATOR Slate ENABLED mm CW CONTROL WORD SW STATUS WORD C 1 me Path described in example CW Bit6 1 Param 0104 CURRENT f Param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ OPERATING SW Bit8 1 RFG Ramp Function Generator D lt a This state transition also occurs if the fault is reset from any other source e g digital input Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual Reference Scaling ABB Drives and DCU Profiles The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives profile 191 ABB Drives and DCU Profiles Reference Reference Range Type Scaling Remarks REF1 32767 Speed or 20000 par 1105 Final reference limited by pa frequency 0 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 32767 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 2001 2002 20000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency REF2 32767 Speed or 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by sag frequency 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 32767 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 2001 2002 10000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency Torque 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 0 0 2015 2017 torque1 or 2016 10000 par 1108 2018 torque2 10000 corresponds to 100 PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by Reference 0 0 4012 4013 PID set1 or 10000 par 1108 10000 corresponds to 100 4112 4113 PID set2
56. maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference nominal torque 1108 REF2 MAX 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 torque 0 600 Sets the maximum for external reference 2 e The maximum analog input signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF2 MAX in e Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 or 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 sets the maximum analog input signal e This parameter sets the maximum frequency reference e The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference nominal torque Start Up 78 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 12 Constant Speeds This group defines a set of constant speeds In general e You can program up to 7 constant speeds ranging from 0 500 Hz or 0 30000 rpm e Values must be positive No negative speed values for constant speeds e Constant speed selections are ignored if the torque control is active or the process PID reference is followed or the drive is in local control mode or PFA Pump and Fan Alternation is active Note Parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 acts also as a so called fault speed which may be activated if the control signal is lost For example see parameters 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION 3002 PANEL COMM ERROR and 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Group 12 Constant Speeds Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 14 19 1 3 v Defines the digital inputs used to select Constant
57. parameter 103 automatic tuning parameter 103 derivation time parameter 102 integration time parameter 102 parameter group 0 102 proportional gain parameter 102 speed constant digital input selection parameter 78 parameter 27272054 aie KAO bs 80 parameter group 00 78 stall frequency fault parameter 110 function fault parameter 110 FOQION caf kanal at kh Mo ANG eee kao ies 110 time fault parameter 110 standardses annam ea a a a A 297 CE marking aaaea 298 CSA 022 2 No 14 annann 297 CSA marking eaaa uaaa 297 C Tick marking 2 000000 298 EN 50178 0 00 cece ee eee 297 EN 60204 1 esra aa e a R a D a 297 EN 60520 a a eaa na ANA 297 EN 61800 3 a aaa 297 298 IEC 60664 1 2 297 U SURO Ta aa a Ka ang mn 297 UL marking smese 000 e eee eee 297 start aux motor PFA parameters 146 aux motor delay 0000 147 control EFB comm 4 164 control FBA COMM 65 232 DC magnetizing time parameter 98 delay PFA parameter 155 frequency PFA parameters 146 function parameter 98 inhibit parameter nananana anna 99 parameter group eee 98 torque boost current parameter 99 start delay parame
58. parameters 113 supply phase fault code 251 switching frequency ee eee 278 switching frequency control parameter 106 switching frequency derating 269 switching frequency parameter 106 symmetrically grounded network 274 system controls parameter group 88 T temperature derating 269 terminals location diagram R5 R6 18 location diagram R7 R8 19 termination 160 test date parameter 2 4 115 thermal fail fault code 251 timers DOOSI Kuan aeie ee eh tote hae eee 124 enable uei om a Scariest Ge ag ot Naiba 123 parameter group 0c ee eee 122 SOUCO maa Ta a e dd aa eels KAN 125 start stop time 222 0000 123 Lolo AA ARA 10 torque atfault history parameter 71 boost current parameter 99 data parameter 200 0055 63 max limit select parameter 96 max limit parameter Aa 97 min limit select parameter 96 min limit parameters 97 triac drive inputs 0 eae eee 285 trim mode PID parameter 138 309 trim scale PID parameter 138 type CODE Fe AA STE EA Ape ae 9 U U f ratio parameter 2005 105 UL type 1 COUGH naire hie Nh ADAN Ba eee eas Dae 9
59. providing views of selected points these reports are often easier to work with than Views of the full point database FLN ABB ACH550 Report Data report format Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight controls both the particular data reported for each point and the FLN Startup Report Data report format ABB ACH550 Point i ENG Subpoint Name 01 LAO CTLR ADDRESS 02 LAO APPLICATION 20 LAO OVRD TIME 29 LDO DAY NIGHT Startup Point i type Subpoint Name 21 LDI FWD REV 22 LDO CMD FWD REV 23 LDI STOP RUN 24 LDO CMD STP STRT 25 LDI EXT1 2 ACT 26 LDO EXT1 2 CMD 34 LDI ENA DIS ACT 35 LDO ENA DIS CMD 36 LDI FLNLOC ACT 60 LAO INPUT REF1 61 LAO INPUT REF2 68 LDO FLN LOC CTL 69 LDO FLN LOC REF Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight controls both the particular data reported for each point and the Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 203 FLN Startup Report Point S E Iyos Subpoint Name Data 94 LDO RESET FAULT Overview FLN Overview Report Point h Ea Subpoint Name Data 03 LAI FREQ OUTPUT Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight controls 04 LAI PGT OUTPUT paaa ba data reported for each point and the 05 LAI
60. speed or frequency Others The drive supports a maximum of 15 output words Protocols limits may further restrict the total Input Words STATUS WORD Actual Value speed or frequency Others The drive supports a maximum of 15 input words Protocols limits may further restrict the total Note The words output and input are used as seen from the fieldbus controller point of view For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view The meanings of the controller interface words are not restricted by the ACH550 However the profile used may set particular meanings Fieldbus Controller Fieldbus Control Word CW p References Process I O cyclic Status Word SW la kx Actual Values Service Messages Parameter R W Requests Responses lt gt E Acyclic Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The fieldbus controller sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive The drive switches between states according to the bit coded instructions in the CONTROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD requires that The drive is in remote REM control Fieldbus Adapter 230 ACH550 UH User s Manual The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands from E
61. 0 no op 29 LINK ON 1 Master is detected in link 0 Link is down 30 REQ STARTINH 1 Start inhibit request is pending 0 Start inhibit request is OFF 31 OFF INTERLOCK 1 Panel OFF button For the control panel or PC tool this is pressed the OFF button interlock 0 no op Status Word The contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station Embedded Fieldbus 186 ABB Drives Profile The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the status word content for the ABB Drives Profile ACH550 UH User s Manual ABB Drives Profile EFB STATUS WORD Bit Name Value Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram RDY ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON NOT READY TO SWITCH ON RDY RUN READY TO OPERATE OFF1 ACTIVE RDY REF k OPERATION ENABLED OPERATION INHIBITED TRIPPED FAULT No fault OFF_2_STA k OFF2 INACTIVE OFF2 ACTIVE OFF_3_STA OFF3 INACTIVE OFF3 ACTIVE SWC ON INHIB SWITCH ON INHIBIT ACTIVE SWITCH ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE ALARM Warning alarm See Alarm Listing in the Diagnostics section for details on alarms No warning alarm AT SETPOINT OPERATING Actual value equals within tolerance limits the reference value Actual value is outside tolerance limits not equal to reference value REMOTE Drive control l
62. 0 4 0 3 Control Terminal Descriptions The following full page diagram provides a general description of the control terminals on the drive For specific application details see the Application Macros on page 44 Note Terminals 3 6 and 9 are at the same potential Technical Data 286 ACH550 UH User s Manual Note For safety reasons the fault relay signals a fault when the ACH550 is powered down X1 Drive Control Terminal Description 1 SCR Terminal for signal cable screen Connected internally to chassis ground 2 Alt Analog input channel 1 programmable Default external reference Resolution 0 1 accuracy 1 J1 Al1 OFF 0 2 10 V R 312 kQ 2 p gt mS ON or for OFF for ON jH J1 Al1 ON 0 4 20 mA R 100 9 o gt T Tig AGND Analog input circuit common connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 MQ 10 V Potentiometer reference source 10 V 2 max 10 mA 1KQ lt R lt 10kO Q Al2 Analog input channel 2 programmable Default PID feedback Resolution 0 1 p accuracy 1 g J1 Al2 OFF 0 2 10 V R 312 kQ 2 gt SoN CON lt or for OFF f for ON 4 J1 Al2 ON 0 4 20 mA
63. 062A 6 R4 1295 4420 280 165 077A 6 R6 1504 5136 405 238 099A 6 R6 1821 6219 405 238 125A 6 R6 2442 8339 405 238 144A 6 R6 2813 9607 405 238 Dimensions and Weights The dimensions and mass for the ACH550 depend on the frame size and enclosure type If unsure of frame size first find the Type code on the drive labels Then look up that type code in the Technical Data on page 266 to determine the frame size A complete set of dimensional drawings for ACH550 drives is located in the ACH550 Technical Reference manual Technical Data 290 ACH550 UH User s Manual Mounting Dimensions R1 R6 Mounting Dimensions W1 W2 ih See Detail A 5 d n n ft See Detail B AD 2 e Detail A Detail B x0032 UL type 1 and UL type 12 Dimensions for each Frame Size Rer R1 l R2 l R3 R4 l R5 l R6 l mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in W1 98 0 3 9 98 0 3 9 160 6 3 160 6 3 238 9 4 263 10 4 W2 98 0 3 9 98 0 3 9 H1 318 12 5 418 16 4 473 18 6 578 22 8 588 23 2 675 26 6 a 5 5 0 2 5 5 0 2 6 5 0 25 6 5 0 25 6 5 0 25 9 0 0 35 b 10 0 0 4 10 0 0 4 13 0 0 5 13 0 0 5 14 0 0 55 14 0 0 55 c 5 5 0 2 5 5 0 2 8 0 0 3 8 0 0 3 8 5 0 3 8 5 0 3 d 5 5 0 2 5 5 0 2 6 5 0 25 6 5 025 6 5 0 25 9 0 0 35 Mounting Hardware M5 10 M5 10 M5 10 M5 10 M6 1 4 M8 5 16
64. 097A 4 and for 600 V frame sizes R2 R4 NOTE Selecting 12 kHz switching frequency automatically limits parameter 9906 to 0 80 of drive nameplate FLA 2607 SW FREQ CTRL 0 1 1 The switching frequency may be reduced if the ACH550 internal temperature rises above a limit See Figure This function allows the highest possible switching frequency to be used based on operating conditions Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise 0 oFF The function is disabled 1 ON The switching frequency is limited according to the figure sai R1 R6 Dri fsw Limit sMO ATIVOS Limit R7 R8 Drives 12 kHz 8 kHz 4 gt ACH550 Temperature 4 kHz 11 420 a 4 kHz ACH550 i i i Temperature i i 1kHz o 7 gt 7 7 gt 80 C 90 C 100 90 C 100 C 2608 SLIP COMP RATIO 0 200 1 0 Sets gain for slip compensation in A squirrel cage motor slips under load Increasing the frequency as the motor torque increases compensates for the slip Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE SCALAR SPEED 0 No slip compensation 1 200 Increasing slip compensation 100 means full slip compensation 2609 NOISE SMOOTHING 0 1 1 0 This parameter introduces a random component to the switching frequency Noise smoothing distributes the acoustic motor noise over a range of frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise intensity The random component has an average of OHz and is added to the switching
65. 14 CSA Standard for Industrial Control Equipment Compliance is valid with the following provisions The motor and control cables are chosen as specified in this manual e The installation rules of this manual are followed UL Markings When a UL mark is attached to the ACH550 AC drive it verifies that the drive follows the provisions of UL 508C When a CSA mark is attached to the ACH550 AC drive it verifies that the drive follows the provisions of C22 2 No 14 The ACH550 is UL and CSA listed to 100 KAIC without use of input fuses or circuit breaker For end users convenience the section Fuses provides fuse recommendations Branch circuit protection must to be provided per local code Note UL508A manufactures are not required to use the fuse recommendations for the purpose of UL Listing a panel with an ACH550 AFD The ACH550 has an electronic motor protection feature that complies with the requirements of UL 508C and CSA C22 2 No 14 When this feature is selected and properly adjusted additional overload protection is not required unless more than one motor is connected to the drive or unless additional protection is required by applicable safety regulations See parameters 3005 MOT THERM PROT and 3006 MOT THERM TIME Technical Data 298 ACH550 UH User s Manual The drives are to be used in a controlled environment See section Ambient Conditions on page 295 for specific limits For open
66. 2113 ISTART DELAY Defines the Start delay After the conditions for start have been fulfilled the drive waits until the delay has elapsed and then starts the motor Start delay can be used with all start modes e If START DELAY zero the delay is disabled Start Up 100 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 22 Accel Decel This group defines ramps that control the rate of acceleration and deceleration You define these ramps as a pair one for acceleration and one for deceleration You can define two pairs of ramps and use a digital input to select one or the other pair Group 22 Accel Decel Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL 6 7 1 0 Defines control for selection of acceleration deceleration ramps Ramps are defined in pairs one each for acceleration and deceleration See below for the ramp definition parameters 0 NOT SEL Disables selection the first ramp pair is used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection e Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 e De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection e See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines serial communication as the control for ramp pair selection 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection e De activating the digital input select
67. ABB Drives Profile 183 ABB Drives Profile EFB CONTROL WORD 3 Commanded Bit Name Value State Comments 0 OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE CONTROL 7 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205 Normal command sequence e Enter OFF1 ACTIVE e Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active 1 OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF2 inactive CONTROL R 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence e Enter OFF2 ACTIVE e Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED 2 OFF3 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF3 inactive CONTROL 0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within in time specified by parameter 2208 Normal command sequence e Enter OFF3 ACTIVE e Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Be sure motor and driven equipment can be stopped using this mode 3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note the Run OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active See 1601 If 1601 is set to COMM this bit also actives the Run Enable signal 0 OPERATION Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED INHIBITED 4 Unused ABB DRV LIM RAMP_OUT_ 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED ABB DRV FULL 0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to Zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force 5 RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT E
68. ACT Indicates the drive s run status regardless of control source 1 RUN 0 STOP 24 RUN STOP CMD Commanded by FLN to start the drive e Parameter 1001 must be set to COMM for FLN to control the run state of the drive by EXT1 e Parameter 1002 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 25 EXT1 2 ACT Indicates whether External 1 or External 2 is the active control source 1 EXT2 0 EXT1 26 EXT1 2 CMD Commanded by FLN to select External 1 or External 2 as the active control source 1 EXT2 0 EXT1 Parameter 1102 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 27 DRIVE READY Indicates the drive is ready to accept a run command 1 READY 0 NOTRDY 28 AT SETPOINT Indicates the drive has reached its commanded setpoint 1 YES 0 NO 29 DAY NIGHT 1 of the 5 mandatory FLN points required for compatibility with Siemens control systems It has no functionality in the drive application None 30 CURRENT LIM Sets the output current limit of the drive 2003 31 ACCEL TIME 1 Sets the acceleration time for Ramp 1 2202 32 DECEL TIME 1 Sets the deceleration time for Ramp 1 2203 33 HANDAUTO ACT Indicates whether the drive is in Hand or Auto control 1 HAND 0 AUTO 34 ENA DIS ACT Indicates the status of the Run Enable command regardless of its source 1 ENABLE 0 DISABL 35
69. Al2 sets the minimum analog input signal e These parameters reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference 1105 REF1 MAX 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 60 0 Hz US 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 1800 rpm US Sets the maximum for external reference 1 e The maximum analog input signal as a percent of full the signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF1 MAX in HZ rpm e Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 or 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 sets the maximum analog input signal A Ext ref A Ext ref P 1104 P1105 lt o et MIN MAX l l l P 1104 Analog ig ee MIN l input signal MAX Analog i gt r T gt P 1301 P 1302 P 1301 P1302 input signal or 1304 or 1305 or 1304 or 1305 1106 REF2 SELECT 0 19 1 19 v Selects the signal source for external reference REF2 0 17 Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 19 PID1OUT The reference is taken from the PID1 output See Groups 40 and 41 19 Pint REF2 LIMIT If PFA is used SELECT max 1107 1108 ly PFA 1 17 ta MIN 1107 1108 1107 REF2 MIN 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 torque 0 600 Sets the minimum for external reference 2 e The minimum analog input signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF2 MIN in e Parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 or 1304 MINIMUM Al2 sets the minimum analog input signal This parameter sets the minimum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the
70. DELAY 1414 RO 4 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s Defines the switch off delay for relay 4 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1415 RO5 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s Defines the switch on delay for relay 5 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1416 RO5 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Defines the switch off delay for relay 5 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1417 RO6 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Defines the switch on delay for relay 6 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1418 RO6 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Defines the switch off delay for relay 6 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY Start Up 86 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 15 Analog Outputs This group defines the drive s analog current signal outputs The drive s analog outputs can be Any parameter of the Operating Data group Group 01 e Limited to programmable minimum and maximum values of output current e Scaled and or inverted by defining the minimum and maximum values of the source parameter or content Defining an maximum value parameter 1503 or 1509 that is less than the content minimum value parameter 1502 or 1508 results in an inverted output Filtered Group 15 Analog Outputs Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 99 199 1 103 Defines the content for analog output AO1 99 EXCITE PTC Provides a current source for sensor type PTC Output 1 6 mA See Group 35 P 1505 100 EXCITE PT100 Provides a current source for
71. DI2 DI2 DI2 10035 DI3 DI3 DI3 10036 DI4 DI4 DI4 10037 DI5 DI5 DI5 10038 DIE DI6 DI6 Active low For the 1xxxx registers e Additional discrete inputs are added sequentially The ACH550 supports the following Modbus function codes for discrete inputs Function Code Description 02 Read input status 3xxxx Mapping Modbus Inputs The drive maps the following information to the 3xxxx Modbus addresses called Modbus input registers Any user defined analog inputs The following table summarizes the input registers Internal ene e Location Remarks All Profiles 30001 Al1 This register shall report the level of Analog Input 1 0 100 30002 Al2 This register shall report the level of Analog Input 2 0 100 The ACH550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 3xxxx registers Function Code Description 04 Read 3xxxx input status 4xxxx Register Mapping The drive maps its parameters and other data to the 4xxxx holding registers as follows e 40001 40099 map to drive control and actual values These registers are described in the table below 40101 49999 map to drive parameters 0101 9999 Register addresses that do not correspond to drive parameters are invalid If there is an attempt to read or write outside the parameter addresses the Modbus interface returns an exception code to the controller Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH Use
72. EM3 GND X0003 Terminals Not Used Warning For floating impedance grounded or unsymmetrically grounded networks disconnect the internal RFI filter by removing screw EM1 drive is shipped with EM3 already removed See Floating Networks on page 275 Installation 18 ACH550 UH User s Manual The following diagram shows the power and ground terminal layout for frame sizes R5 and R6 R5 R6 agang Homme A A A Si F2 B Ea F1 V o dao User omer F2 M BIL o o bocod 1G apo a 8 W CMI TTL PE GND Power Input Power Output to Motor U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 F1 Terminals Not Used O ARNBAMNANO Terminals Not Used UDC R A UDC U2 A GND Power Input Power Output to Motor U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 Warning For floating impedance grounded or unsymmetrically grounded networks disconnect the internal RFI
73. ENA DIS CMD Commanded by FLN to assert the Run Enable command 1 ENABLE 0 DISABL Parameter 1601 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 36 FLN LOC ACT Indicates if the drive has been placed in FLN LOCAL mode by commanding either point 68 FLN LOC CTL or point 69 FLN LOC REF Commanding either of these points to FLN 1 steals control from its normal source and places in under FLN control Note that the HAND mode of the panel has priority over FLN local control Embedded Fieldbus 212 ACH550 UH User s Manual FLN Detailed Point Descriptions Point Description Drive Parameter 37 FLN CTL SRC Indicates if FLN is a source for control inputs 1 YES 0 NO Note that this status point is true if any of the following control inputs are from FLN Run Stop Ext1 2 Select or Run Enable 38 FLN REF1 SRC Indicates if FLN is the source for speed reference 1 1 YES 0 NO 39 FLN REF2 SRC Indicates if FLN is the source for speed reference 2 1 YES 0 NO 40 RO1 COMMAND Controls the output state of Relay 1 Parameter 1401 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 1 ON 0 OFF 0134 bit 0 41 RO2 COMMAND Controls the output state of Relay 2 Parameter 1402 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 1 ON 0 OFF 0134 bit 1 42 RO3 COMMAND Controls the output st
74. English 1 USER S1 SAVE 3 USER S2 SAVE With these it is possible to save two different user parameter sets into the drive permanent memory for later use Each set contains parameter settings including Group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification run 0 USER S1 LOAD 2 USER S2 LOAD With these the user parameter sets can be taken back in use 9904 MOTOR CTRL MOD 1 3 1 3 v Selects the motor control mode 1 VECTOR SPEED sensorless vector control mode e Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm e Reference 2 is speed reference in 100 is absolute maximum speed equal to the value of parameter 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED or 2001 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed 3 SCALAR FREQ scalar control mode e Reference 1 is frequency reference in Hz e Reference 2 is frequency reference in 100 is absolute maximum frequency equal to the value of parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY or 2007 MINIMUM FREQUENCY if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed Start Up 62 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 99 Start up Data Code Description Range Resolution Default S 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 115 345 V 200 V US 1V 230 V v 230 690 V 400 V US 1V 460 V 288 862 V 600 V US 1V 575 V Defines the nominal motor voltage Output voltage e Must equal the value on the motor ratin
75. Example If the ambient temperature is 50 C 122 F the derating factor is 100 1 C x 10 C 90 or 0 90 The output current is then 0 90 x lon Altitude Derating In altitudes from 1000 4000 m 3300 13 200 ft above sea level the derating is 1 for every 100 m 330 ft If the installation site is higher than 2000 m 6600 ft above sea level please contact your local ABB distributor or office for further information Single Phase Supply Derating For 208 240 Volt series drives a single phase supply can be used In that case the derating is 50 Switching Frequency Derating When using the 8 kHz switching frequency parameter 2606 is used either e Derate Py and lon to 80 or e Set parameter 2607 SW FREQ CTRL 1 ON which allows the drive to reduce the switching frequency if when the drive s internal temperature exceeds 90 C See the parameter description for 2607 for details When using the 12 kHz switching frequency parameter 2606 is used either e Derate Py and lon to 65 to 50 for 600 V R4 frame sizes that is for ACH550 xx 032A 6 ACH550 xx 062A 6 and Ambient temperature maximum to 30 C 86 F or e Set parameter 2607 SW FREQ CTRL 1 ON which allows the drive to reduce the switching frequency if when the drive s internal temperature exceeds 80 C See the parameter description for 2607 for details Technical Data 270 ACH550 UH User s Manual Input Power Connections
76. ID directly 5317 must be 0 For example the following values set the ID to 49 134 5311 49134 and 5317 0 For IDs 5 65 335 The ID equals 5311 s value plus 10 000 times 5317 s value For example the following values set the ID to 71 234 5311 1234 and 5317 7 Automatic Baud Rate Detection Set the communication baud rate using drive parameter 5303 However this value is overridden if automatic baud rate detection is enabled and a different baud rate is detected By default autobaud detection is disabled enable by setting drive parameter 5314 to 1 When autobaud detection is enabled drive parameter 5315 displays the detected baud rate Note Autobaud detection samples for and adjusts to only the standard MS TP baud rates 9600 19200 38400 amp 76800 Max Info Frames Property Configure the Device Object Max Info Frames property using drive parameter 5312 Default 5312 1 Max Master Property Configure the Device Object Max Master property using drive parameter 5313 Default 5313 127 Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual MS TP Token Counter 217 Parameter 5316 stores the count of MS TP tokens passed to the associated node Statement This statement is part of this Standard and is required for its use BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement Date December 1 2005 Vendor Name ABB Inc Product Name Low Voltage AC Motor Drive Product Mo
77. OFF ON INPUT_6 OFE ON PP ERVLS 2 ERTL TEXTO HND AUTO HAND AUTO ALARM OFF ON MNTNCE R OFF ON DRV REDY AT_SETPT RUN ENAB N2 LOC M NO YES yor YES NO YES AUTO N2_L N2 ACTRE NON UTESY ACH550 UH User s Manual Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual CSBI CSBI CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSAO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO CSBO BIZ5 N N N2 RLISRC NO YES BI26 N N N2_R2SRC NO YES AOL wy Yr Y REF 1 Ma WEN AO2 Wo Y NY REF 2 Ny wow AO3 NG My ACCE i1 Ig MAS AO4 Y Y DECE A JAAN AO5 Y Y CURR LIM A AOG Y Y TROT py YY AO8 Y Y PIDI GN ow o PID1 I Li on PIDI DD hot A09 Y Y PID1_FLT s A010 Y Y A011 Y Y A012 Y Y A013 Y Y A014 Y Y A015 Y Y A016 Y Y A017 Y Y A018 Y Y A019 Y Y AO20 Y Y BO1 Y Y BO2 Y Y BO3 Y Y BO4 Y Y BO5 Y Y BO6 Y Y BO7 Y Y BO8 Y Y BO9 Y Y BO10 Y Y BO11 Y Y BO12 Y Y BO13 Y Y BO14 Y Y BO15 Y Y BO16 Y Y BO17 Y Y BO18 Y Y BO19 Y Y BOZON EY PID2 GN 3 PID2 I Ni WG TPTDZ D 5 Won PID2 ALT tg CMD_AO_1
78. PID controller e Parameter has no significance when the PID regulator is by passed see 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL 0 KEYPAD Control panel provides reference 1 Al1 Analog input 1 provides reference 2 Al2 Analog input 2 provides reference 8 COMM Fieldbus provides reference 9 COMM All Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 Al1 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 10 COMM Al1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 11 DI3U 4D RNC Digital inputs acting as a motor potentiometer control provide reference DI3 increases the speed the U stands for up DI4 decreases the reference the D stands for down e Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change e R Stop command resets the reference to zero e NC Reference value is not copied 12 DIJU 4D NC Same as DI3U 4D RNC above except Stop command does not reset reference to zero At restart the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference 13 DI5U 6D NC Same as DI3U 4D NC above except e Uses digital inputs DI5 and DI6 14 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 15 All Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11
79. Proper input wiring line voltageis NOT connected to drive output e The fault can be erroneously declared if the input power is a delta grounded system and motor cable capacitance is large This fault can be disabled using parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT 36 INCOMP The drive cannot use the software SWTYPE e Internal Fault The loaded software is not compatible with the drive e Call support representative 37 CB OVERTEMP Drive control board is overheated Check for and correct e Excessive ambient temperatures e Fan failure e Obstructions in the air flow 101 SERF CORRUPT Error internal to the drive Contact your local ABB sales representative and report the error number 102 RESERVED 103 SERF MACRO 104 RESERVED 105 RESERVED Diagnostics ACH550 UH User s Manual 253 Fault Fault Name In Pere a Code Panel Description and Recommended Corrective Action 201 DSP T1 Error in the system Contact your local ABB sales representative and report OVERLOAD the error number 202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 203 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 204 DSP STACK ERROR 205 RESERVED obsolete 206 OMIO ID ERROR 207 EFB LOAD ERR 1000 PAR HZRPM Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following LIMITS e 2001 MINIMUM SPEED gt 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 2007 MINIMUM FREQ gt 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ e 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside proper range gt 50 e 200
80. Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Setting Magpus DCU N2 FLN BACnet ABB DRV PROFILE 1601 RUN 7 COMM Run enable by 40001 40031 BO4 35 BV12 ENABLE fieldbus bit 3 bit 6 inverted 1604 FAULT 8 COMM Fault reset by 40001 40031 BO6 94 BV14 RESET SEL fieldbus bit 7 bit 4 1606 LOCAL 8 COMM Source for local Does not 40031 LOCK lock selection is the apply bit 14 fieldbus 1607 PARAM 1 SAVE Saves altered 41607 40032 BO18 N A SAVE parameters to bit 2 memory then value returns to O 1608 START 7 COMM Source for start Does not 40032 BV20 ENABLE 1 enable 1 is the apply bit 2 fieldbus Command word 1609 START 7 COMM Source for start 40032 BV21 ENABLE 2 enable 2 is the bit 3 fieldbus Command word 2013 MIN 7 COMM Source for minimum 40031 TORQUE torque selection is bit 15 SEL the fieldbus 2014 MAX 7 COMM Source for TORQUE maximum torque SEL selection is the fieldbus 2201 ACC DEC 7 COMM Source for ramp 40031 1 2 SEL pair selection is the bit 10 fieldbus 1 Use Memorize Point command Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual Relay Output Control 167 Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires e Drive parameter values set as defined below e Fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent
81. R6 246A 4 Note 1 245 200 R6 245A 4 Note 1 245 200 R7 316A 4 316 250 R8 368A 4 368 300 R8 414A 4 414 350 R8 486A 4 486 400 R8 526A 4 526 450 R8 602A 4 602 500 R8 645A 4 645 550 R8 1 ACH550 xx 097A 4 an R4 frame size 267 The ACH550 xx 045A 4 an R3 frame size replaces the ACH550 xx 044A 4 similarly ACH550 xx 078A 4 an R4 frame size replaces the ACH550 xx 077A 4 the replaces the ACH550 xx 096A 4 the ACH550 xx 125A 4 an R4 frame size replaces the ACH550 xx 124A 4 and the ACH550 xx 246A 4 an R6 frame size replaces the ACH550 xx 245A 4 Technical Data 268 Ratings 500 600 Volt Drives ACH550 UH User s Manual Abbreviated column headers are described in Symbols on page 268 Type Code Normal Use ACH550 xx bn Py Frame Size see below A HP Three phase supply voltage 500 600 V 02A7 6 2 7 2 R2 03A9 6 3 9 3 R2 06A1 6 6 1 5 R2 09A0 6 9 7 5 R2 011A 6 11 10 R2 017A 6 17 15 R2 022A 6 22 20 R3 027A 6 27 25 R3 032A 6 32 30 R4 041A 6 41 40 R4 052A 6 52 50 R4 062A 6 62 60 R4 077A 6 77 75 R6 099A 6 99 100 R6 125A 6 125 125 R6 144A 6 144 150 R6 Symbols Typical ratings Normal use 10 overload capability lon continuous rms current 10 overload is allowed for one minute in ten minutes 1 1x IN Ny 1 min 9 min 1 min PN typical motor power in normal use The k
82. Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Write Multiple 0x17 This function combines functions 0x03 and 0x10 into a single Holding Registers command Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 175 Mapping Summary The following table summarizes the mapping between the ACH550 parameters and 1 0 and Modbus reference space For details see Modbus Addressing below ACH550 Modbus Reference Supported Function Codes Control Bits Coils Oxxxx 01 Read Coil Status e Relay Outputs e 05 Force Single Coil e 15 Force Multiple Coils Status Bits Discrete Inputs 1xxxx e 02 Read Input Status e Discrete Inputs e Analog Inputs Input Registers 3xxxxx e 04 Read Input Registers e Parameters Holding Registers 4xxxx 03 Read 4X Registers Control Status Words 06 Preset Single 4X Register e References 16 Preset Multiple 4X Registers 23 Read Write 4X Registers Communication Profiles When communicating by Modbus the ACH550 supports multiple profiles for control and status information Parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE selects the profile used ABB DRV LIM The primary and default profile is the ABB DRV LIM profile which standardizes the control interface with ACH400 drives This profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface and is discussed in detail in the following sections e DCU PROFILE
83. Reinstall the filter restrainers Piecing Y ab 3 Install each filter frame to the bonnet on top ACH550 UH User s Manual wire retainers that hold the filters in place e Lay the filter frames on a flat work surface The wire retainers have a square U shape Remove by squeezing the open end of the U towards the middle of the square until the retainer top open end of U clears the filter frame PC00001 PC00019 e Save the retainers for reinstallation Remove and inspect the filter 4 Install clean filters Note When installing DUSTLOK filter media the white side must face to outside of the cabinet and the orange side faces in Be sure to tuck the filter edges into the groove around the entire filter frame This detail is very important for proper operation e Insert the base of a retainer bottom of U shape into a filter frame channel e Squeeze the open end of the U until it clears the filter frame e Seat the open end of the U oO Pcoovis PC0000 in the filter frame channel e Release the retainer to its relaxed square shape A of the cabinet e Carefully align the frame s mounting hooks with the slots in the bonnet The hooks should be pointing down e Press down at the top of the filter frame The filter frame slides down approximately 34 inch mo PC00012 PC00011 e Check all around the filter frame for a
84. S 3010 STALL FUNCTION 0 2 1 0 This parameter defines the operation of the Stall function This Torque 4 protection is active if the drive operates in the stall region see figure for the time defined by 3012 STALL TIME The User Limit is defined in ge Group 20 by 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 or the limit on the COMM input 0 NOT SEL Stall protection is not used 95 1 FAULT When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set User by 3012 STALL TIME Limit e The drive coasts to stop l e A fault indication is displayed 2 WARNING When the drive operates in the stall region for the time l set by 3012 STALL TIME l A warning indication is displayed 3011 The warning disappears when the drive is out of the stall region for STALL FREQ HI half the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME Stall region f Fo 3011 STALL FREQUENCY 0 5 50 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 20 0 Hz This parameter sets the frequency value for the Stall function Refer to Figure 3012 STALL TIME 10 400s 1s 20s This parameter sets the time value for the Stall function 3017 EARTH FAULT 0 1 1 1 Defines the drive response if the drive detects a ground fault in the motor or motor cables The drive monitors for ground faults while the drive is running and while the drive is not running Also see parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT 0 DISABLE No drive response to ground faults 1 ENABLE Groun
85. Specified using parameters 5310 5317 Read only values containing information on the operation of the drive 16 bit words containing a sign bit and a 15 bit integer When negative values written as the two s complement of the corresponding positive value Scaled as described earlier in Actual Value Scaling Exception Codes Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive The ACH550 supports the standard Modbus exception codes defined below Exception Code Name Meaning 01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION Unsupported Command 02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS The data address received in the query is not allowable It is not a defined parameter group 03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable value for the ACH550 because it is one of the following e Outside min or max limits e Parameter is read only e Message is too long e Parameter write not allowed when start is active e Parameter write not allowed when factory macro is selected Embedded Fieldbus 182 ACH550 UH User s Manual ABB Control Profiles Technical Data Overview ABB Drives Profile The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple protocols including Modbus and the protocols available on the FBA module Two implementations of the ABB Drives profile are available ABB DRV FULL This implementation standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and AC
86. Speeds See general comments in the introduction 0 NOT SEL Disables the constant speed function 1 DI1 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI1 e Digital input activated Constant Speed 1 activated 2 6 DI2 DI6 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI2 DI6 See above 7 DI1 2 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI1 and DI2 e Uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated DI1 DI2 Function 0 0 No constant speed 1 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 Constant speed 3 1204 Can be set up as a so called fault speed which is activated if the control signal is lost Refer to parameter 3001 AI lt MIN function and parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 8 DI2 3 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI2 and DI3 e See above DI1 2 for code 9 DI3 4 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 and D14 e See above DI1 2 for code 10 D14 5 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI4 and DI5 e See above DI1 2 for code 11 DI5 6 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI5 and DI6 e See above DI1 2 for code Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 79 Group 12 Constant Speeds Code Description Range Resolution Default S 12 DI1 2 3 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI1 DI2 and DI3
87. TIME 1 48 LDO RST RUN TIME 49 LDO RESET KWH 59 LDO LOCK PANEL 66 LDO SPD OUT MIN 67 LDO SPD OUT MAX 95 LAO MBOX PARAM 96 LAO MBOX DATA 97 LDO MBOX READ 98 LDO MBOX WRITE Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 205 FLN Process PID Report Data Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight controls both the particular data reported for each point and the report format FLN External PID Report Data Each host FLN application e g CIS or Insight controls both the particular data reported for each point and the report format Process PID Point y Type Subpoint Name 15 LAI PRC PID FBCK 16 LAI PRC PID DEV 50 LAO PRC PID GAIN 51 LAO PRC PID ITIM 52 LAO PRC PID DTIM 53 LAO PRC PID DFIL 54 LDO PRC PID SEL 60 LAO INPUT REF1 61 LAO INPUT REF2 82 LAI Al 1 ACTUAL 83 LAI Al 2 ACTUAL 84 LAI AO 1 ACTUAL 85 LAI AO 2 ACTUAL External PID Point Type Subpoint Name 55 LAO EXT PID GAIN 56 LAO EXT PID ITIM 57 LAO EXT PID DTIM 58 LAO EXT PID DFIL 62 LAO EXT PID STPT 63 LAI EXT PID FBCK 64 LAI EXT PID DEV 82 LAI Al 1 ACTUAL 83 LAI Al 2 ACTUAL 84 LAI AO 1 ACTUAL 85 LAI AO 2 ACTUAL Scaling Drive Feedback Values Feedback values are provided with units of percent where 0 and 100 correspond to the range of the se
88. The minimum space requirements for the drive are the outside dimensions see Outside Dimensions R1 R6 on page 292 or Outside Dimensions R7 R8 on page 293 plus air flow space around the unit see Cooling on page 287 The distance between the motor and the drive is limited by the maximum motor cable length See either Motor Connection Specifications on page 278 or EN 61800 3 Compliant Motor Cables on page 281 The mounting site must support the drive s weight See Weight on page 291 Installing the Drive A A Warning Before installing the ACH550 ensure the input power supply to the drive is off Warning Metal shavings or debris in the enclosure can damage electrical equipment and create a hazardous condition Where parts such as conduit plates require cutting or drilling first remove the part If that is not practical cover nearby electrical components to protect them from all shavings or debris Prepare the Mounting Location 1 The ACH550 should only be mounted where all of the j requirements defined in Preparing for Installation on page 8 are met Mark the position of the mounting holes 1 X0002 Installation 12 ACH550 UH User s Manual Note Frame sizes R3 and R4 have four holes along the top Use only two If possible use the two outside holes to allow room to remove the fan for maintenance Note ACH400 drives can be replaced using the original
89. Underload fault trip may be near Check e Check for overloaded motor e Adjust the parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 e Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 parameters 2011 UNDERLOAD Motor load is lower than expected This alarm warns that a Motor Underload fault trip may be near Check e Motor and drive ratings match motor is NOT undersized for the drive e Settings on parameters 3013 to 3015 2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in the stall region This alarm warns that a Motor Stall fault trip may be near 2013 note 1 AUTORESET This alarm warns that the drive is about to perform an automatic fault reset which may start the motor e To control automatic reset use parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET 2014 note 1 AUTOCHANGE This alarm warns that the PFA autochange function is active To control PFA use parameter group 81 PFA CONTROL Diagnostics ACH550 UH User s Manual 257 Alarm ag Code Display Description 2015 PFA INTERLOCK This alarm warns that the PFA interlocks are active which means that the drive cannot start the following Any motor when Autochange is used The speed regulated motor when Autochange is not used 2016 Reserved 2017 OFF BUTTON Note 1 2018 PID SLEEP This alarm warns that the PID sleep function is active which means note 1 that the motor could ac
90. a Ext setpoint Control rim requires parameter 1106 value pid1 out and parameter 4010 value comm Communication Fault When using fieldbus control specify the drive s action if serial communication is lost Drive Parameter Value Description 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 NOT SEL Set for appropriate drive response 1 FAULT 2 CONST SP7 3 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual Feedback from the Drive EFB Pre defined Feedback Inputs to the controller drive outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol This feedback does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of feedback data For a complete listing see input word point object listings in the technical data for the appropriate protocol starting on page 174 169 Dee Parameter Protocol Reference Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 0102 SPEED 40102 Al3 5 AVO 0103 FREQ OUTPUT 40103 Ali 2 AV1 0104 CURRENT 40104 Al4 6 AV4 0105 TORQUE 40105 Al5 7 AV5 0106 POWER 40106 Al6 8 AVE 0107 DC BUS VOLT 40107 Al11 13 AV2 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 40109 Al12 14 AV3 0115 KWH COUNTER 40115 AI8 10 AV8 0118 DI1 3 STATUS bit 1 DI3 40118 BI12 72 B16 BI7 BI8 0122 RO1 3 STATUS 40122 B14 BI5 BI6 76 77 78 BIO BI1 BI2 0301
91. according to the following Par 0134 Binary RO6 RO5 RO4 RO3 RO2 RO1 0 000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 000001 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 000010 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 000011 0 0 0 0 1 1 4 000100 0 0 0 1 0 0 63 111111 1 1 1 1 1 1 e 0 De energize relay 1 Energize relay 36 COMM 1 Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication e Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energizes relay 1 relay 6 according to the following Par 0134 Binary RO6 RO5 RO4 RO3 RO2 RO1 0 000000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 000001 1 1 1 1 1 0 2 000010 1 1 1 1 0 1 3 000011 1 1 1 1 0 0 4 000100 1 1 1 0 1 1 63 111111 0 0 0 0 0 0 e 0 De energize relay 1 Energize relay 37 TIMER 1 Energize relay when timer 1 is activated See Group 36 Timer Functions 38 40 TIMER 2 4 Energize relay when Timer 2 4 is active See Timer 1 above 41 M TRIG FAN Energize relay when cooling fan counter is triggered See group 29 Maintenance Trig 42 M TRIG REV Energize relay when revolutions counter is triggered See group 29 Maintenance Trig 43 M TRIG RUN Energize relay when run time counter is triggered See group 29 Maintenance Trig 44 M TRIG MWH Energize relay when power consumption counter is triggered See group 29 Maintenance Trig 45 OVERRIDE Energize relay when override is activated 47 USER LOAD C Energize relay when a user load curve fault or alarm occurs 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 0 45 1 2 Defines the event or conditio
92. aims to fulfill the industry standard drive profile for each protocol e g PROFldrive for PROFIBUS AC DC Drive for DeviceNet Control Word As described earlier in Control Interface the CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system For specific CONTROL WORD content see the user s manual provided with the FBA module Status Word As described earlier in Control Interface the contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station For specific STATUS WORD content see the user s manual provided with the FBA module Reference As described earlier in Control Interface the REFERENCE word is a speed or frequency reference Note REF2 is not supported by the Generic Drive profiles Reference Scaling REFERENCE scaling is fieldbus type specific However at the drive the meaning of a 100 REFERENCE value is fixed as described in the table below For a detailed description on the range and scaling of the REFERENCE see the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Generic Profile Reference Reference Range Type Scaling Remarks REF Fieldbus Speed 100 par 9908 Final reference limited by specific 0 0 1104 1105 100 par 9908 Actual motor speed limited by 2001 2002 speed Frequency 100 par 9907 Final reference limited by 0 0 1104 1105 100 par 9907 Actual motor speed limited by 2007 2008
93. and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFA e The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI4 Free Not allowed DI5 Speed Reg Motor DI6 Free 1 DI1 DI4 Free DI1 DI4 Free DI5 Speed Reg Motor DI5 First PFA Relay D16 First PFA Relay DI6 Free 2 Not allowed DI1 DI4 Free DI5 First PFA Relay DI6 Second PFA Relay 3 6 Not allowed Not allowed 6 DI6 Enables the Interlock function and assigns digital input DI6 to the interlock signal for the speed regulated motor e Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 No PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays 0 DI1 DI5 Free Not allowed DI6 Speed Reg Motor 1 Not allowed DI1 DI5 Free DI6 First PFA Relay 2 6 Not allowed Not allowed 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL 0 1 1 0 Selects Regulator by pass control When enabled f Regulator by pass control provides a simple control OUT 4 mechanism without a PID regulator fax e Use Regulator by pass control only in special applications 0 NO Disables Regulator by pass control The drive uses the normal PFA reference 1106 REF2 SELECT 1 YES Enables Regulator by pass control e The process PID regulator is bypassed Actual value of PID is used as the PFA reference input Normally EXT REF2 is used as the PFA reference e The drive
94. been detected 0150 CB TEMP Temperature of the drive control board in degrees Celsius Fahrenheit Note Some drives have a control board OMIO that does not support this feature These drives always show the constant value of 25 0 C 0151 INPUT KWH R The drives accumulated input power consumption in kilowatt hours Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when in parameter set mode 0152 INPUT MWH The drives accumulated input power consumption in megawatt hours e Cannot be reset 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 67 Group 03 Actual Signals This group monitors fieldbus communications Group 03 Actual Signals Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 Read only copy of the Fieldbus Command Word 1 e The fieldbus command is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus controller The command consists of two Command Words Bit coded instructions in the Command Words switch the drive between states e To control the drive using the Command Words an external location EXT1 or EXT2 must be active and set to COMM See parameters 1001 and 1002 e The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O dis
95. braking Motor 4 0 NOT SEL Disables the DC current operation Speed De EA 1 DC HOLD Enables the DC Hold function See diagram e Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED T Stops generating sinusoidal current and injects DC into the motor when gt both the reference and the motor speed drop below the value of parameter 2105 Ref e When the reference rises above the level of parameter 2105 the drive resumes normal operation 2 DC BRAKING Enables the DC Injection Braking after modulation has DC Hold Dua T stopped Speed gt e If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 1 COAST braking is applied after start is removed If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION IS 2 RAMP braking is applied after ramp 2105 DC HOLD SPEED 0 360 1 rpm 5 rpm Sets the speed for DC Hold Requires that parameter 2104 DC CURR CTL 1 DC HOLD 2106 DC CURR REF 0 100 1 30 Defines the DC current control reference as a percentage of parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 2107 DC BRAKE TIME 0 250s 0 1s Os Defines the DC brake time after modulation has stopped if parameter 2104 is 2 DC BRAKING 2108 START INHIBIT 0 1 1 0 v Sets the Start inhibit function on or off The Start inhibit function ignores a pending start command in any of the following situations a new start command is required e A fault is reset e Run Enable parameter 1601 activates while start command is active Mode ch
96. by the EFB protocol O ABB DRV LIM Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACH400 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conforms to 32 bit DCU Profile 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACH600 800 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES 0 65535 1 0 Contains a count of valid messages received by the drive e During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS 0 65535 1 0 Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error received by the drive For high counts check e Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors e CRC calculations for possible errors 5308 EFB UART ERRORS 0 65535 1 0 Contains a count of the messages with a character error received by the drive 5309 EFB STATUS 0 7 1 0 Contains the status of the EFB protocol 0 IDLE EFB protocol is configured but not receiving any messages 1 EXEC INIT EFB protocol is initializing 2 TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between the network master and the EFB protocol 3 CONFIG ERROR EFB protocol has a configuration error 4 OFF LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT addressed to this drive 5 ON LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to this drive 6 RESET EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset 7 LISTEN ONLY EFB pr
97. by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 1601 RUN ENABLE 7 COMM Run enable by fieldbus 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 COMM Fault reset by fieldbus 1607 PARAM SAVE 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to memory then value returns to 0 Fieldbus Adapter 234 ACH550 UH User s Manual Relay Output Control Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires Drive parameter values set as defined below e Fieldbus controller supplied binary coded relay command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent 3 PINE Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 COMM Relay Output 1 controlled by fieldbus 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 36 COMM 1 Relay Output 2 controlled by fieldbus 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 controlled by fieldbus 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 controlled by fieldbus 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 controlled by fieldbus 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Relay Output 6 controlled by fieldbus 1 More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module Note Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below Drive Parameter Value Protocol Reference 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Relay 1
98. can also scale each parameter in the display for example to convert the motor speed to a display of conveyor speed Parameters 3402 3405 scale the parameter specified by 3401 parameters 3409 3412 scale the parameter specified by 3408 etc A bar meter rather than one of the parameter values Enable bar graph displays using parameters 3404 3411 and 3418 Bottom The bottom of the LCD display shows e Lower corners show the functions currently assigned to the two soft keys e Lower middle displays the current time if configured to show the time Operating the Drive AUTO HAND The very first time the drive is powered up it is in the auto control AUTO mode and is controlled from the Control terminal block X1 To switch to hand control HAND and control the drive using the control panel press and hold the gt or p button e Pressing the HAND button switches the drive to hand control while keeping the drive running e Pressing the OFF button switches to hand control and stops the drive To switch back to auto control AUTO press and hold the button Hand Auto Off To start the drive press the HAND or AUTO buttons to stop the drive press the OFF button Reference To modify the reference only possible if the display in the upper right corner is in reverse video press the UP or DOWN buttons the reference changes immediately The reference can be modified in the local control mode and can be
99. complies with the First environment restricted distribution and Second Environment limits of EN IEC 61800 3 Electromagnetic Environments Product standard EN 61800 3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods defines First Environment as environment that includes domestic premises It also includes establishments directly connected without intermediate transformers to a low voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Second Environment includes establishments other than those directly connected to a low voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual 299 Liability Limits The manufacturer is not responsible for e Any costs resulting from a failure if the installation commissioning repair alteration or ambient conditions of the drive do not fulfil the requirements specified in the documentation delivered with the unit and other relevant documentation e Units subjected to misuse negligence or accident e Units comprised of materials provided or designs stipulated by the purchaser In no event shall the manufacturer its suppliers or subcontractors be liable for special indirect incidental or consequential damages losses or penalties If you have any questions concerning your ABB drive please contact the local distributor or ABB office The
100. connections Wear on wires caused by equipment vibrations e Insufficient grounding and shielding on both the devices and on the communication cables Embedded Fieldbus 174 ACH550 UH User s Manual Modbus Protocol Technical Data Overview The Modbus protocol was introduced by Modicon Inc for use in control environments featuring Modicon programmable controllers Due to its ease of use and implementation this common PLC language was quickly adopted as a de facto standard for integration of a wide variety of master controllers and slave devices Modbus is a serial asynchronous protocol Transactions are half duplex featuring a single Master controlling one or more Slaves While RS232 can be used for point to point communication between a single Master and a single Slave a more common implementation features a multi drop RS485 network with a single Master controlling multiple Slaves The ACH550 features RS485 for its Modbus physical interface RTU The Modbus specification defines two distinct transmission modes ASCII and RTU The ACH550 supports RTU only Feature Summary The following Modbus function codes are supported by the ACH550 Function Code Hex Description Read Coil Status 0x01 Read discrete output status For the ACH550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Rea
101. continuous current 2 A rms cos 1 1 Arms cos 0 4 Digital Outputs Minimum load 500 mW 12 V 10 mA e Contact material Silver nickel AgN Isolation between relay digital outputs test voltage 2 5 kV rms 1 minute Control Cables General Recommendations Use multi core cables with a braided copper wire screen temperature rated at 60 C 140 F or above CT ae Double Shielded Single Shielded Example JAMAK by Draka NK Cables Example NOMAK by Draka NK Cables At the drive end twist the screen together into a bundle not longer than five times its width and connected to terminal X1 1 for digital and analog I O cables or to either X1 28 or X1 32 for RS485 cables Route control cables to minimize radiation to the cable e Route as far away as possible from the input power and motor cables at least 20 cm 8 in Where control cables must cross power cables make sure they are at an angle as near 90 as possible e Stay at least 20 cm 8 in from the sides of the drive Use care in mixing signal types on the same cable e Do not mix analog and digital input signals on the same cable e Run relay controlled signals as twisted pairs especially if voltage gt 48 V Relay controlled signals using less than 48 V can be run in the same cables as digital input signals Note Never mix 24 VDC and 115 230 VAC signals in the same cable Technical Data ACH550 UH User
102. description 20000000 5s 294 UL type 12 COKE man ah LIKA Nae Siete a wee Pas oe a 9 description 294 UL CSA markings 0 eee eee 297 underload fault code 02200 eee eee 251 undervoltage automatic reset parameter 112 control enable parameter 95 ungrounded network see floating network units PID parameter a 130 unsymmetrically grounded networks 274 user load curve frequency parameters 126 127 function parameter 126 mode parameter a 126 time parameter 2 0 126 torque parameters 126 127 user parameter set change control parameter 89 download 2 eee eee eee 39 V vibration stress testing a 295 virtual object N2 a 194 AN AP AA 196 voltage at fault history parameter 71 rating code ee 9 voltage frequency ratio parameter 105 W wake up delay PID parameter 135 wake up deviation PID parameter 135 warning automatic start Up 3 25 dangerous voltages 3 floating networks a 3 high temperatures 0 00000 3 sting aa naam Pana GB 3 parallel control connections 3 qualified installer 0 0 0 3 WENE maka HA NE asa cnuienis dod hind ha 291 wiring fault parameter 22 2
103. display parameter See parameter 3404 3412 OUTPUT 2 DSP UNIT 128 127 1 Selects the units used with the second display parameter See parameter 3405 3413 OUTPUT 2 MIN Depends on selection 1 Sets the minimum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3406 3414 OUTPUT 2 MAX Depends on selection 1 Sets the maximum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3407 3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM 100 199 1 120 Selects the third parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 3416 SIGNAL 3 MIN Depends on selection 1 Defines the minimum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3402 3417 SIGNAL 3 MAX Depends on selection 1 Defines the maximum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3403 3418 OUTPUT 3 DSP FORM 0 8 1 Defines the decimal point location for the third display parameter See parameter 3404 3419 OUTPUT 3 DSP UNIT 128 127 1 Selects the units used with the third display parameter See parameter 3405 3420 OUTPUT 3 MIN Depends on selection 1 Sets the minimum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter 3406 Start Up 118 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3421 OUTPUT 3 MAX Depends on selection 1 Sets the maximum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter 34
104. filter by removing screws F1 and F2 See Floating Networks on page 275 Installation ACH550 UH User s Manual 19 The following diagram shows the power and ground terminal layout for frame size R7 R8 is similar R7 Motor Ground Lug Terminals Bar ACH550 Ba la Input Power Terminals tt Terminal Strip Only on ACH550 UH Install the Wiring Checking Motor and Motor Cable Insulation A Warning Check the motor and motor cable insulation before connecting the drive to input power For this test make sure that motor cables are NOT connected to the drive 1 Complete motor cable connections to the motor but NOT to the drive output terminals U2 V2 W2 2 At the drive end of the motor cable measure the insulation resistance between each motor cable phase and Protective Earth PE Apply a voltage of 1 kV DC and verify that D resistance is greater than 1 Mohm R Installation 20 R1 aaah N Open the appropriate knockouts in the ACH550 UH User s Manual R6 Wiring UL type 1 Enclosure conduit box See Conduit Kit above Install thin wall conduit clamps not supplied 3 Install conduit box 6 Strip wires 10 11 12 13 14 Connect conduit runs for input power motor Route input power and motor wiring through Connect power motor and ground wires to and control cables to the box separate conduits
105. frequency Fieldbus Adapter ACH550 UH User s Manual Actual Values 247 As described earlier in Control Interface Actual Values are words containing drive values Actual Value Scaling For Actual Values scale the feedback integer using the parameter s resolution See Parameter Descriptions section for parameter resolutions For example Feedback Parameter Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution Integer Resolution Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 1 10 0 1 1 Where parameters are in percent the Parameter Descriptions section specifies what parameter corresponds to 100 In such cases to convert from percent to engineering units multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100 and divide by 100 For example Value of the Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution papang Madaari Parameter that Value of 100 Ref 100 9 defines 10096 Scaled Value 10 0 196 1500 rpm 10 0 1 1500 RPM 100 15 rpm 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 50 Hz 1 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED as the 100 reference and that 9908 1500 rpm 2 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ as the 100 reference and that 9907 500 Hz Actual Value Mapping See the user s manual supplied with the FBA
106. frequency set by parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ This parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 12kHZz 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 2619 DC STABILIZER Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer The DC stabilizer is used in scalar control mode to prevent possible voltage oscillations in the drive DC bus caused by motor load or weak supply network In case of voltage variation the drive tunes the frequency reference to stabilize the DC bus voltage and therefore the load torque oscillation 0 DISABLE Disables DC stabilizer 1 ENABLE Enables DC stabilizer Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 107 Group 29 Maintenance Trig This group contains usage levels and trigger points When usage reaches the set trigger point a notice displayed on the control panel signals that maintenance is due Group 29 Maintenance Trig Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 Sets the trigger point for the drive s cooling fan counter 0 0 NOT SEL 2902 COOLING FAN ACT 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 Defines the actual value of the drive s cooling fan counter The parameter is reset by writing 0 0 to it 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG 0 65535 MRev 1 MRev 0 Sets the trigger point for the motor s accumulated revolutions counter 0 0 NOT SEL 2904 REVOLUTION ACT 0 65535 MRev 1 MRev 0 Defines the actual value of the motor s accumulated revolutions counter The paramete
107. input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 Al2 Not configured 6 AGND Analog input circuit common 17 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA J1 Jumper Settings 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA 9 Al1 0 4 20 mA H9 AGND Analog output circuit common Q Ps Al2 0 4 20 mA 5 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 141 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Not configured 14 DI2 Not configured 15 DI3 Not configured 16 DI4 Not configured 17 DI5 Not configured 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A Default operation Started gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A Xx Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B f 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A fr Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 57 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 15 E CLIPSE 5303 EFBBAUD RATE 76 8 KB S 9802 COMM PROTO SEL 1 STD MODBUS 5304 EFB PARITY 2 8 EVEN 1 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 COMM 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 1 DCU PROFILE 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 10 COMM 5310 EFB PAR 10 103 1601 RUN ENABLE 7 COMM 5311 EFB PAR 11 104 1608 START ENABLE 1 7 COMM Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 61 Parameter Descriptions Parameter data is specific to ACH550 firmware version 1 51 Group 99 St
108. is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI1 In order to start the drive the digital input DI2 must be activated prior the pulse in DI1 e Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DI2 Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series e Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FWD 4 DI1P 2P 3 Three wire Start Stop Direction Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons as described for DI1P 2P e Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI3 DI3 activated Reverse de activated Forward 5 DI1P 2P 3P Start Forward Start Reverse and Stop e Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with two separate momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse Start Forward command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI1 In order to start the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated during the pulse in DI1 Start Reverse command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input D12 In order to start the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated prior the pulse in D12 e Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DI3 Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series e Re
109. l Reference 163 100 100 163 Max Ref 1003 DIRECTION 2 REVERSE Mache of aba ee Resultant Ref Fieldbus 163 100 100 163 Reference i i i i PE a l l l l Max Ref 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Resultant Ref Max Ref St A l l poi Fieldbus 163 100 paS Reference i i 100 163 l l S Max Ref _Z_ Fieldbus Adapter ACH550 UH User s Manual 245 Actual Value As described earlier in Control Interface Actual Values are words containing drive values Actual Value Scaling The scaling of the integers sent to the fieldbus as Actual Values depends on the resolution of the selected drive parameter Except as noted for Data Words 5 and 6 below scale the feedback integer using the resolution listed for the parameter in the Parameter Descriptions section For example Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 1 10 0 1 1 Data words 5 and 6 are scaled as follows ABB Drives Profile Data Word Contents Scaling 5 ACTUAL SPEED 20000 20000 par 1105 par 1105 6 TORQUE 10000 10000 100 100 Actual Value Mapping See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Fieldbus Adapter 246 ACH550 UH User s Manual Generic Profile Technical Data Overview The generic profile
110. load causes regeneration back into the drive keeping the DC bus charged and preventing an undervoltage trip The DC undervoltage controller increases power loss ride through on systems with a high inertia such as a centrifuge or a fan 0 DISABLE Disables controller 1 ENABLE TIME Enables controller with 500 ms time limit for operation 2 ENABLE Enables controlled without maximum time limit for operation Start Up 96 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 20 Limits Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 500 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz v Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency Fre f e A positive or zero minimum speed frequency defines two p pa 2007 value is lt 0 ranges one positive and one negative e A negative minimum speed frequency defines one speed range See figure 0 p lime Note Keep MINIMUM FREQ lt MAXIMUM FREQ P 2007 Freq 2007 value is gt 0 P 2008 P 2007 0 gt Time P 2007 rrequency ra P 2008 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 60 0 Hz US v Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL 6 7 1 0 Defines control of the selection between two minimum torque limits 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 and 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 O MIN TORQUE 1 Selects 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 as the minimum limit used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit
111. module Fieldbus Adapter 248 ACH550 UH User s Manual Diagnostics A A Warning Do not attempt any measurement parts replacement or other service procedure not described in this manual Such action will void the warranty may endanger correct operation and increase downtime and expense Warning All electrical installation and maintenance work described in this chapter should only be undertaken by qualified service personnel The Safety instructions on the first pages of this manual must be followed Diagnostic Displays The drive detects error situations and reports them using The green and red LED on the body of the drive The status LED on the control panel if the HVAC control panel is attached to the drive e The control panel display if the HVAC control panel is attached to the drive The Fault Word and Alarm Word parameter bits parameters 0305 to 0309 See Group 03 Actual Signals on page 67 The form of the display depends on the severity of the error You can specify the severity for many errors by directing the drive to e Ignore the error situation e Report the situation as an alarm Report the situation as a fault Red Faults The drive signals that it has detected a severe error or fault by Enabling the red LED on the drive LED is either steady on or blinking Setting an appropriate bit in a Fault Word parameter 0305 to 0307 e Overriding the cont
112. mounting holes For R1 and R2 frame sizes the mounting holes are identical For R3 and R4 frame sizes the inside mounting holes on the top of ACH550 drives match ACH400 mounts Note Frame sizes R7 and R8 have mounting holes inside the enclosure base See Mounting Dimensions on page 290 Where it is not possible to use either Ps mounting hole at the back of the base use an L bracket at the top of the enclosure to secure the cabinet to a wall or to the back of another enclosure Bolt the L bracket to the enclosure using the lifting lug bolt hole on the top of the enclosure y PC00023 Fastening points when installed back against a wall Top view Fastening points when installed i f aos back against back Drill holes of appropriate size in the mounting location Fastening the cabinet at the top using L brackets side view L bracket M12 bolt 1 2 to 9 16 in Cabinet top Installation ACH550 UH User s Manual 13 Remove Front Cover RT R6 UL type 1 1 Remove the control panel if attached 2 Loosen the captive screw at the top 3 Pull near the top to remove the cover IP2000 R1 R6 UL type 12 1 If hood is present Remove screws 2 holding the hood in place 2 If hood is present Slide hood up and off of the cover 3 Loosen the captive screws around the edge of the cover 4 Remove the cover IIX
113. not selected 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the override activation signal e This digital input must be activated for override activation signal 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the override activation signal See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the override activation signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the override activation signal e See DI1 INV above 1702 OVERRIDE FREQ 500 500 Hz 0 1 0 0 Defines a preset frequency for the override Note Set this value if motor control mode Par 9904 is SCALAR FREQ 3 Start Up 94 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 17 Override Code Description Range Resolution DefaultS 1703 OVERRIDE SPEED 30 000 30 000 rpm 1 0 Defines a preset speed for the override Note Set this value if motor control mode Par 9904 is VECTOR SPEED 1 1704 OVERR PASS CODE 0 65535 1 0 Entering the correct override pass code unlocks parameter 1705 for one change Enter the pass code always before changing the value of the parameter 1705 See parameter 1705 below The pass code is 358 The entry reverts back to zero automatically 1705 OVERRIDE ENABLE 0 1 1 0 Selects whether the override is enabled or disabled 0 OFF Override disabled 1 ON Override enabled When enabled the drive stores the values of all paramete
114. over the existing warning on the top of the module R7 R8 1 2 Use a hoist to move the cabinet into position Note If the cabinet location does not provide access to the cabinet sides be sure to re mount side panels before positioning cabinet Install and tighten mounting bolts PC00003 Installation ACH550 UH User s Manual 15 A Wiring Overview Conduit Kit Wiring R1 R6 drives with the UL type 1 Enclosure requires a conduit kit with the following items conduit box e screws e cover The kit is included with UL type 1 Enclosures Wiring Requirements Warning Ensure the motor is compatible for use with the ACH550 The ACH550 must be installed by a competent person in accordance with the considerations defined in Preparing for Installation on page 8 If in doubt contact your local ABB sales or service office As you install the wiring observe the following There are two sets of wiring instructions one set for each enclosure type UL type 1 and UL type 12 Be sure to select the appropriate procedure For the power connection points on the drive see the Connection Diagrams section below e Use separate metal conduit runs to keep these three classes of wiring apart Input power wiring Motor wiring Control communications wiring When installing input power and motor wiring refer t
115. page 280 For example Properly ground the wire screen cable shields Keep individual un screened wires between the cable clamps and the screw terminals as short as possible Route control cables away from power cables Installation ACH550 UH User s Manual 17 Connection Diagrams The following diagrams show e The terminal layout for frame size R3 which in general applies to frame sizes R1 R6 except for the R5 R6 power and ground terminals The R5 R6 power and ground terminals e The terminal layout for R7 R8 R1 R4 Diagram shows the R3 frame J1 DIP Switches for Analog Inputs The switch is one of two types o gt Alt in Voltage Position Q P Al2 in Current Position Original Illustration of available switch positions not default settings Panel Connector X1 Analog Inputs and Outputs and 10 V Ref Voltage Output Power LED Green Fault LED Red Digital Inputs and 24 V Pag Voltage Output X1 Relay Outputs E EL HANE Illustration of available switch positions not default settings J2 DIP Switches for R8485 Termination J2 J2 Optional Module 1 Communications RS485 A A ON i i ON Optional Module 2 off position on position E a i Power Input i um i Power Output to Motor ji 2 V2 W2 Frame Sizes U1 V1 W1 mnnn N U 3 3 R5 R6 differ See next page
116. parameter defined by AV25 MBOX PARAM WRITE RESET BV17 LOCK PANEL This object locks the panel and prevents parameter changes The corresponding drive parameter is 1602 LOCK UNLOCK BV18 CTL OVERRIDE CMD This object commands the drive into BACnet Control Override In this mode BACnet takes drive control from the normal source However the control panel s HAND mode has priority over BACnet Control Override ON OFF Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 223 Instance a Active Inactive Present Value ID Object Name Description Text Access Type BV19 CTL OVERRIDE This object indicates whether ON OFF R ACT the drive is in BACnet Control Override See BV18 BV20 START ENABLE 1 This object commands start ENABLE C enable1 Control requires DISABLE param 1608 value COMM BV21 START ENABLE 2 This object commands start ENABLE C enable1 Control requires DISABLE param 1609 value COMM Note For Present Value Access Types R Read only W Writeable C Commandable Commandable values support priority arrays amp relinquish defaults Analog Input Object Instance Summary The following table summarizes the Analog Input Objects supported Instance rary Present Value Object Name Description Units Access Type Ald ANALOG INPUT 1 This object indicates the value of Percent R Analog Input 1 The corresp
117. parameterized using Group 11 reference select to also allow modification in the remote control mode Note The Start Stop Shaft direction and Reference functions are only valid in local control LOC mode Parameters Mode To change the parameters follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu E Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 33 Select the Parameters mode with the UP DOWN buttons and select ENTER to GA 2 select the Parameters mode way wT Select the appropriate parameter group with the UP DOWN buttons and select eA j re NG wT Select the appropriate parameter in a m group with the UP DOWN buttons Select i 4 EDIT to change the parameter Sap wT Press the UP DOWN buttons to change the parameter value lt 5 b 4 Select SAVE to store the modified value or select CANCEL to leave the set mode 6 Any modifications not saved are cancelled e Each individual parameter setting is valid immediately after pressing SAVE al Select EXIT to return to the listing of parameter groups and again to return to v4 7 the main menu w4 To complete the control connections by manually entering the parameters see Parameters Mode in the this section For detailed hardware description see the Appendix Note The current parameter value appears below the highlighted parameter Note To view the default parameter value p
118. positions in permanent memory When power is restored the Autochange rotation starts at the position stored in memory e If the PFA relay configuration is changed or if the PFA enable value is changed the rotation is reset See the first bullet above 8120 INTERLOCKS 0 6 1 4 v Defines operation of the Interlock function When the Interlock function is enabled e An interlock is active when its command signal is absent e An interlock is inactive when its command signal is present e The ACH550 will not start if a start command occurs when the speed regulated motor s interlock is active the control panel displays an alarm 2015 PFA INTERLOCK Wire each Interlock circuit as follows e Wire a contact of the motor s On Off switch to the Interlock circuit the drive s PFA logic can then recognize that the motor is switched off and start the next available motor e Wire a contact of the motor thermal relay or other protective device in the motor circuit to the Interlock input the drive s PFA logic can then recognize that a motor fault is activated and stop the motor 0 NOT SEL Disables the Interlock function All digital inputs are available for other purposes e Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 The Autochange function must be disabled if Interlock function is disabled 1 DI1 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI1 to the interlock signal for each PFA relay These ass
119. pressure in the network the speed of the one pump changes according to a signal received from a pressure transducer When the variable speed pump reaches a maximum speed limit auxiliary pumps start as needed When using process PID see General Considerations on page 44 To use more than one the default Auxiliary pump see parameter group 81 ALTA SCR Signal cable shield screen G 2 Al External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC Q 5 Al2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings CA rrent 0 4 20 mA ng D 8 AO2 Output curre t 0 4 0m Hero P gt Al2 0 4 20 mA t9 AGND Analog output circuit common zZ 1 2 40f24v Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC l11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 12 DCOM Digital input common for all LU 3 D1 Start Stop Activate to start drive LU M41 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 15 DI3 Not configured _ __l16 Dl4 PFA interlock 1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 Ll 1471 DI5 PFA interlock 2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A _ Default operation PFA start
120. s Manual 285 Note Triacs used as sources for drive inputs may have excessive leakage current in the OFF state enough to Tac Aia PR L 1 0uF Drive read as ON to drive inputs Driving two or more inputs T 50v Inputs divides the leakage current reducing or eliminating the problem An alternative is to add a small capacitive load see figure A WARNING Relay coils generate noise Eau l spikes in response to steps in applied AC Coil ge o power To avoid drive damage from such 33 Ohm spikes all AC relay coils mounted across a drive inputs require R C snubbers and all gi DC relay coils mounted across drive Drive i i i DC Coil Diode outputs require diodes see figure a Outputs Analog Cables Recommendations for analog signal runs e Use double shielded twisted pair cable e Use one individually shielded pair for each signal e Do not use a common return for different analog signals Digital Cables Recommendation for digital signal runs A double shielded cable is the best alternative but single shielded twisted multi pair cable is also usable Control Panel Cable If the control panel is connected to the drive with a cable use only Category 5 Patch ethernet cable Drive s Control Connection Terminals The following table provides specifications for the drive s control terminals Control Frame Size Maximum Wire Size Torque mm AWG Nm lb ft All 1 5 16
121. sensor type P 1511 Pt100 Output 9 1 mA See Group 35 101 145 Output corresponds to a parameter in the Operating Data group Group 01 Parameter defined by value value 102 parameter 0102 P 1504 146 199 Not assigned P 1510 P 1502 1508 P 1503 1509 AO CONTENT gt AO CONTENT P 1503 1509 P 1902 1908 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN Depends on selection 0 0 Hz Sets the minimum content value e Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 e Minimum value refers to the minimum content value that will be converted to an analog output e These parameters content and current min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the output See figure 1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX Depends on selection 60 0 Hz Sets the maximum content value e Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 e Maximum value refers to the maximum content value that will be converted to an analog output 1504 MINIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 4 0mA Sets the minimum output current 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 20 0 mA Sets the maximum output current Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 87 Group 15 Analog Outputs Defines the filter time constant for AO2 See FILTER AO1 above Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1506 FILTER AO1 0 10s 0 1s 0 1s Defines the filter time constant for A01 The filtered signal re
122. separate install water tight conduit connectors not supplied 4 Route the motor wiring through conduit not the SJ PANA 5 Strip the wires 10 12 13 Route the control cables through the conduit not A Connect the ground screen pig tail for R8485 same conduit as input power wiring run Connect the power motor and ground wires to the drive terminals See Wiring Requirements on page 15 and Connection Diagrams on page 17 Note For R5 frame size the minimum power cable size is 25 mm 4 AWG For R6 frame size refer to Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size on page 276 the same conduit as either input power or motor wiring runs 9 11 Use available secure points and tie strap landings to permanently secure control wiring at a minimum distance of 14 from power wiring Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper screen into a pig tail Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at drive end cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive 7 end Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See Wiring Requirements on page 15 IP5008 Install the conduit box cover 1 screw Installation 22 ACH550 UH User s Manual R7 R8 Wiring Both Enclosure Types The figures show connections in
123. signal Bit 6 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the run disable signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the run enable signal e This digital input must be de activated for run enable If this digital input activates the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal e See DI1 INV above 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 0 2 1 1 Determines if the control panel can change parameter values e This lock does not limit parameter changes made by macros e This lock does not limit parameter changes written by fieldbus inputs e This parameter value can be changed only if the correct pass code is entered See parameter 1603 PASS CODE 0 LOCKED You cannot use the control panel to change parameter values e The lock can be opened by entering the valid pass code to parameter 1603 1 OPEN You can use the control panel to change parameter values 2 NOT SAVED You can use the control panel to change parameter values but they are not stored in permanent memory e Set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to 1 SAVE to store changed parameter values to memory 1603 PASS CODE 0 65535 1 0 Entering the correct pass code allows you to change the parameter lock See parameter 1602 above The code 358 allows you to c
124. tetas Rowe ke Pe ie eke ee eee ee 294 Ambient Conditions 32 25 Na an Sy he eee KA Ses GG wee 295 MateralS iceveavwsage ela DARE DAN bao eas BENG bee PI ee be ee 296 Applicable Standards Ga wae oe AER RE RRO REGe OREN ees 297 Liability MIMS a t 08 se KG DNA Dan we Pee eee dade tee oad 299 Index Table of Contents ACH550 UH User s Manual Installation Study these installation instructions carefully before proceeding Failure to observe the warnings and instructions may cause a malfunction or personal hazard A Warning Before you begin read Safety on page 3 Installation Flow Chart The installation of the ACH550 adjustable speed AC drive follows the outline below The steps must be carried out in the order shown At the right of each step are references to the detailed information needed for the correct installation of the unit Task PREPARE for installation A PREPARE the Mounting Location Vv REMOVE the front cover v MOUNT the drive A INSTALL wiring A CHECK installatio ko Vv RE INSTALL the cover v APPLY power START UP See Preparing for Installation on page 8 Prepare the Mounting Location on page 11 Remove Front Cover on page 13 Mount the Drive on page 14 Wiring Overview on page 15 and Install the Wiring on page 19 Check Installation on page 23 Re install Cov
125. the R7 cabinet the R8 cabinet is similar Remove the conduit connection plate from the top of the left bay Route the input power motor and control cables to the top of the cabinet Each cable type input power motor and control must be in separate conduit 3 Use punch to create holes for conduit connections as needed 6 Connect grounds to ground bar 10 11 UL type 12 Enclosure For each conduit run input power motor and control wiring must be separate install water tight Input Power conduit connectors not supplied Palle Connect input power and motor cables to the bus terminals See Wiring Terminal Strip Requirements on page 15 and Only on Connection Diagrams on page 17 ACHSSOUH BP0054 Use available secure points and tie strap landings to permanently secure control Cable wiring at a minimum distance of 14 from power wiring Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper screen into a pig tail Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at drive end Connect the ground screen pig tail for BP0054 RS485 cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive end Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See Wiring Requirements on page 15 Installation ACH550 UH User s Manual 23 Check Installation Before applying power perform the following checks M Check Inst
126. the character format to be used with the panel communication 0 8N1 No parity one stop bit 1 8N2 No parity two stop bits 2 8E1 Even parity one stop bit 3 801 Odd parity one stop bit 5204 OK MESSAGES 0 65535 1 Contains a count of valid Modbus messages received by the drive During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly 5205 PARITY ERRORS 0 65535 1 Contains a count of the characters with a parity error that is received from the fieldbus For high counts check e Parity settings of devices connected on the fieldbus they must not differ e Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors 5206 FRAME ERRORS 0 65535 1 Contains a count of the characters with a framing error that the fieldbus receives For high counts check e Communication speed settings of devices connected on the fieldbus they must not differ Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors 5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS 0 65535 1 Contains a count of the characters received that cannot be placed in the buffer Longest possible message length for the drive is 128 bytes Received messages exceeding 128 bytes overflow the buffer The excess characters are counted 5208 CRC ERRORS 0 65535 1 Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error that the drive receives For high counts check Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise leve
127. the time the last fault occurred 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 Fault code text 1 0 Fault code of the second last fault Read only 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 Fault code text 1 0 Fault code of the third last fault Read only Start Up 72 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 10 Start Stop Dir This group e Defines external sources EXT1 and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and direction changes e Locks direction or enables direction control To select between the two external locations use the next group parameter 1102 Group 10 AcStart Stop Dir Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 0 14 1 1 v Defines external control location 1 ExT1 the configuration of start stop and direction commands 0 NOT SEL No external start stop and direction command source 1 DI1 Two wire Start Stop e Start Stop is through digital input DI1 DI1 activated Start DI1 de activated Stop e Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 request is the same as 1003 1 fwd 2 DI1 2 Two wire Start Stop Direction e Start Stop is through digital input DI1 DI1 activated Start DI1 de activated Stop Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 request is through digital input D12 D12 activated Reverse de activated Forward 3 DI1P 2P Three wire Start Stop Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse Start
128. type enclosures units must be mounted inside an enclosure per National Electrical Code and local electrical codes Open type enclosures are IP21 UL type 1 units without the conduit box and or cover or IP54 UL type 12 units without the conduit plate and or top cover EMC Europe Australia and New Zealand This section describes conformance with EMC requirements in Europe Australia and New Zealand CE Marking When a CE mark is attached to the ACH550 AC drive it verifies that the drive follows the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives Directive 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC and Directive 89 336 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC The corresponding declarations are available on request and can be found using the internet at htip www abb com The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment used in European Economic Area The EMC product standard EN 61800 3 covers the requirements stated for drives such as the ACH550 The drive complies with the First environment restricted distribution and Second Environment limits of EN IEC 61800 3 C Tick Marking When a C Tick mark is attached to the ACH550 drive it verifies compliance with the relevant standard IEC 61800 3 1996 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods mandated by the Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme The drive
129. use the Parameters mode The order of tasks presented by the Start up Assistant depends on your entries The following task list is typical Task name Description Spin the motor Prompts for control panel display language selection Prompts for motor data Guides user through rotation check Commission drive Prompts for motor data Application Prompts for application macro selection Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 35 Task name Description References 1 42 Prompts for the source of speed references 1 and 2 e Prompts for reference limits e Prompts for frequency or speed limits Start Stop Control Prompts for the source for start and stop commands Prompts for start and stop mode definition Prompts for acceleration and deceleration times Protections e Prompts for current and torque limits e Prompts for the use of Run enable and Start enable signals Prompts for the use of emergency stop e Prompts for Fault function selection Prompts for Auto reset functions selection Constant Speeds Prompts for the use of constant speeds e Prompts for constant speed values PID Control Prompts for PID settings Prompts for the source of process reference Prompts for reference limits e Prompts for source limits and units for the process actual value Defines the use of Sleep function Low Noise Setup Promp
130. used e Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value e De activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used e See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used e The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is a parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input D11 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used e Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value e De activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used e See DI1 INV above 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL 6 7 1 0 Defines control of the selection between two maximum torque limits 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 and 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 0 MAX TORQUE 1 Selects 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 as the maximum limit used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value De activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used e See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the maximu
131. uses the feedback signal defined by 4014 FBK SEL or 4114 for the PFA frequency reference e The figure shows the relation between the control P 4014 signal 4014 FBK SEL OR 4114 and the speed lt A gt a B pg C regulated motor s frequency in a three motor Ni F system A No auxiliary motors running B One auxiliary motor running C Two auxiliary motors running Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 155 Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S Example In the diagram below the pumping station s outlet flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow A 3 Contactors Mains 3 py 3 ACH550 Hp ry A Inlet Pipe 8122 PFA START DELAY 0 00 10 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s Sets the start delay for speed regulated motors in the system Using the delay the drive works as follows Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor connecting the motor to the ACH550 power output Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFA START DELAY Starts the speed regulated motor Starts auxiliary motors See parameter 8115 for delay Warning Motors equipped with star delta starters require a PFA Start Delay After the ACH550 relay output switches a motor On the star delta starter must switch to the star connection and then back to the delta connection before the drive applies power So the PFA Start Delay must be longe
132. values 205 reference EFB ABB drives profile 191 reference FBA ABB drives profile 242 reference FBA generic profile 246 s curve ramp parameter 100 sensor type parameter 120 sensorless vector control mode 61 serial 1 error fault code 28 172 serial 1 error fault code 252 serial communication see comm serial NUMDET cedia es fae Aik Da GG week a ed 9 setpoint maximum PID parameter 133 setpoint minimum PID parameter 133 setpoint select PID parameter 132 shock stress testing 00005 295 short circuit fault code 249 single phase supply connection ee eee eens 15 erating s ae Nana Na dear keep ei AnG 269 sleep selection PID parameter 134 slip compensation ratio parameter 106 soft keys control panel 28 ACH550 UH User s Manual specifications control connections 284 COGIDO sc La AA 287 input power 00 eee ee eee 270 MAINS aa mGA ele Sek a eet 270 motor connections 278 speed at fault history parameter 71 data parameter 2 000 63 max limit parameter 95 min limit parameter 95 speed control acceleration compensation
133. with nuts on the inside of the cabinet Do not drop the hardware into the drive PC00014 sas PC00017 4 Remove the fan and fan frame as one unit 5 Disconnect the fan wiring and capacitor from the fan frame Then remove the four screws attaching the fan to the fan frame Remove the old fan PC00020 Maintenance 262 6 ACH550 UH User s Manual Install the new fan and capacitor with the replacement part for ABB in the reverse order of the above Ensure the fan is centered on the Velocity velocity stack and rotates freely Stack Capacitor PC00014 Enclosure Air Filter Replacement UL Type 12 Enclosures While holding the top of the filter frame pull Frame Sizes R7 R8 UL type 12 Enclosure Inlet Air Filter The inlet air filter for the R7 R8 UL type 12 enclosure is located in the enclosure front door up on the bottom of the frame The filter frame will slide up approximately 3 4 inch and can then safely removed by tilting away from the cabinet and lifting up PC00015 PC00010 Lay the filter frame on a flat work surface Remove the 3 retaining brackets by squeezing the tabbed corners in towards the middle of each bracket until the bracket clears the filter frame Save these brackets for replacement Remove and inspect the filter PC00007 Install the replacement filter Be g sure to tuck the filter into the grove around the entire filter fram
134. 0 Al21 Al 2 ACTUAL 0121 10 0 100 Al22 AO 1 ACTUAL 0124 10 mA 0 20 Al23 AO 2 ACTUAL 0125 10 mA 0 20 Al24 MOTOR TEMP 0145 1 C 0 200 Al25 REVOLUTION CNT 0142 1 MREV 0 32767 1 RATED SPEED is a percent of maximum frequency parameter 2008 if the drive is in scalar mode and iis a percent of maximum speed parameter 2002 in speed mode N2 Binary Input Objects The following table lists the N2 Binary Input objects defined for the ACH550 drive N2 Binary Inputs Number Object Drive Parameter Range BI1 STOP RUN Status Word 0 Stop 1 Drive Running Bl2 FORWARD REVERSE Status Word 0 Forward 1 Reverse BI3 FAULT STATUS Status Word 0 OK 1 Drive Fault Bl4 RELAY 1 STATUS 0122 bit mask 04 0 Off 1 On BI5 RELAY 2 STATUS 0122 bit mask 02 0 Off 1 On BI6 RELAY 3 STATUS 0122 bit mask 01 0 Off 1 On BI7 RELAY 4 STATUS 0123 bit mask 04 0 Off 1 On BI8 RELAY 5 STATUS 0123 bit mask 02 0 Off 1 On BI9 RELAY 6 STATUS 0123 bit mask 01 0 Off 1 On BI10 INPUT 1 STATUS 0118 bit mask 04 0 Off 1 On B111 INPUT 2 STATUS 0118 bit mask 02 0 Off 1 On Bli2 INPUT 3 STATUS 0118 bit mask 01 0 Off 1 On Bli3 INPUT 4 STATUS 0119 bit mask 04 0 Off 1 On Bli4 INPUT 5 STATUS 0119 bit mask 02 0 Off 1 On Embedded Fieldbus 198 ACH550 UH User s Manual N2 Binary Inputs N
135. 0 0 0 0 ccc ee ees 235 Diagnostics FBA 423 2400 584 Teriam ee cake mer veanestaeks Vente 236 ABB Drives Profile Technical Data 0 0 0 ccc eee 238 Generic Profile Technical Data 0 0 0 0 0 ccc cece eee 246 Table of Contents ACH550 UH User s Manual Diagnostics Diagn stie Displays Ha maza ad ANN LA DBA NG ie BAG KANA 248 Gorr cting Faults 2 3 2 pa bin ated DEAN ANA SPA Bete eee ee haan 249 Correcting Alarms AA AA CA 255 Maintenance Maintenance Intervals 0 a 646 oseG Kee eene eb eeee ieee es sah ieee 258 Heatsink kama aa ks era e se ala fk tad stata eae eels Gala ae eT ala 258 Drive Module Fan Replacement 200 c eee eee 259 Enclosure Fan Replacement UL Type 12 Enclosures 260 Enclosure Air Filter Replacement UL Type 12 Enclosures 262 CAPAGOrSs saka naa wie ake bng kang ALAN AA DA bases Sel eam Na a 265 COMMON ane AA AE 265 Technical Data Ratings aaee porri ham paaa mba nee vei PLANG Gee DANE ee yeaa 266 Input Power Connections aa paaa mad oie Rats WAP AN eas IPAG ea 270 Motor Connections ma samga si Sons cand He oe Eke GU ADA ae ee eee ee 278 Control Connections t2 bla saang od ce aes whoa adds dele she Raha wee 284 ETRICIGIIGY n aa Hayaan Ca a hice ela net NA eden me UNA ele te tas fa 287 elo Ja Crk aa Sea Ped ee te rotted Rk OU LE eae ae ad RE 287 Dimensions and Weights lt 2 nee foe NG aa la ie eg Ae acids te ae 289 Degrees of Protection 4 haa oe
136. 00 110 installation a an cee eee eee 19 OVEIVICOW 2 2 eee 15 requirements a 15 XYZ zero speed load fault parameter 109 Index Ak ED ED FADED 3AUA0000004092 RevH EN EFFECTIVE APR 1 2008 SUPERSEDES JAN 1 2008 ABB Oy AC Drives P O Box 184 FIN 00381 HELSINKI FINLAND Telephone 358 10 22 11 Telefax 358 10 22 22681 Internet http www abb com ABB Inc Automation Technologies Drives amp Machines 16250 West Glendale Drive New Berlin WI 53151 USA Telephone 1 262 785 3200 1 800 HELP 365 Telefax 1 262 780 5135 Internet http www abb drives com
137. 00 0 s 0 1 s 60 0 s Sets the acceleration time s for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 2 See 2002 ACCELER TIME 1 2206 DECELER TIME 2 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 60 0 s Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 2 See 2003 DECELER TIME 1 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 101 Group 22 Accel Decel Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 0 1000 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 2 See 2004 RAMP SHAPE 1 2208 EM DEC TIME 0 0 1800 s 0 1 s 1 0 s Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for an emergency See parameter 2109 EM STOP SEL Ramp is linear 2209 RAMP INPUT 0 6 6 1 0 Defines control for forcing the ramp input to 0 0 NOT SEL 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to O e Activating the digital input forces ramp input to 0 Ramp output will ramp to O according to the currently used ramp time after which it will stay at 0 e De activating the digital input ramp resumes normal operation 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp input to O e See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to O e De activating the digital input forces ramp input to 0 e Activating the digital input ramp resumes normal operatio
138. 017 ACT2 INPUT 1 5 1 2 v Defines the source for actual value 2 ACT2 1 Al 1 Uses analog input 1 for ACT2 2 Al 2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT2 3 Current Uses current for ACT2 scaled so e Min ACT2 0 current e Max ACT2 2 x nominal current 4 Torque Uses torque for ACT2 scaled so e Min ACT2 2 x nominal torque e Max ACT2 2 x nominal torque 5 Power Uses power for ACT2 scaled so e Min ACT2 2 x nominal power e Max ACT2 2 x nominal power 6 COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT2 7 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT2 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 Sets the minimum value for ACT1 Used with analog input min max settings e g 1301 MINIMUM Al1 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 Scales analog inputs used as actual values e See figure A Normal B Inversion ACT1 MINIMUM gt ACT1 MAXIMUM ACT1 Yo B ACT1 A a Bi JA P 4019 me l l l l P 4018 l ia E A ae l pb P 1301 P 1302 P1301 eae Analog input signal 3 1302 Analog input signal 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 Sets the maximum value for ACT1 e See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 Sets the minimum value for ACT2 e See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 Sets the maximum value for ACT2 e See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 4022 SLEEP SELECTION 6 7 0 Def
139. 07 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 119 Group 35 Motor Temp Meas This group defines the detection and reporting for a particular potential fault motor overheating as detected by a temperature sensor Typical connections are defined below One Sensor n lan Motor E a AGND AO1 _ AGND 10 nF Alt Motor ae cy AGND f f T Ka 1 Pin aot 10 nF 1 A Warning IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth To fulfil the insulation requirement connect a thermistor and other similar components to the drive s control terminals using any of these alternatives Separate the thermistor from live parts of the motor with double reinforced insulation e Protect all circuits connected to the drive s digital and analog inputs Protect against contact and insulate from other low voltage circuits with basic insulation rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit Use an external thermistor relay The relay insulation must be rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit Start Up 120 ACH550 UH User s Manual The figure below shows alternate thermistor connections At the motor end the ca
140. 07 EFB CRC ERRORS does not advance at all advances when an invalid message CRC is received 5308 EFB UART ERRORS does not advance at all advances when character format errors are detected such as parity or framing errors 5309 EFB status value varies depending on network traffic BACnet protocol 5316 EFB PAR 16 MS TP token counter advances for each token passed to this drive Does not apply for other protocols Embedded Fieldbus 172 ACH550 UH User s Manual Loss of Communication The ACH550 behavior if communication is lost was configured in Communication Fault The parameters are 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME The Parameter Descriptions section describes these parameters in detail No Master Station on Line If no master station is on line Neither the EFB OK MESSAGES nor the errors 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS increase on any of the stations To correct e Check that a network master is connected and properly programmed on the network e Verify that the cable is connected and is not cut or short circuited Duplicate Stations If two or more stations have duplicate numbers Two or more drives cannot be addressed Every time there is a read or write to one particular station the value for 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS or 5308 EFB UART ERRORS advances To correct Check all station numbers and edit conflicting values Swapped Wires If the communication wires are swapped termin
141. 1 0 ON OFF 76 LDI RO 1 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 77 LDI RO 2 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 78 LDI RO 3 ACTUAL OFF 5 1 0 ON OFF 79 LDI RO 4 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 80 LDI RO 5 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 81 LDI RO 6 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 82 LAI Al 1 ACTUAL 0 PCT 0 1 0 83 LAI Al2 ACTUAL 0 PCT 0 1 0 84 LAI AO1 ACTUAL 0 MA 0 1 0 85 LAI AO 2 ACTUAL 0 MA 0 1 0 86 LDI OK ALARM OK 1 0 ALARM OK 87 LDI OK MAINT OK 1 0 MAINT OK 88 LAI ALARM WORD 1 1 0 89 LAI ALARM WORD 2 1 0 90 LAI LAST FAULT 7 1 0 91 LAI PREV FAULT 1 gt 1 0 z 92 LAI PREV FAULT 2 1 0 93 LDI OK FAULT OK 1 0 FAULT OK 94 LDO RESET FAULT NO 1 0 RESET NO 95 LAO MBOX PARAM 5 1 0 F 96 LAO MBOX DATA gt 1 0 5 97 LDO MBOX READ DONE 1 0 READ DONE 98 LDO MBOX WRITE DONE 1 0 WRITE DONE 99 LAO ERROR STATUS 1 0 a Points not listed are not used in this application b A single value in a column means that the value is the same in English units and in SI units c Point numbers that appear in brackets may be unbundled at the field panel Embedded Fieldbus 210 ACH550 UH User s Manual Detailed Point Descriptions FLN Detailed Point Descriptions Buga Drive Point Description Parame
142. 122 BI4 76 BIO STATUS status BI6 78 Bl2 0123 RO 4 6 Relay 4 6 40123 0123 BIZ 79 BIS STATUS status BI9 81 BI5 Embedded Fieldbus 168 ACH550 UH User s Manual Analog Output Control Using the fieldbus for analog output control requires e Drive parameter values set as defined below e Fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Setting Modbus ABB DCU N2 FLN BACnet DRV PROFILE 1501 AO1 CONTENT 135 comm Analog Output 1 SEL VALUE 1 controlled by writing to 0135 COMM VALUE 1 parameter 0135 40135 AO14 46 AO0 1507 AO2 CONTENT 136 coMM Analog Output 2 SEL VALUE 2 controlled by writing to 0136 COMM VALUE 2 parameter 0136 40136 AO15 47 AO1 PID Control Setpoint Source Use the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID loops Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Setting magbug ABB DCU N2 FLN BACnet DRV PROFILE 4010 SET POINT 8 COMM Setpoint is either 40003 AO2 61 AV17 SEL Set 1 VALUE 1 e Input Reference 2 4110 SET POINT 9 COMM Al Control SEL Set 2 All requires parameter 10 1106 value comm 4210 SET co comm ail Process PID
143. 14 3x1 5 Do not use aluminum 22 8 14 20 3x2 5 a e eaan 12 27 3x4 36 4 10 34 3x6 50 1 8 47 3x10 68 3 6 62 3x16 86 5 4 79 3x25 100 3 98 3x35 91 3x50 118 2 119 3x50 117 3x70 137 1 153 3x70 143 3x95 155 1 0 186 3x95 165 3x120 178 2 0 215 3x120 191 3x150 205 3 0 249 3x150 218 3x185 237 4 0 284 3x185 257 3x240 264 250 MCM or 2 x 1 274 3x 3x50 291 300 MCM or 2 x 1 0 285 2x 3x95 319 350 MCM or 2 x 2 0 345 400 MCM or 2 x 2 0 391 500 MCM or 2 x 3 0 410 2x 3 0 Technical Data 274 ACH550 UH User s Manual IEC NEC Based on e e e e e EN 60204 1 and IEC 60364 5 2 2001 PVC insulation 30 C 86 F ambient temperature 70 C 158 F surface temperature Cables with concentric copper shield Not more than nine cables laid on cable ladder side by side Based on e NEC Table 310 16 for copper wires 90 C 194 F wire insulation 40 C 104 F ambient temperature Not more than three current carrying conductors in raceway or cable or earth directly buried e Copper cables with concentric copper shield Max Max Load Cu Cable Load Al Cable Current mm Current mm A A Ground Connections For personnel safety proper operation and to reduce electromagnetic emission pick Max Load Current A 465 474 534 615 711 2x4 0 2x250 2x300 2x350 2x500 Cu Wire Size AWG kemil up the drive and the motor must
144. 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A f Default operation Started gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A fu Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B f 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A fi Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 27 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 10 FLOATINGPNT 3416 SIGNAL 3 MIN 200 0 1103 REF1 SEL 7 DI5U 6D 3417 SIGNAL 3 MAX 200 0 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 3419 OUTPUT 3 DSP UNIT 4 96 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 DI2 3420 OUTPUT 3 MIN 200 0 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 3421 OUTPUT 3 MAX 200 0 3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM 0105 TORQUE Start Up 56 Dual Setpoint with PID This macro configures for dual setpoint PID applications where activating digital input 3 DI3 changes the process PID controller s setpoint to another value When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 44 Set process PID setpoints internal to the drive using parameters 4011 SET1 and 4111 SET2 ACH550 User s Manual 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM
145. 2 e See parameter 0305 0307 FAULT WORD 3 1 0000 hex Read only copy of the Fault Word 3 e See parameter 0305 Start Up 70 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 03 Actual Signals Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0308 ALARM WORD 1 1 0000 hex Read only copy of the ALARM WORD 1 YN UA ea cut Bit 0308 ALARM WORD 1 0309 ALARM WORD 2 is set in the Fault Words 0 OVERCURRENT Reserved Each fault has a dedicated bit OVERVOLTAGE PID SLEEP allocated within Fault Words 2 UNDERVOLTAGE ID RUN e Bits remain set until the whole alarm word is reset Reset by writing zero 3 DIRLOCK Reserved to the word 4 I O COMM START ENABLE 1 MISSING h Tee a hasi 5 Al1 LOSS START ENABLE 2 MISSING 1 in Bit 0 displays a 0001 All zeros 6 Al2LOSS EMERGENCY STOP and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 7 PANEL LOSS ENCODER ERROR 8 DEVICE OVERTEMP FIRST START 9 IMOT OVERTEMP Reserved 10 UNDERLOAD Reserved 11 MOTOR STALL Reserved 12 AUTORESET Reserved 13 PFA AUTOCHANGE Reserved 14 PFC INTERLOCK Reserved 15 Reserved Reserved 0309 ALARM WORD 2 1 0000 hex Read only copy of the ALARM WORD 3 e See parameter 0308 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 71 Group 04 Fault History This group stores a recent history of the faults reported by the drive Group 04 Fault History Code Descriptio
146. 2 MAXIMUM SPEED 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside proper range gt 50 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range gt 50 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range gt 50 1001 PAR PFAREFNG Parameter values are inconsistent Check for the following 2007 MINIMUM FREQ is negative when 8123 PFA ENABLE is active 1002 RESERVED Obsolete 1003 PAR AI SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following e 1301 Al 1 MIN gt 1302 Al 1 MAX e 1304 Al 2 MIN gt 1305 Al 2 MAX 1004 PAR AO SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following e 1504 AO 1 MIN gt 1505 AO 1 MAX e 1510 AO 2 MIN gt 1511 AO 2 MAX 1005 PAR PCU 2 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal kVA or motor nominal power Check for the following e 1 1 lt 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 1 73 Py lt 3 0 e Where Py 1000 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are kW or Px 746 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are HP e g in US 1006 EXT ROMISSING Parameter values are inconsistent Check for the following e Extension relay module not connected and e 1410 1412 RELAY OUTPUTS 4 6 have non zero values 1007 PAR Parameter values are inconsistent Check for and correct FBUSMISSING A parameter is set for fieldbus control e g 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 COMM but 9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 1008 PAR Parameter values are in
147. 2 object listing aaa 197 binary output BACnet object listing 220 N2 object listing aaa 199 branch circuit protection 270 break point frequency fault parameter 109 buffer overruns count parameter 142 C cable requirements grounding 0 cece eee 274 input power 273 MOTOR aAa Weta aaa os goes Yeates levee 2S 280 capacitor charge maintenance interval 258 maintenance procedure 265 CB see control board CE marking 0c eee eee eee 298 CISPR11 class A radiation limits 22005 281 CISPR11 class B radiation limits 20005 283 COCK a Tete tile eat Pe mkaka Bava ale inii KONG 40 com EFB baud rate parameter 143 control profile parameter 143 CRC errors count parameter 143 ok messages count parameter 143 parity parameter aan anaa an 143 protocol id parameter 143 station id parameter 143 UART errors count parameter 143 301 comm fault function parameter 110 fault time parameter 110 fieldbus parameter refresh parameter 140 protocol select parameter 157 relay output word data parameter 65 values data parameter 65 comm EFB actual value scaling 170 actu
148. 3 N AT14 N AT15 N AT16 N AT17 N AT18 N AT19 N AT20 N AT21 N AT22 N AT23 N AT24 N AT25 N Z A Ar BARA ABA AA S BILE Ny NBT2TENG BIB TON Bran iN BTS TUN BI6 N BIT N BIS N BLOT EN D A A A a a ag a a FREQ ACT Hz DOT ACTH Aes SPEED RPM CURRENT A TORQUE 5 POWER kW DRV TEMP C ENERGY k kWh ENERGY M MWh RUN TIME H PP DVOnT ay VOLT_ACT V UPIDI BOT TA jp PID 2 DEV 4 pIPIDOLAOT NAO p PID2_DEV 3 LAST_FLT Code PREV FLT Code IST FLT Code AI_1_ACT NG AT 2 BETA AO_1_ACT mA AO_2_ACT mA MTR TEMP C PEREVLENT NG STOP RUN STOP RUN FWD REV FWD REV FAULTY a OK F ELT W RELAY 1 OFF ON RELAY 2 OFF ON RELAY 3 OFF ON RELAY 4 OFF ON RELAY 5 OFF ON RELAY 16 OFF ON BII BI BE BI BII BII BI BI BI LO N 11 N 12 N 13 N L4 N L5 N L6 N L7 N 18 N BI19 N BI20 N BI21 N BI22 N BI23 N BI24 N PANA AA A A A AA INPUT_1 OFF ON INPUT_2 OFF ON INPUT_3 OFF ON INPUT_4 OFF ON INPUT_5
149. 3 Second Environment compliance the drive includes an internal filter that provides compliance for at least 30 m 100 ft motor cable lengths For some drives longer cable lengths require an additional external RFI EMC filter as specified in the table below The RFI EMC filters are separate options and Technical Data 282 ACH550 UH User s Manual installation must conform to the instructions in the filter package for all cable screen connections Maximum Cable Length for EN 61800 3 First Environment Restricted Distribution CISPR11 Class A Compliance Radiated and Conducted Emissions Switching Frequency Parameter 2606 1 or 4 kHz 2606 1 or 4 8 kHz 2606 8 Drive Type Max Length Max Length Max Length Max Length Internal Filter RFI EMC Filter Internal Filter RFI EMC Filter ACH550 xx 03A3 4 R1 100 m 330 ft Note 1 100 m 330 ft Note 1 AGH550 xx 04A1 4 Internal Internal ACH550 xx 06A9 4 ACH550 xx 08A8 4 ACH550 xx 012A 4 ACH550 xx 015A 4 R2 30 m 100 ft 100m 330 ft 30 m 100 ft 100 m 330 ft ACH550 xx 023A 4 Internal ACS400 IF21 3 Internal ACS400 1F21 3 ACH550 xx 031A 4 R3 30 m 100 ft 100 m 330 ft 30 m 100 ft 100 m 330 ft AGH550 xx 038A 4 Internal ACS400 1F31 3 Internal ACS400 1F31 3 ACH550 xx 045A 4 ACH550 xx 044A 4 R4 30 m 100 ft 100m 330f 30m 100ft 100m 330 ft
150. 312 EFB PAR 12 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40007 5313 EFB PAR 13 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40008 5314 EFB PAR 14 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40009 5315 EFB PAR 15 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40010 5316 EFB PAR 16 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40011 5317 EFB PAR 17 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40012 5318 Reserved 5319 EFB PAR 19 Holds a copy in hex of the CONTROL WORD Modbus register 40001 5320 EFB PAR 20 Holds a copy in hex of the STATUS WORD Modbus register 40004 Except where restricted by the drive all parameters are available for both reading and writing The parameter writes are verified for the correct value and for a valid register addresses Note Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile i e modified values are not automatically stored to permanent memory Use parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to save all altered values The ACH550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 4xxxx registers Function Code Description 03 Read holding 4xxxx registers 06 Preset single 4xxxx register 16 0x10 Hex Preset multiple 4xxxx registers 23 0x17 Hex Read write 4xxxx registers Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 181 Actual Values The contents of the register addresses 40005 40012 are ACTUAL VALUES and are
151. 4 To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R1 to R4 1 Remove power from drive 2 Remove the front cover 3 The housing that holds the fan in place has barbed retaining clips at each corner Press all four clips toward the center to release the barbs 4 When the clips barbs are free pull the housing up to remove from the drive 5 Disconnect the fan cable 6 Install the fan in reverse order noting that The fan air flow is up refer to arrow on fan The fan wire harness is toward the front The notched housing barb is located in the right rear corner The fan cable connects just forward of the fan at the top of the drive Frame Sizes R5 and R6 To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R5 or R6 Remove power from drive Maintenance ACH550 UH User s Manual 261 e Remove the front cover Lift the fan out and disconnect the cable e Install the fan in reverse order e Restore power Frame Sizes R7 R8 UL type 12 Enclosures The enclosure fan is located in the exhaust box on top of the UL type 12 enclosure 1 Remove the left and right filter frames of the exhaust fan box by lifting them upwards PC00021 2 Disconnect the fan s electrical connector from the cabinet roof top right Inside the cabinet 3 Undo the four fastening screws at the corners of the fan frame The screws are through bolts
152. 44 26 012A 4 R1 172 587 44 26 015A 4 R2 232 792 88 52 023A 4 R2 337 1150 88 52 031A 4 R3 457 1560 134 79 038A 4 R3 562 1918 134 79 045A 4 R3 667 2276 134 79 044A 4 R4 667 2276 280 165 059A 4 R4 907 3096 280 165 072A 4 R4 1120 3820 280 165 078A 4 R4 1295 4420 280 165 097A 4 R4 1440 4915 280 165 077A 4 R5 1295 4420 168 99 096A 4 R5 1440 4915 168 99 125A 4 R5 1940 6621 168 99 124A 4 R6 1940 6621 405 238 157A 4 R6 2310 7884 405 238 180A 4 R6 2810 9590 405 238 246A 4 R6 3850 13000 405 238 245A 4 R7 3850 540 316A 4 R8 5300 1220 368A 4 R8 6850 1220 Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual 289 Drive Heat Loss Air Flow ACH550 xx Frame Size w BTU Hr m3 h ft min 414A 4 R8 7000 1220 486A 4 R8 7600 1220 526A 4 R8 7800 1220 602A 4 R8 8100 1220 645A 4 R8 9100 31000 700 1220 Air Flow 500 600 Volt Drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 500 600 Volt drives Type Code Heat Loss Air Flow solace GN ee W BTU Hr m3 h 3 min Three phase supply voltage 500 600 V 02A7 6 R2 46 157 88 52 03A9 6 R2 68 232 88 52 06A1 6 R2 124 423 88 52 09A0 6 R2 170 581 88 52 011A 6 R2 232 792 88 52 017A 6 R2 337 1150 88 52 022A 6 R3 457 1560 134 79 027A 6 R3 562 1918 134 79 032A 6 R4 667 2256 280 165 041A 6 R4 907 3096 280 165 052A 6 R4 1120 3820 280 165
153. 5 DI3 Setpoint selection Activate to select Set2 _ __ 16 DI4 Preset speed 1 17 DI5 Preset speed 2 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A fi Default operation Started gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B f 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A fx Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B f 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A fx Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 27 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 12 DUAL SPNTCS 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 2 D12 4001 GAIN 0 7 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 11 DI5 6 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 10 0s 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 4010 SETPOINT SEL 19 INTERNAL 1608 START ENABLE 1 O NOT SEL 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT 50 0 2108 START INHIBIT 1 ON 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 3 DI3 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 10 0s 4101 GAIN 0 7 2203 DECELER TIME 1 10 0s 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 10 0s 3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE O DISABLE 4110 SETPOINT SEL 19 INTERNAL 3107 AR AI lt MIN 0 DISABLE 4111 INTERNAL SETPNT 100 0 Start Up 58 E bypass ACH550 User s Manual This macro configures for an Electronic Bypass device which can bypass the drive and connect the motor direct on line When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 44
154. 5 Safety interlock 2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A Default operation Started gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B f 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B f 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A m Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 27 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 3 RETURNFAN 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 4001 GAIN 0 7 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 D12 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 10 0s 1609 START ENABLE2 5 DI5 4101 GAIN 1 0 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 15 0s 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0 s 2203 DECELER TIME 1 15 0 s Start Up ACH550 User s Manual Cooling Tower Fan 49 This macro configures for cooling tower fan applications where the fan speed is controlled according to the signals received from a transducer When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 44 X1 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen Q UW2 AN External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circ
155. 525 connected to 27 57 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 14 HAND CONTROL 3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM 100 NOT SEL 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS O NOT SEL 3416 SIGNAL 3 MIN 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 NOT SEL 3417 SIGNAL 3 MAX 1106 REF3 SEL 2 Al2 3418 OUTPUT 3 DSP FORM 1201 CONST SPEED SEL O NOT SEL 3419 OUTPUT 3 DSP UNIT 1301 MINIMUM Al1 0 0 3420 OUTPUT 3 MIN 1304 MINIMUM Al2 0 0 3421 OUTPUT 3 MAX 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 4001 GAIN 1 0 1504 MINIMUM AO1 0 0mA 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0 s 1510 MINIMUM A02 0 0mA 4010 SETPOINT SEL 1 A11 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 DI2 4101 GAIN 1 0 1608 START ENABLE 1 O NOT SEL 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0 s 2108 START INHIBIT 1 ON 4110 SETPOINT SEL 1 Al1 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 4210 SETPOINT SEL 1 Al1 Start Up 60 E Clipse ACH550 User s Manual This macro configures for an E Clipse Bypass device which can bypass the drive and connect the motor direct on line When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 44 X1 J1 ISCR Signal cable shield screen ala JAN Not configured 3 AGND Analog
156. 550 UH User s Manual Alarm Code Display Description 2006 Al1 LOSS Analog input 1 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check e Input source and connections e Parameter that sets the minimum 3021 e Parameter that sets the Alarm Fault operation 3001 2007 Al2 LOSS Analog input 2 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check e Input source and connections e Parameter that sets the minimum 3022 e Parameter that sets the Alarm Fault operation 3001 2008 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either e Drive is in local control mode the control panel displays LOC or e Drive is in remote control mode REM and is parameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check e Communication lines and connections e Parameter 3002 PANEL LOSS e Parameters in groups 10 COMMAND INPUTS and 11 REFERENCE SELECT if drive operation is REM 2009 DEVICE OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is hot This alarm warns that a DEVICE OVERTEMP fault may be near R1 R4 amp R7 R8 100 C 212 F R5 R6 110 C 230 F Check for and correct Fan failure e Obstructions in the air flow Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink Excessive ambient temperature Excessive motor load 2010 MOT OVERTEMP Motor is hot based on either the drive s estimate or on temperature feedback This alarm warns that a Motor
157. 6 LAO AO1 PCT PCT 0 1 0 COMMAND 47 LAO AO2 PCT PCT 0 1 0 COMMAND 48 LDO RST RUN TIME NO 1 0 RESET NO 49 LDO RESET KWH NO F 1 0 RESET NO 50 LAO PRC PID GAIN 10 PCT 0 1 0 z z 51 LAO PRC PID ITIM 600 SEC 0 1 0 52 LAO PRC PID DTIM 0 SEC 0 1 0 53 LAO PRC PID DFIL 10 SEC 0 1 0 z 54 LDO PRC PID SEL SET1 3 1 0 SET2 SET1 55 LAO EXT PID GAIN 10 PCT 0 1 0 z 56 LAO EXT PID ITIM 600 SEC 0 1 0 E z 57 LAO EXT PID DTIM 0 SEC 0 1 0 58 LAO EXT PID DFIL 10 SEC 0 1 0 i 59 LDO LOCK PANEL UNLOCK 1 0 LOCK UNLOCK 60 LAO INPUT REF1 0 PCT 0 1 0 61 LAO INPUT REF2 0 PCT 0 1 0 2 62 LAO EXT PID STPT 0 PCT 0 1 0 z 63 LAI EXT PID FBCK 0 PCT 0 1 0 64 LAI EXT PID DEV 0 PCT 0 1 0 Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 209 FLN Point Database oe Subpoint Name Defaut Units a Na On Text Off Text Type SI Units 66 LDO SPD OUT MIN 0 PCT 0 1 0 67 LDO SPD OUT MAX 1000 PCT 0 1 0 68 LDO FLN LOC CTL AUTO 5 1 0 FLN AUTO 69 LDO FLN LOC REF AUTO 1 0 FLN AUTO 70 LDI DI 1 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 71 LDI DI 2 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 72 LDI DI 3 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 73 LDI DI 4 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 74 LDI DI 5 ACTUAL OFF 1 0 ON OFF 75 LDI DI 6 ACTUAL OFF
158. 74 EFB technical data 174 Index 306 motor aux start delay PFA parameter aux stop delay PFA parameter checking insulation compatibility a connection specifications control mode parameter id run parameter load curve break point frequency load curve max fault parameter load curve zero speed load maintenance triggers nominal current parameter nominal frequency parameter nominal power parameter nominal speed parameter nominal voltage parameter number of aux parameter phase fault code stall fault code Aa temperature alarm limit parameter temperature fault limit parameter temperature measure parameter group temperature sensor selection parameter temperature sensor type parameter temperature data parameter thermal protection fault parameter thermal time fault parameter motor cable checking insulation max length max length 1st environment class A max length 1st environment class B requirements requirements EMC motor connection lugs for RE terminal size a Orq AA motor control IR compensation parameters parameter group motor temperature overtemperature fault code motor auxiliary aux start order parameter motor NEMA MG1 part 31 MWh counter data parameter N N2 fieldbus also see comm EFB description node limit su
159. 8 H 330 13 0 430 16 9 490 19 2 596 23 4 602 23 7 700 27 6 H3 369 14 5 469 18 5 583 23 0 689 27 1 736 29 0 880 34 6 D 212 8 3 222 8 7 231 9 1 262 10 3 286 11 3 400 15 8 hb iJ D UL type 12 Outside Dimensions by Frame Size R1 R6 Ref R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in Ww 213 8 4 213 8 4 257 10 1 257 10 1 369 14 5 410 16 1 W2 222 8 7 222 8 7 267 10 5 267 10 5 369 14 5 410 16 1 H3 461 18 2 561 22 1 629 24 8 760 29 9 776 30 5 924 36 4 D 234 9 2 246 9 7 254 10 0 285 11 2 309 12 2 423 16 6 Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual 293 Outside Dimensions R7 R8 Outside dimensions for the R7 and R8 cabinets are defined below ag W gt ee ie 0000100000040004 004 000000 KON CTE STAT ADD A ABE CO 3 AAA CDN bag D BP0017 Outside Dimensions by Frame Size Enclosure Ref aid dis mm in mm in W 806 31 7 806 31 7 UL type 1 H 2065 81 3 2065 81 3 D 659 25 9 659 25 9 W 806 31 7 806 31 7 UL type 12 H 2318 91 3 2318 91 3 D 659 25 9 659
160. 8 parameter group 00 e eee eee 86 application block output data parameter 63 application macro parameter 61 applications see macros autochange interval parameter 149 level parameter nananana 149 OVErVIOW anana naana 149 starting order counter 150 automatic reset see reset automatic auxiliary motor see motor auxiliary B backing up parameters Assistant panel 36 backup drive parameters 2200 36 Index ACH550 UH User s Manual BACnet autobaud detection 216 data link layer a 216 MAGN GNG a a aa a tee ar eae 216 max info frame property 216 MS TP token counter 217 object analog inputs 223 object analog outputs 223 object analog values 224 object binary inputs 220 object binary outputs 220 object binary values 221 object definitions 219 pics statement anaana 217 pics SumMary ee eee 216 services supported 216 support matrix a 219 battery assistant control panel maintenance procedure 265 baud rate 25232 parameter 142 baud rate detection BACnet 216 binary input BACnet object listing 220 N
161. 8 kHz 3 Press EDIT to edit the parameter The display is the target drive s standard edit screen for the selected parameter 4 Highlight the desired value for the target drive 5 Press SAVE to save setting 6 Press EXIT to step back to the differences view and continue for each remaining exception 7 When your editing is complete press READY in the Differences List and then select Yes save parameters Download Failures In some situations the drive may be unable to accept a download In those cases the control panel display is Parameter download failed plus one of the following causes Set not found You are attempting to download a data set that was not defined in the backup The remedy is to manually define the set or upload the set from a drive that has the desired set definitions e Par lock The remedy is to unlock the parameter set parameter 1602 Incompat drive model The remedy is to perform backups only between drives of the same type ACS industrial or ACH HVAC and the same model all ACH550 Too many differences The remedy is to manually define a new set or upload the set from a drive that more closely resembles the target drive Note If upload or download of parameters is aborted the partial parameter set is not implemented Clock Set Mode The clock set mode is used for setting the time and date for the internal clock of the ACH550 In order to use the timer fun
162. A 23 RO2A o TANI Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA amp 24 RO2B w 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable Default Fault 1 26 RO3A Maximum 250 VAC 30 VDC 2 A m Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA 27 RO3B __ 1 Digital input impedance 1 5 kQ Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual 287 2 Default values depend on the macro used Values specified are for the HVAC default macro See Application Macros on page 44 You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration PNP connection source NPN connection sink X1 X1 10 24V 10 124V 11 GND 11 GND L112 DCOM 12 DCOM 13 DI1 13 DI1 14 DI2 14 DI2 15 DI3 15 DI3 16 DI4 16 DI4 17 DI5 17 DI5 18 DI6 18 DI6 Serial Communications Terminals 28 32 provide RS485 serial communication connections used to control or monitor the drive from a fieldbus controller See Embedded Fieldbus on page 158 for details Efficiency Approximately 98 at nominal power level Cooling Cooling Specifications Method Internal fan flow direction from bottom to top R1 R6 Free space above and below ACH550 drive 200 mm 8 in e R7 R8 Free space in front of enclosure 152 mm 6 in R7 R8 Free space above enclosure N
163. A 4 72 80 90 JJS 90 077A 4 77 100 JJS 100 078A 4 77 096A 4 96 125 125 JJS 125 097A 4 96 Technical Data 272 ACH550 UH User s Manual ACH550 UH input Current A aula see below IEC269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann Type 424A 4 124 160 175 JJS 175 125A 4 124 157A 4 157 200 200 JJS 200 180A 4 180 250 250 JJS 250 246A 4 245 315 350 JJS 350 245A 4 245 Does Not Apply 400 JJS 400 316A 4 316 400 JJS 400 368A 4 368 400 JJS 400 414A 4 414 600 JJS 600 486A 4 486 600 JJS 600 526A 4 526 800 JJS 800 602A 4 602 800 JJS 800 645A 4 645 800 JJS 800 Fuses 500 600 Volt Fuses ACH550 xx Input Current Mains Fuses see below A IEC269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann Type 02A7 6 2 7 10 10 JJS 10 03A9 6 3 9 06A1 6 6 1 09A0 6 9 16 15 JJS 15 011A 6 11 017A 6 17 25 25 JJS 25 022A 6 22 027A 6 27 35 40 JJS 40 032A 6 32 041A 6 41 50 50 JJS 50 052A 6 52 60 60 JJS 60 062A 6 62 80 80 JJS 80 077A 6 77 100 JJS 100 099A 6 99 125 150 JJS 150 125A 6 125 160 175 JJS 175 144A 6 144 200 200 JJS 200 Emergency Stop Devices The overall design of the installation must include emergency stop devices and any other safety equipment that may be needed Pressing STOP on the drive s control panel does NOT e Generate an emergency stop of the motor e Separate the drive
164. AM SAVE 0 1 1 0 Saves all altered parameters to permanent memory Parameters altered through a fieldbus are not automatically saved to permanent memory To save you must use this parameter If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 2 NOT SAVED parameters altered from the control panel are not saved To save you must use this parameter If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 1 OPEN parameters altered from the control panel are stored immediately to permanent memory 0 DONE Value changes automatically when all parameters are saved 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to permanent memory Start Up 90 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 16 System Controls Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1608 ISTART ENABLE 1 6 7 1 4 Selects the source of the start enable 1 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal This digital input must be activated for start enable 1 signal If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2021 on panel display The drive will not start until start enable 1 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 1 signal
165. AN IR APR Relinquish Default Polarity v Active Text v RK LR Inactive Text v For commandable values only Embedded Fieldbus 220 Binary Input Object Instance Summary ACH550 UH User s Manual The following table summarizes the Binary Input Objects supported Instance Object KOY Active Present Value Name Description Inactive Text Access Type BIO RO 1 ACT This object indicates the status of Relay ON OFF R Output 1 BI1 RO 2 ACT This object indicates the status of Relay ON OFF R Output 2 BI2 RO 3 ACT This object indicates the status of Relay ON OFF R Output 3 BI3 RO 4 ACT This object indicates the status of Relay ON OFF R Output 4 requires OREL 01 option Bl4 RO 5 ACT This object indicates the status of Relay ON OFF R Output 5 requires OREL 01 option BI5 RO6 ACT This object indicates the status of Relay ON OFF R Output 6 requires OREL 01 option BI6 DI1 ACT This object indicates the status of Digital ON OFF R Input 1 BI7 DI2 ACT This object indicates the status of Digital ON OFF R Input 2 BI8 DI3 ACT This object indicates the status of Digital ON OFF R Input 3 BI9 DI4ACT This object indicates the status of Digital ON OFF R Input 4 BI10 DI5 ACT This object indicates the status of Digital ON OFF R Input 5 B111 DI6 ACT This object indicates the status o
166. Another profile is called the DCU PROFILE profile It extends the control and status interface to 32 bits and is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment ABB DRV FULL This profile standardizes the control interface with ACH600 and ACS800 drives This profile is also based on the PROFIBUS interface and supports two control word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM profile Modbus Addressing With Modbus each function code implies access to a specific Modbus reference set Thus the leading digit is not included in the address field of a Modbus message Note The ACH550 supports the zero based addressing of the Modbus specification Holding register 40002 is addressed as 0001 in a Modbus message Similarly coil 33 is addressed as 0032 in a Modbus message Refer again to the Mapping Summary above The following sections describe in detail the mapping to each Modbus reference set Oxxxx Mapping Modbus Coils The drive maps the following information to the Oxxxx Modbus set called Modbus Coils e Bit wise map of the CONTROL WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 coils are reserved for this purpose e Relay output states numbered sequentially beginning with coil 00033 Embedded Fieldbus 176 ACH550 UH User s Manual The following table summarizes the Oxxxx reference set
167. BLE 2 5 DI5 4101 GAIN 1 0 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 15 0 s 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0 s 2203 DECELER TIME 1 15 0 s Start Up 48 Return Fan ACH550 User s Manual This macro configures for return fan applications where the return fan removes air according to signals received from a transducer When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 44 X1 7 ISCR Signal cable shield screen G NGU2 All External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 Al2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common Ji J umper Settings 91 7 AOT Output frequency 0 4 20 mA Spal aa seer te PEO 8 A02 Output current 0 4 20 mA H Z i NG 119 AGND Analog output circuit common 2 P AI2 0 4 20 mA 75 40124v Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 147 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 112 DCOM Digital input common for all o 143 DI1 Start Stop Activate to start drive __ 14 Dl2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 Lo 115 DI3 Constant Preset speed 1 P 1202 Uo 116 DI4 Safety interlock 1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 Lo 117 DI
168. COMMAND AO 2 136 10 Yo 0 100 AO16 EXT PID SETPOINT 4211 10 Yo 0 100 AO17 SPD OUT MIN 2001 2007 10 Yo 0 200 A018 SPD OUT MAX 2002 2008 10 0 200 A019 MAILBOX PARAMETER 1 0 65535 A020 MAILBOX DATA 1 0 65535 Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual N2 Binary Output Objects The following table lists the N2 Binary Output objects defined for the ACH550 drive 199 N2 Binary Outputs Number Object Drive Parameter Range BO1 STOP START Command Word 0 Stop 1 Start to Speed BO2 FORWARD REVERSE Command Word 0 Forward 1 Reverse BO3 PANEL LOCK Command Word 0 Open 1 Locked BO4 RUN ENABLE Command Word 0 Disable 1 Enable BO5 REF1 REF2 SELECT Command Word 0 Ref1 1 Ref2 BO6 FAULT RESET Command Word Change 0 gt 1 Resets BO7 COMMAND RO 1 134 bit mask 01 0 Off 1 On BO8 COMMAND RO 2 134 bit mask 02 0 Off 1 On BO9 COMMAND RO 3 134 bit mask 04 0 Off 1 On BO10 COMMAND RO 4 134 bit mask 08 0 Off 1 On BO11 COMMAND RO 5 134 bit mask 10 0 Off 1 On BO12 COMMAND RO 6 134 bit mask 20 0 Off 1 On BO13 RESET RUN TIME 114 indirectly 0 N A 1 On Reset Run Time BO14 RESET KWH COUNT 115 indirectly 0 N A 1 On Reset kWh Count BO15 PRC PID SELECT 4027 indirectly 0 SET2 1 SET2 BO16 N2 LOCAL CTL Note 1 Command Word 0 Auto 1 N2 BO17 N2 LOCAL REF Note 1 Command Word 0 A
169. D1 set point parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL can be either A1 A2 or INTERNAL e PID1 parameter set 1 must be active parameter 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET SET 1 e Override direction parameter 1706 OVERRIDE DIR can be either O FORWARD or 7 REVERSE Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 95 Group 20 Limits This group defines minimum and maximum limits to follow in driving the motor speed frequency current torque etc Group 20 Limits Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 30000 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm v Defines the minimum speed rpm allowed Speed i A positive or zero minimum speed value defines two ranges P NAG 2001 value is lt 0 one positive and one negative e A negative minimum speed value defines one speed range e See figure 0 P 2001 Speed 2001 value is gt 0 P 2002 P 2001 0 gt Time P 2001 P 2002 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 1800 US v Defines the maximum speed rpm allowed 2003 MAX CURRENT 0 0 1 3 lon 01A 1 3 lon v Defines the maximum output current A supplied by the drive to the motor 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL 0 2 1 1 Sets the DC undervoltage controller on or off When on If the DC bus voltage drops due to loss of input power the undervoltage controller decreases the motor speed in order to keep the DC bus voltage above the lower limit When the motor speed decreases the inertia of the
170. Drive Qu Ol Ow GND QU2OV2 Qwe NU L1 Input L2 L3 GND Installation 26 ACH550 UH User s Manual Start Up The ACH550 has default parameter settings that are sufficient for many situations However review the following situations Perform the associated procedures as appropriate Spin Motor When first installed and started the control panel displays a welcome screen with the following options e Press Exit to commission the drive as described in section Start Up by Changing the Parameters Individually on page 29 e Press Enter to move to the following options Select Commission Drive to commission the drive as described in section Start Up by Using the Start Up Assistant on page 29 Select Spin Motor to operate the motor prior to commissioning This option operates the motor without any commissioning except entry of the motor data as described below Spin Motor is useful for example to operate ventilation fans prior to commissioning Note When using Spin Motor the motor speed is limited to the range 1 3 2 3 of maximum speed Also no interlocks are activated Finally once the drive is commissioned the welcome screen and this option no longer appear Motor Data The motor data on the ratings plate may differ from the defaults in the ACH550 The drive provides more precise control and better thermal protection if you enter the rating plate data Gather the fo
171. EC 60721 3 3 Class 3M4 specifications vibration e 2 9 Hz 3 0 mm 0 12 in 9 200 Hz 10 m s 33 ft s Shock Not allowed In accordance with IEC 68 2 29 max 100 m s 330 ft s 11ms 36 fts Not allowed 76cm 30 in frame size R1 e 61cm 24 in frame size R2 e 46cm 18 in frame size R3 e 31cm 12 in frame size R4 e 25cm 10 in frame size R5 e 15cm 6 in frame size R6 Free fall Technical Data 296 Materials ACH550 UH User s Manual Material Specifications Drive enclosure R1 R6 e PC ABS 2 5 mm color NCS 1502 Y RAL 90021 PMS 420 C and 425 C Hot dip zinc coated steel sheet 1 5 2 mm thickness of coating 100 micrometers e Cast aluminium AISi Extruded aluminium AISi R7 R8 Sheet metal Package R1 R6 Corrugated board expanded polystyrene plywood raw wood heat dried Package wrap consists of one or more of the following PE LD plastic wrap PP or steel bands R7 R8 Wood pallet Disposal The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural resources The package materials are environmentally compatible and recyclable All metal parts can be recycled The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under controlled circumstances according to local regulations Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks If recycling is not feasible all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed
172. FF92h 32 EFB 2 FF93h 33 EFB 3 FF94h 34 MOTOR PHASE FF56h 35 OUTPUT WIRING FF95h 36 INCOMP SWTYPE 630Fh 101 SERF CORRUPT FF55h 102 Reserved FF55h 103 SERF MACRO FF55h 104 Reserved FF55h 105 Reserved FF55h 201 DSP T1 OVERLOAD 6100h 202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 6100h 203 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 6100h 204 DSP STACK ERROR 6100h 205 Reserved 5000h 206 OMIO ID ERROR 5000h 207 EFB LOAD ERR 6100h 1000 PAR HZRPM 6320h 1001 PAR PFAREFNG 6320h 1002 Reserved obsolete 6320h 1003 PAR Al SCALE 6320h 1004 PAR AO SCALE 6320h 1005 PAR PCU 2 6320h 1006 EXT ROMISSING 6320h 1007 PAR FBUSMISSING 6320h 1008 PAR PFAWOSCALAR 6320h 1009 PAR PCU 1 6320h 1010 PAR PFA OVERRIDE 6320h 237 Fieldbus Adapter 238 ACH550 UH User s Manual Fieldbus Fault Code DriveiFault Code DRIVECOM specification 1011 PAR OVERRIDE PARS 6320h 1012 PAR PFC IO 1 6320h 1013 PAR PFC IO 2 6320h 1014 PAR PFC IO 3 6320h Serial Communication Diagnostics Besides the drive fault codes the FBA module has diagnostic tools Refer to the user s manual supplied with the FBA module ABB Drives Profile Technical Data Overview The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple protocols including protocols available on the FBA module This section describes the ABB Drives profile implemented for FBA modules Control Word As described earlier in Control Interface the CONTROL WORD is the
173. IATION for at least this time period re starts the PID controller e See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above Start Up 136 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 6 11 1 0 Defines how selections are made between PID Set 1 and PID Set 2 PID parameter set selection When set 1 is selected parameters 4001 4026 are used When set 2 is selected parameters 4101 4126 are used 0 SET 1 PID Set 1 parameters 4001 4026 is active 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for PID Set selection e Activating the digital input selects PID Set 2 e De activating the digital input selects PID Set 1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID Set selection e See DI1 above 7 SET 2 PID Set 2 parameters 4101 4126 is active 8 11 TIMER 1 4 Defines the Timer as the control for the PID Set selection Timer de activated PID Set 1 Timer activated PID Set 2 See parameter Group 36 Timer Functions 12 2 ZONE MIN The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and feedback 2 The drive will control the zone and select the set which has a larger difference sA positive difference a setpoint higher than the feedback is always larger than a negative difference This keeps feedback values at or above the setpoint Controller does no
174. ID SETPOINT SEL value 19 INTERNAL Note For Present Value Access Types R Read only W Writeable C Commandable Commandable values support priority arrays amp relinquish defaults BACnet Quick Start Sequence The following steps summarize the process for enabling and configuring BACnet on the ACH550 1 Enable BACnet protocol Set drive parameter 9802 COMM PROTOCOL SEL BACNET 5 Note If you cannot see the desired selection on the panel your drive does not have that protocol software in the application memory To confirm this selection read drive parameter 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID It should read x5xx where x is any value 2 Place the BACnet channel in reset Set drive parameter 5302 EFB STATION ID 0 e This setting holds the BACnet communication channel in reset while remaining settings are completed 3 Define the MS TP baud rate If MS TP baud rate is known Set drive parameter 5303 EFB BAUD RATE appropriate value If MS TP baud rate is unknown Set drive parameter 5314 EFB PAR 14 1 to enable autobaud detection 4 Define the Device Object instance To define a specific device object instance value use drive parameters 5311 and 5317 object instance values must be unique and in the range 1 to 4 194 303 e To use the drive s MS TP MAC ID as the device object instance value set drive parameter 5311 and 5317 0 5 Define a uniq
175. IP2100 IP2101 To download application to drive follow these steps Select MENU to enter the menu G 1 Select PAR BACKUP with the UP DOWN buttons M 2 wy Scroll to DOWNLOAD APPLICATION and select SEL v 3 The text Downloading parameters partial is displayed Select ABORT 4 4 if you want to stop the process Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 39 The text Parameter download successful is displayed and the control panel returns to PAR BACKUP menu Select EXIT to return to the main menu A Download User Set 1 Copies USER s1 parameters user sets are saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO from the Control Panel to the drive Download User Set 2 Copies USER S2 parameters from the Control Panel to the drive Handling Inexact Downloads In some situations an exact copy of the download is not appropriate for the target drive Some examples A download to an old drive specifies parameters values that are not available on the old drive A download from an old drive to a new drive does not have definitions for the new parameters parameters that did not originally exist A download can include an illegal value for the target drive e g a backup from a small drive can have a switching frequency of 12 kHz whereas a big drive can only handle 8k Hz As a default the control panel handles these situations by Discarding parameter
176. N AL ha tak 150 internal setpoint PID parameter 133 IP 21 see UL type 1 P 54 see UL type 12 IR compensation frequency parameter 105 parameters a 105 voltage parameter 00000 105 IT network see floating network K keypad reference select parameter 74 kWh counter data parameter 63 L label serial number nananana 9 type code oniruru eee 9 language parameter 22005 61 liability limits 2 0 2 a 299 limits parameter group anaana 95 load frequency see user load curve load package version parameter 115 load torque see user load curve local mode lock parameter 0 89 low frequency PFA parameters 147 lugs for R6 power cables 276 305 M macros booster pump cad sedna cee eee eee 51 condenser cence 50 cooling tower fan 200 eee 49 dual setpoint w PID 56 dual setpoint w PID amp const speeds 57 e bypass ee ee 58 floating point 0 eee eee 55 hand control naaa manahan 59 HVAC default 0 000 46 internal timer 2 0000 0005 53 internal timer w constant speeds 54 ISun ssi ee ie eshte eS wate let alan Woe AG 44 pump alternation a 52 AE AA it ease a a a 48 SUpply TAN ahowieicatuvelaasebeukeias 4 47 to select oo ceive ae bots Raa Os 45 m
177. NABLED Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED 0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held 6 RAMP IN 1 RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation Enter OPERATING ZER 7 7 P 0 RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero Embedded Fieldbus 184 ACH550 UH User s Manual ABB Drives Profile EFB CONTROL WORD F Commanded Bit Name Value State Comments 7 RESET 0 51 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if 1604 COMM 0 OPERATING Continue normal operation 8 9 Unused 10 Unused ABB DRV LIM REMOTE CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled PEER FULL 0 e CW OorRef 0 Retain last CW and Ref CW 0 and Ref 0 Fieldbus control enabled e Ref and deceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRLLOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 EXT2 Effective if 1102 COMM 0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 EXT1 Effective if 1102 COMM 12 15 Unused DCU Profile The following tables describe the CONTROL WORD content for the DCU profile DCU Profile CONTROL WORD See Parameter 0301 Bit Name Value Command Req Comments 0 STOP 1 Stop Stops according to either the stop mode parameter or the stop mode requests bits 7 and 8 Start Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in a stop command no op
178. OTORTEMP 77 25 F C 1 8 1 320 z 18 LAI MREV 0 MREV 1 0 COUNTER 20 LAO OVRD TIME 1 hrs 1 0 21 LDI FWD REV FWD 1 0 REV FWD 22 LDO CMD FWD REV FWD 1 0 REV FWD 23 LDI STOP RUN STOP 1 0 RUN STOP 24 LDO CMD STP STRT STOP 1 0 RUN STOP 25 LDI EXT1 2 ACT EXT1 1 0 EXT2 EXT1 26 LDO EXT1 2 CMD EXT1 1 0 EXT2 EXT1 27 LDI DRIVE READY NOTRDY 1 0 READY NOTRDY 28 LDI AT SETPOINT NO 1 0 YES NO 29 LDO DAY NIGHT DAY 1 0 NIGHT DAY 30 LAO CURRENT LIM 0 A 0 1 0 31 LAO ACCEL TIME 1 300 sec 0 1 0 32 LAO DECEL TIME 1 300 sec 0 1 0 33 LDI NA AUTO 1 0 HAND AUTO Embedded Fieldbus 208 ACH550 UH User s Manual FLN Point Database nap Subpoint Name Defauit Units a a On Text Off Text Type SI Units 34 LDI ENA DIS ACT DISABL 1 0 ENABLE DISABL 35 LDO ENA DIS CMD DISABL 1 0 ENABLE DISABL 36 LDI FLN LOC ACT AUTO 1 0 FLN AUTO 37 LDI CTL SRC NO 1 0 YES NO 38 LDI FLN REF1 SRC NO 1 0 YES NO 39 LDI FLN REF2 SRC NO 1 0 YES NO 40 LDO RO1 OFF 1 0 ON OFF COMMAND 41 LDO RO2 OFF 1 0 ON OFF COMMAND 42 LDO RO3 OFF s 1 0 ON OFF COMMAND 43 LDO RO4 OFF 1 0 ON OFF COMMAND 44 LDO RO5 OFF 5 1 0 ON OFF COMMAND 45 LDO RO6 OFF 1 0 ON OFF COMMAND 4
179. OUTPUT FREQ This object indicates the output frequency applied to the motor in Hz The corresponding drive parameter is 0103 Hertz AV2 DC BUS VOLT This object indicates the drive s DC bus voltage level The corresponding drive parameter is 0107 Volts AV3 OUTPUT VOLT This object indicates the AC output voltage applied to the motor The corresponding drive parameter is 0109 Volts AV4 CURRENT This object indicates the measured output current The corresponding drive parameter is 0104 Amps AV5 TORQUE This object indicates the calculated motor output torque as a percentage of nominal torque The corresponding drive parameter is 0105 Percent AVE POWER This object indicates the measured output power in kW The corresponding drive parameter is 0106 Kilowatts AV7 DRIVE TEMP This object indicates the measured heatsink temperature in C The corresponding drive parameter is 0110 AV8 KWH R This object indicates in kW hours the drive s accumulated energy usage since the last reset The value can be reset to zero The corresponding drive parameter is 0115 kWh AV9 KWH NR This object indicates the drive s accumulated energy usage in kW hours The value cannot be reset kWh AV10 PRC PID FBCK This object is the Process PID feedback signal The corresponding drive parameter is 0130 Percent AV11 PRC PID DEV
180. PPLIC MACRO The drive must be stopped to change User Parameter Sets During a change the drive will not start Note Always save the User Parameter Set after changing any parameter settings or performing a motor identification Whenever the power is cycled or parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO is changed the drive loads the last settings saved Any unsaved changes to a user parameter set are lost Note The value of this parameter 1605 is not included in the User Parameter Sets and does not change if User Parameter Sets change Note You can use a relay output to supervise the selection of User Parameter Set 2 See parameter 1401 0 NOT SEL Defines the control panel using parameter 9902 as the only control for changing User Parameter Sets 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets e The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the falling edge of the digital input e The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the rising edge of the digital input e The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets e See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets e The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the rising edge of the digital input e The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the falling edge of the digital input e The User P
181. PPLY PHASE 24 OVERSPEED 28 SERIAL 1 ERR 29 EFB CONFIG FILE 30 FORCE TRIP 31 EFB 1 32 EFB 2 33 EFB 3 34 MOTOR PHASE 1001 PAR PFC REFNEG Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 1002 PAR PFC IOCONF 1003 PAR Al SCALE 1004 PAR AO SCALE 1006 PAR EXTROMISSING 1007 PAR FBUSMISSING 1008 PAR PFCWOSCALAR Commissioning the Override Mode 1 Enter the parameters in all groups as needed except group 17 2 Select the digital input that will activate override mode P1701 3 Enter the frequency or speed reference for override mode P1702 and P1703 according to the motor control mode P9904 4 Enter the pass code P1704 358 5 Enable the override mode P1705 Changing the Override Parameters 1 If override mode is already enabled disable it e Enter the pass code P1704 e Disable the override mode P1705 If needed load the override parameter set P9902 3 Change the parameters as needed except group 17 4 Change the parameters in group 17 as needed e Digital input for override mode P1701 e Frequency or speed reference P1702 or P1703 Enter the pass code P1704 93 Enable the override mode P1705 The drive replaces the override parameter set with new values of all parameters Group 17 Override Code Description Range Resolution DefaultS 1701 OVERRIDE SEL 6 6 1 0 Selects the source of the override activation signal O NOT SEL Override activation signal
182. RNAL SETPNT 50 0 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 3 D13 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 D12 4110 SETPOINT SEL 19 INTERNAL 1609 START ENABLE 2 5 DI5 4111 INTERNAL SETPNT 100 0 Start Up ACH550 User s Manual 57 Dual Setpoint with PID and Constant Speeds This macro configures for applications with 2 constant speeds active PID and PID alternating between two setpoints using digital inputs Set PID setpoints internal to the drive using parameters 4011 SET1 and 4111 SET2 The digital input DI3 selects the setpoints X1 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen Q UW2 AN External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC Q 5 JAl2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND AYAN Ui GIL J1 Jumper Settings T n 7 AO1 utput frequency 0 4 20 m 9 gt Alt 0 4 20 mA D 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA ne AIDA BOA 4 9 AGND Analog output circuit common 2 gt 0 4 20 mA 7 z 40l24v Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 147 GND Auxiliary voltage output common M2 1DCOM Digital input common for all H3 Di Start Stop Activate to start drive L M4I DI2 Presets PID selection Activate to select PID LU 11
183. RTED 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 DI2 Start Up ACH550 User s Manual Hand Control This macro configures for drive control using only the control panel with no automated control Typically this is a temporary configuration used prior to control 59 wiring X1 7 SCR Signal cable shield screen a2 Ali Not configured 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 Al2 Not configured 6 AGND Analog input circuit common 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA J1 Jumper Settings lt n 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA i Q P Alt 0 4 20 mA 7 9 AGND Analog output circuit common 9 gt Al2 0 4 20 mA 1 2 10 124V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 1411 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L M2 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Not configured 14 DI2 Not configured 15 DI3 Not configured 16 DI4 Not configured 17 DI5 Not configured 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A fi Default operation Started gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B f 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A xu Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B f 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A Default operation Fault 1
184. RV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 11 TIMER1 3601 TIMERS ENABLE 1 D11 1201 CONST SPEED SEL O NOT SEL 3622 BOOST SEL 3 D13 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 3626 TIMER 1 SRC 23 B P3 P2 P1 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 D12 Start Up 54 ACH550 User s Manual Internal Timer with Constant Speeds PRV This macro configures for applications such as a timed powered roof ventilator PRV which alternates between two constant speeds constant speed 1 and 2 based on a built in timer Momentarily activating digital input 3 DI3 provides a boost function which operates the motor See group 36 Timer Functions for more information on setting up timers X1 7 ISCR Signal cable shield screen Q 1 2 Alt External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 Al2 Not configured 6 AGND Analog input circuit common no Setti 9H H7 A01 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA 5 umper setings ci LG 8 TAO Output current 0 4 20 mA nala ALO 220 mA 19 AGND Analog output circuit common Q P Al2 0 4 20 mA F5 024V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 147 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 112 DCOM Digital input common for all LU 243 011 Timer enable
185. Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 00037 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5 00038 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 Active low For the Oxxxx registers Status is always readable Forcing is allowed by user configuration of the drive for fieldbus control e Additional relay outputs are added sequentially Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual The ACH550 supports the following Modbus function codes for coils Function Code Description 01 Read coil status 05 Force single coil 15 OxOF Hex Force multiple coils 177 1xxxx Mapping Modbus Discrete Inputs The drive maps the following information to the 1xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Discrete Inputs e Bit wise map of the STATUS WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 inputs are reserved for this purpose e Discrete hardware inputs numbered sequentially beginning with input 33 The following table summarizes the 1xxxx reference set Modbus Internal Location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE Ref All Profiles 5305 0 or 2 5305 1 10001 STATUS WORD Bit 0 RDY_ON READY 10002 STATUS WORD Bit 1 RDY_RUN ENABLED 10003 STATUS WORD Bit 2 RDY_REF STARTED 10004 STATUS WORD Bit 3 TRIPPED RUNNING 10005 STATUS WORD Bit 4 OFF_2_STA ZERO_SPEED 10006 STA
186. S800 drives ABB DRV LIM This implementation standardizes the control interface with ACS400 drives This implementation does not support two control word bits supported by ABB DRV FULL Except as noted the following ABB Drives Profile descriptions apply to both implementations DCU Profile The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits and is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The fieldbus master station sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive The drive switches between states according to the bit coded instructions in the CONTROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD ABB Drives profile version requires that e The drive is in remote REM control The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands set using parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL The serial communication channel used is configured to use an ABB control profile For example to use the control profile ABB DRV FULL requires both parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 1 STD MODBUS and parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 2 ABB DRV FULL Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual ABB Drives Profile The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the CONTROL WORD content for the
187. TUS WORD Bit 5 OFF 3 STA ACCELERATE 10007 STATUS WORD Bit 6 SWC ON INHIB DECELERATE 10008 STATUS WORD Bit 7 ALARM AT SETPOINT 10009 STATUS WORD Bit 8 AT SETPOINT LIMIT 10010 STATUS WORD Bit 9 REMOTE SUPERVISION 10011 STATUS WORD Bit 10 ABOVE LIMIT REV REF 10012 STATUS WORD Bit 11 EXT2 REV ACT 10013 STATUS WORD Bit 12 RUN ENABLE PANEL LOCAL 10014 STATUS WORD Bit 13 N A FIELDBUS LOCAL 10015 STATUS WORD Bit 14 N A EXT2 ACT 10016 STATUS WORD Bit 15 N A FAULT 10017 STATUS WORD Bit 16 Reserved ALARM 10018 STATUS WORD Bit 17 Reserved REQ MAINT 10019 STATUS WORD Bit 18 Reserved DIRLOCK 10020 STATUS WORD Bit 19 Reserved LOCALLOCK 10021 STATUS WORD Bit 20 Reserved CTL MODE 10022 STATUS WORD Bit 21 Reserved Reserved 10023 STATUS WORD Bit 22 Reserved Reserved 10024 STATUS WORD Bit 23 Reserved Reserved 10025 STATUS WORD Bit 24 Reserved Reserved 10026 STATUS WORD Bit 25 Reserved Reserved 10027 STATUS WORD Bit 26 Reserved REQ CTL Embedded Fieldbus 178 ACH550 UH User s Manual Modbus Internal Location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE Ref All Profiles 5305 0 or 2 5305 1 10028 STATUS WORD Bit 27 Reserved REQ_REF1 10029 STATUS WORD Bit 28 Reserved REQ REP2 10030 STATUS WORD Bit 29 Reserved REQ REF2EXT 10031 STATUS WORD Bit 30 Reserved ACK STARTINH 10032 STATUS WORD Bit 31 Reserved ACK OFF ILCK 10033 DI1 DI1 DI1 10034
188. User s Manual ACH550 UH HVAC Drives 1 550 HP Ak ED ED FADED ACH550 Drive Manuals GENERAL MANUALS ACH550 UH HVAC User s Manual 1 550 HP Safety Installation Start Up e Embedded Fieldbus e Fieldbus Adapter e Diagnostics e Maintenance e Technical Data ACH550 PC PD Packaged Drive with Disconnect Supplement for ACH550 UH HVAC User s Manual Safety Installation Start Up e Maintenance e Technical Data E Bypass Configurations BC BD VC or VD for ACH550 Drives 1 400 HP Safety Installation Start Up e Technical Data OPTION MANUALS Fieldbus Adapters I O Extension Modules etc manuals delivered with optional equipment Relay Output Extension Module typical title Installation e Programming Fault tracing e Technical data ACH550 UH User s Manual BACnet is a registered trademark of ASHRAE CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation e V ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International DeviceNet is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association DRIVECOM is a registered trademark of DRIVECOM User Organization Interbus is a registered trademark of Interbus Club LonWorks is a registered trademark of Echelon Corp Metasys is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls Inc Modbus and Modbus Plus are registered trademarks of Schneider Automation Inc Profibus is a registered trademark of Profibus Trad
189. VERCURRENT Output current is excessive Check for and correct e Excessive motor load e Insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 e Faulty motor motor cables or connections DC OVERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive Check for and correct e Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply e Insufficient deceleration time parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 e Verify that overvoltage controller is ON using parameter 2005 DEV OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is overheated Temperature is at or above limit R1 R4 amp R7 R8 115 C 239 F R5 R6 125 C 257 F Check for and correct Fan failure e Obstructions in the air flow Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink e Excessive ambient temperature e Excessive motor load SHORT CIRC Fault current Check for and correct A short circuit in the motor cable s or motor e Supply disturbances Diagnostics 250 ACH550 UH User s Manual Fault Code Fault Name In Panel Description and Recommended Corrective Action RESERVED Not used DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient Check for and correct e Missing phase in the input power supply e Blown fuse e Undervoltage on mains Al1 LOSS Analog input 1 loss Analog input value is less than AI1FLT LIMIT 3021 Check for and correc
190. XT1 set using parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL e The external plug in fieldbus adapter is activated Parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 4 EXT FBA The external plug in fieldbus adapter is configured to use the drive profile mode or drive profile objects The content of the CONTROL WORD depends on the protocol profile used See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or the ABB Drives Profile Technical Data Status Word The STATUS WORD is a 16 bit word containing status information sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller The content of the STATUS WORD depends on the protocol profile used See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or the ABB Drives Profile Technical Data section Reference The contents of each REFERENCE word e Can be used as speed or frequency reference Isa 16 bit word comprised of a sign bit and a 15 bit integer e Negative references indicating reversed rotation direction are indicated by the two s complement of the corresponding positive reference value The use of a second reference REF2 is supported only when a protocol is configured for the ABB Drives profile Reference scaling is fieldbus type specific See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or the following sections as appropriate e ABB Drives Profile Technical Data Generic Profile Technical Data Actual Values Planning Actual Values are 16 bit words con
191. a pulse encoder First Start If no Motor ID Run is performed the drive estimates motor characteristics when the drive is first run This First Start occurs automatically at the next run command after any motor parameter is changed In order to estimate characteristics and create a motor model the First Start magnetizes the motor for 10 to 15 seconds at zero speed Activating the First Start does require that e 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 9904 3 SCALAR SPEED and e 2101 3 SCALAR FLYSTART or 5 FLYSTART TORQ BOOST Note If you change motor parameters after running a Motor ID Run repeat the Motor ID Run 0 NO ID RUN Motor ID Run process is not running 1 ID RUN Enables a Motor ID Run at the next start command After run completion this value automatically changes to 0 To perform a Motor Id Run 1 De couple load from motor or otherwise reduce load to near zero 2 Verify that motor operation is safe e The run automatically operates the motor in the forward direction confirm that forward rotation is safe e The run automatically operates the motor at 50 80 of nominal speed confirm that operation at these speeds is safe 3 Check following parameters if changed from factory settings e 2001 MINIMUM SPEED lt 0 e 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED gt 80 of motor rated speed e 2003 MAX CURRENT gt 130 of lon value e The maximum torque parameters 2014 2017 and or 2018
192. accelerating using Group 22 parameters 2202 or 2205 e B speed regulated motor decelerating using Group 22 parameters 2203 or 2206 e At aux motor start speed regulated motor decelerates using 8125 DEC IN AUX START e At aux motor stop speed regulated motor accelerates using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 8125 DEC IN AUX START 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Sets the PFA deceleration time for a maximum to zero frequency ramp This PFA deceleration ramp e Applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched on e Replaces the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL e Applies only until the output of the regulated motor decreases by an amount equal to the output of the auxiliary motor Then the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies O NOT SEL 0 1 1800 Activates this function using the value entered as the acceleration time 8126 TIMED AUTOCHANGE 0 4 1 0 Sets the autochange with timer When enables autochange is controlled with the timer functions 0 NOT SEL 1 Timer 1 Enables autochange when Timer 1 is active 2 4 Timer 2 4 Enables autochange when Timer 2 4 is active 8127 MOTORS 0 7 1 0 v Sets the actual number of PFA controlled motors maximum 6 motors 1 speed regulated 3 connected direct on line and 3 spare motors e This value includes also the speed regulated motor e This value must be compatible with number of relays al
193. aches 63 of a step change within the time specified See figure in parameter 1303 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 99 199 1 104 Defines the content for analog output A02 See AO1 CONTENT above 1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Depends on selection 0 0 A Sets the minimum content value See AO1CONTENT MIN above 1509 AO2 CONTENT MAX Depends on selection 4 6A Sets the maximum content value See AO1 CONTENT MAX above 1510 MINIMUM AO2 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 4 0 mA Sets the minimum output current See MINIMUM AO1 above 1511 MAXIMUM AO2 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 20 0 mA Sets the maximum output current See MAXIMUM A01 above 1512 FILTER AO2 0 0 10 0s 0 1s 0 1s Start Up 88 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 16 System Controls This group defines a variety of system level locks resets and enables Group 16 System Controls Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1601 RUN ENABLE 6 7 1 0 v Selects the source of the run enable signal 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external run enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the run enable signal e This digital input must be activated for run enable If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal e See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the run enable
194. ack inversion parameter external trimming parameter group external source activate parameter feedback multiplier parameter feedback select parameter feedback data parameter gain parameter integration time parameter internal setpoint parameter offset parameter output data parameter parameter set select parameter process sets parameter groups scaling 0 100 parameters setpoint maximum parameter setpoint minimum parameter setpoint select parameter setpoint source EFB comm activate setpoint source FBA comm activate setpoint data parameter sleep delay parameter sleep level parameter sleep selection parameter trim mode parameter trim scale parameter units actual signal parameter wake up delay parameter wake up deviation parameter PID controller advanced set up eee eee basic set up planning EFB comm FBA comm 307 plenum Taning ocr ei ae tenere dedeed un ae 294 PNPA aNG aa Aa BA ANA 287 power data parameter a 63 first applied ee eee 25 previous faults history parameters 71 process PID sets parameter groups 128 process variables data parameter 65 profiles abb drives overview 182 comm EFB a a wa RER ARAR 175 dcu overview eae 182 proportional gain parameter
195. ailbox EFBcomm 000005 169 mains see input power maintenance CApaGILoNS osc nA ea see 265 control panel eee eee 265 drive module fan 4 259 enclosure air filter 262 enclosure fan 2022000 ee eee 260 Meats Ak ANA ages aie ti An NT does aes 258 intervals da Bi ee all ets hae eters ied da 258 R7 R8 enclosure exhaust filter 263 R7 R8 enclosure inlet filter 262 triggers parameter group 107 ManUalSis 2364 KANA DAG hl See bee le LAAL 2 mapping actual value FBA generic profile 247 EFB modbus 220005 175 materials ANA gael eae Paes asia 296 maximum frequency parameter 96 torque limit parameters 97 torque select parameter 96 metasys connection diagram companion 196 connection diagram system 195 Integration 4a ga Peek ae NAERA 195 minimum frequency parameter 96 torque limit parameters 97 torque select parameter 96 modbus EFB addressing convention 175 ERB COIS fost cod naabala naaa ANA Nana Dan 175 EFB discrete inputs 177 EFB holding registers 178 EFB input registers 178 EFB mapping details 175 EFB mapping summary 175 EFB supported features 1
196. al A on one drive is connected to terminal B on another e The value of 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES does not advance e The values of 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS are advancing To correct Check that the RS 485 lines are not swapped Fault 28 Serial 1 Err If the drive s control panel shows fault code 28 SERIAL 1 ERR check for either of the following The master system is down To correct resolve problem with master system The communication connection is bad To correct check communication connection at the drive The time out selection for the drive is too short for the given installation The master is not polling the drive within the specified time out delay To correct increase the time set by parameter 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Fault 31 EFB1 For BACnet If the drive s control panel shows fault code 31 EFB1 the drive has an invalid object instance ID To correct use parameters 5311 and 5317 and establish a unique drive ID that is in the range 1 to 4 194 303 Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 173 Faults 31 33 EFB1 EFB3 Except as noted above these three EFB fault codes listed for the drive in Diagnostics starting on page 248 fault codes 31 33 are not used Intermittent Off line Occurrences The problems described above are the most common problems encountered with ACH550 serial communication Intermittent problems might also be caused by Marginally loose
197. al values a 169 also see RS232 Aa 142 analog output control activate 168 comm fault response 168 config file fault code 252 configuration cee eee eee 161 configure for loss of communication 172 control interface 159 control word 182 diagnostics eeror riara a 171 drive control of functions activate 164 exception codes aaa 181 fault code 28 a 172 fault code 31 0000 ee 172 173 fault code 32 2 2200000 0 173 fault code 33 viaa naene a aa ai e a T 173 fault codes AA Aa 252 fault tracing parameters 171 fault duplicate stations 172 fault intermittent off line 173 fault no master station on line 172 fault swapped wires 172 feedback from drive 169 feedback from drive mailbox 169 input ref sel activate 165 installation eee eee 160 mailbox param read write 169 misc drive control activate 166 modbus actual values 181 normal operation 171 OVErVIEW 2 158 parameter group 00 142 parameters a 144 PID control setpoint source activate 168 a El AA 159 Prolls a AA tebe ee ska e Eai 175 protocol parameter group 143
198. allation environment conforms to the drive s specifications for ambient conditions The drive is mounted securely Space around the drive meets the drive s specifications for cooling The motor and driven equipment are ready for start For floating networks R1 R6 The internal RFI filter is disconnected screws EM1 amp EM3 or F1 amp F2 The drive is properly grounded The input power voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage range The input power connections at U1 V1 and W1 are connected and tightened as specified The input power branch circuit protection is installed The motor connections at U2 V2 and W2 are connected and tightened as specified The input power motor and control wiring are routed through separate conduit runs NO power factor compensation capacitors are in the motor cable The control connections are connected and tightened as specified NO tools or foreign objects such as drill shavings are inside the drive NO alternate power source for the motor such as a bypass connection is connected no voltage is applied to the output of the drive Re install Cover R1 R6 UL type 1 1 Align the cover and slide it on 2 Tighten the captive screw 3 Re install the control panel N a F A 7 saa N7 TTTTTT IP2009 Installation 24 ACH550 UH User s Manual R1 R6 UL type 12 1 Al
199. alog input 2 in 0122 RO1 3 STATUS 0 111 1 0 7 decimal Status of the three relay outputs 1 indicates that the relay is energized l O indicates that the relay is de energized J as RELAY 1 STATUS RELAY 2 STATUS RELAY 3 STATUS 0123 RO4 6 STATUS 0 111 1 0 7decimal Status of the three relay outputs See parameter 0122 0124 AO1 0 20 mA 0 1 mA The analog output 1 value in milliamperes 0125 AO2 0 20 mA 0 1 mA The analog output 2 value in milliamperes 0126 PID 1 OUTPPUT 1000 1000 0 1 The PID Controller 1 output value in 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT 100 100 0 1 The PID Controller 2 output value in 0128 PID 1 SETPNT The PID 1 controller setpoint signal e Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4006 4106 8 4007 4107 0129 PID 2 SETPNT The PID 2 controller setpoint signal e Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4206 8 4207 0130 PID 1 FBK The Pip 1 controller feedback signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4006 4106 8 4007 4107 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 65 Group 01 Operating Data Code Description Range Default S 0131 PID 2 FBK The PID 2 controller feedback signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4206 8 4207 0132 PID 1 DEVIATION The difference between the PID 1 controll
200. ameters 8120 INTERLOCKS and 8127 MOTORS Fault Resetting The ACH550 can be configured to automatically reset certain faults Refer to parameter Group 31 Automatic Reset Warning If an external source for start command is selected and it is active the ACH550 may start immediately after fault reset Flashing Red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a flashing red LED Turn off the power for 5 minutes Red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a red LED on not flashing correct the problem and do one of the following e From the control panel press RESET Turn off the power for 5 minutes Depending on the value of 1604 FAULT RESET SELECT the following could also be used to reset the drive e Digital input e Serial communication When the fault has been corrected the motor can be started Diagnostics ACH550 UH User s Manual 255 History For reference the last three fault codes are stored into parameters 0401 0412 0413 For the most recent fault identified by parameter 0401 the drive stores additional data in parameters 0402 0411 to aid in troubleshooting a problem For example parameter 0404 stores the motor speed at the time of the fault To clear the fault history all of the Group 04 Fault History parameters 1 Using the control panel in Parameters mode select parameter 0401 2 Press EDIT 3 Press UP and Down simultaneously 4 Press SAVE Co
201. ameters Mode in this section For detailed hardware description see the Technical Data section Note The current parameter value appears below the highlighted parameter Note To view the default parameter value press the UP DOWN buttons simultaneously Note The most typical and necessary parameters to change are parameter groups 99 Start up data 10 Start Stop Dir 11 Reference Select 20 Limits 21 Start Stop 22 Accel Decel 26 Motor Control and 30 Fault Functions Note To restore the default factory settings select the application macro HVAC default Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 31 Modes The HVAC control panel has several different modes for configuring operating and diagnosing the drive The modes are Standard display mode Shows drive status information and operates the drive e Parameters mode Edits parameter values individually e Start up assistant mode Guides the start up and configuration Changed parameters mode Shows changed parameters Fault logger mode Shows the drive fault history e Drive parameter backup mode Stores or uploads the parameters e Clock set mode Sets the time and date for the drive I O settings mode Checks and edits the I O settings e Alarm mode Reporting mode triggered by drive alarms Standard Display Mode Use the standard display mode to read information on the drive s status and to operate the drive To reac
202. and PTC 3 8 DI1 DI6 Thermistor 3503 ALARM LIMIT 10 200 C 1 110 C 0 5000 Ohm 1500 Ohm 0 1 0 Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement e At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR OVERTEMP For thermistors 0 de activated 1 activated 3504 FAULT LIMIT 10 200 C 1 130 C 0 5000 Ohm 4000 Ohm 0 1 0 Defines the fault limit for motor temperature measurement At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays a fault 9 MOTOR OVERTEMP and stops the drive For thermistors 0 de activated 1 activated Start Up 122 Group 36 Timer Functions ACH550 UH User s Manual This group defines the timer functions The timer functions include e Four daily start and stop times e Four weekly start stop and boost times Four timers for collecting selected periods together A timer can be connected to multiple time periods and a time period can be in multiple timers Time Period 1 3602 START TIME 1 3603 STOP TIME 1 3604 START DAY 1 3605 STOP DAY 1 Time Period 2 3606 START TIME 2 3607 STOP TIME 2 3608 START DAY 2 3609 STOP DAY 2 Time Period 3 3610 START TIME 3 3611 STOP TIME 3 3612 START DAY 3 3613 STOP DAY 3 Time Period 4 3614 START TIME 4 3615 STOP TIME 4 3616 START DAY 4 3617 STOP DAY 4 Booster 3622 BOOSTER SEL 3623 BOOSTER TIME Timer 1
203. and analog input 2 Al2 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 16 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 17 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 19 INTERNAL A constant value set using parameter 4011 provides reference Analog Input Reference Correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table Value Setting Al reference is calculated as following C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value 50 of reference value B value C B C value 50 of reference value B value Where e C Main Reference value COMM for values 9 10 and A11 for values 14 17 e B Correcting reference Al1 for values 9 10 and Al2 for values 14 17 Example The figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where e C 25 e P 4012 SETPOINT MIN O e P4013 SETPOINT MAX 0 B varies along the horizontal axis 20 PID20UT Defines PID controller 2 output parameter 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT as the reference source Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 133 Group 40 P
204. anges from local to remote Mode changes from remote to local Control switches from EXT1 to ExT2 Control switches from EXT2 to EXT1 0 OFF Disables the Start inhibit function 1 ON Enables the Start inhibit function gt o 2109 EM STOP SEL 6 6 1 0 Defines control of the Emergency stop command When activated e Emergency stop decelerates the motor using the emergency stop ramp parameter 2208 EM DEC TIME e Requires an external stop command and removal of the emergency stop command before drive can restart 0 NOT SEL Disables the Emergency stop function through digital inputs 1 DI1 Defines digital input D11 as the control for Emergency stop command e Activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command e De activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command e See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command e De activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command Activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command e See DI1 INV above 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR 15 300 1 100 Sets the maximum supplied current during torque boost e See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION
205. anning 159 In general the basic control interface between the fieldbus system and the drive consists of Protocol Control Interface Reference for more information Modbus Output Words Control word Reference1 Reference2 Input Words Status word Actual value 1 Actual value 2 Actual value 3 Actual value 4 Actual value 5 Actual value 6 Actual value 7 Actual value 8 The content of these words is defined by profiles For details on the profiles used see ABB Control Profiles Technical Data N2 Binary output objects Analog output objects Binary input objects Analog input objects N2 Protocol Technical Data FLN Binary output points Analog output points Binary input points Analog input points FLN Protocol Technical Data BACnet Device management Binary output objects Analog output objects Binary input objects Analog input objects BACnet Technical Data Note The words output and input are used as seen from the fieldbus controller point of view For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view Network planning should address the following questions e What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network e What control information must be sent down to the drives e What feedback information must be
206. apacitive paths that are negligible at 50 60 Hz can be very significant conductors at 8 000 Hz Motor cable signals are pulses at up to 8 000 Hz and the common mode frequency can reach 48 000 Hz 8k Hz x 3 phases x 2 pulse edges Alternate paths Where multiple paths exist the most conductive path draws the most current So the ground wiring must be a significantly better path in order to reduce the current in the alternate paths the paths through parasitic capacitors The high frequencies associated with motor cables also increase the potential for electromagnetic noise radiation See Motor Cable Requirements for CE amp C Tick Compliance below Technical Data 280 ACH550 UH User s Manual Motor Cable Shielding Motor cables require shielding using conduit armored cable or shielded cable e Conduit When using conduit Bridge joints with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint Bond conduit run to the drive enclosure Use a separate conduit run for motor cables also separate input power and control cables Use a separate conduit run for each drive e Armored Cable When using armored cable Use six conductor 3 phases and 3 grounds type MC continuous corrugated aluminum armor cable with symmetrical grounds Armored motor cable can share a cable tray with input power cables but not with control cables e Shielded Cable For shielded cable details see Motor Ca
207. arameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets e See DI1 INV above 1606 LOCAL LOCK 6 8 1 0 Defines control for the use of the HAND mode The HAND mode allows drive control from the control panel e When LOCAL LOCK is active the control panel cannot change to HAND mode 0 NOT SEL Disables the lock The control panel can select HAND and control the drive 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock e Activating the digital input locks out local control e De activating the digital input enable the HAND selection 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock e See DI1 above 7 ON Sets the lock The control panel cannot select HAND and cannot control the drive 8 COMM Defines bit 14 of the Command Word 1 as the control for setting the local lock The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication e The Command Word is 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock e De activating the digital input locks out local control e Activating the digital input enable the HAND selection 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock e See DI1 INV above 1607 PAR
208. arameter setting 31 PFA the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the second relay with a parameter setting 31 PFA and so on Relay Logic AGH950 ACH550 Standard PFA mode ja PFA with Autochange mode e The fourth auxiliary motor uses the same reference step low frequency and start frequency values as the third auxiliary motor e The table below shows the ACH550 PFA motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 where the settings are either 31 PFA or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is disabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 Parameter Setting ACH550 Relay Assignment 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 Autochange Disabled 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 ROT RO2 RO3 RO4 ROS ROG 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 0 1 2 7 31 X X X X X 1 Aux X X X X X 31 31 X X X X 2 lAux Aux X X X X 31 31 31 X X X 3 Aux Aux JAux X X X X 131 31 X X xX 2 x Aux Aux X X X XIX X 31 X 31 2 xX X X Aux X Aux 31 31 X X X xX 1 Aux JAux X X X X One additional relay output for the PFA that is in use One motor is in sleep when the other is rotating Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 149 Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S
209. arameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location EXT1 and EXT2 The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 and REF2 Note fieldbus references are bipolar that is they can be positive or negative ABB Drives Profile Parameter Value Setting Al Reference Scaling 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD Max Ref Fieldbus Resultant Ref Reference 1 63 1 00 Max Ref 100 163 1003 DIRECTION 2 REVERSE Max Ref maa Fieldbus 163 100 Resultant Ref 100 163 Reference i i l l l Max Ref 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Resultant Ref Max Ref Fieldbus 163 100 Reference Max Ref 100 163 Embedded Fieldbus 194 ACH550 UH User s Manual N2 Protocol Technical Data Overview The N2 Fieldbus connection to the ACH550 drives is based on an industry standard RS 485 physical interface The N2 Fieldbus protocol is a master slave type serial communication protocol used by the Johnson Controls Metasys system In the Metasys architecture the N2 Fieldbus connects object interfaces and remote controllers to Network Control Units NCUs The N2 Fieldbus can also be used to connect ACH550 drives to the Metasys Companion product l
210. art up Data This group defines special Start up data required to e Set up the drive e Enter motor information Note Parameters checked under the heading S can be modified only when the drive is stopped Group 99 Start up Data Code Description Range Resolution Default S 9901 LANGUAGE 0 13 1 0 Selects the display language 0 ENGLISH 1 ENGLISH AM 2 DEUTSCH 3 ITALIANO 4 ESPANOL 5 PORTUGUES 6 NEDERLANDS 7 z FRANCAIS 8 DANSK 9 SUOMI 10 SVENSKA 11 RUSSKI 12 POLSKI 13 T RKCE 9902 APPLIC MACRO 1 15 1 1 v Selects an application macro Application macros automatically edit parameters to configure the ACH550 for a particular application See Application Macros for application macro descriptions 1 HVAC DEFAULT 2 SUPPLY FAN 3 RETURN FAN 4 COOLING TOWER 5 CONDENSER FAN 6 BOOSTER PUMP 7 PUMP ALTERNATION 8 INTERNAL TIMER 92 INTERNAL TIMER 10 FLOATING POINT WITH CONSTANT SPEEDS 11 DUAL SETPOINT 12 DUAL SETPOINT PID 13 E BYPASS 14 HAND CONTROL 15 E CLIPSE PID WITH CONSTANT SPEEDS 31 LOAD FD SET FrontDrop parameter values as defined by the FlashDrop file Parameter view is selected by parameter 1611 PARANETER VIEW e FlashDrop is an optional device for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives FlashDrop allows easy customization of the parameter list e g selected parametes can be hidden For more information see MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual JAFE68591074
211. ate of Relay 3 Parameter 1403 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 1 ON 0 OFF 0134 bit 2 43 RO4 COMMAND Controls the output state of Relay 4 Access to relay 4 require ACH550 option OREL Parameter 1410 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 1 ON 0 OFF 0134 bit 3 44 RO5 COMMAND Controls the output state of Relay 5 Access to relay 5 require ACH550 option OREL Parameter 1411 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 1 ON 0 OFF 0134 bit 4 45 RO6 COMMAND Controls the output state of Relay 6 Access to relay 6 require ACH550 option OREL Parameter 1412 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this control 1 ON 0 OFF 0134 bit 5 46 AO1 COMMAND Controls Analog Output 1 Parameter 1501 must be set to this value for FLN to have this control 0135 COMM VALUE 1 47 AO2 COMMAND Controls Analog Output 2 Parameter 1507 must be set to this value for FLN to have this control 0136 COMM VALUE 2 48 RESET RUN TIME Commanded by FLN to reset the cumulative run timer 1 RESET 0 NO The control input is rising edge sensitive so once the command is issued this point automatically returns to its inactive state This momentary operation avoids any need for an explicit command to clear the point before a subsequent reset can be issued 49 RESET KWH Commanded by FLN to reset th
212. atsink dustiness of the page 258 environment every 6 12 months Replace drive module All Every six years See Drive Module Fan fan Replacement on page 259 Replace drive module UL type 12 Every three years See Enclosure Fan fan enclosures Replacement UL Type 12 Enclosures on page 260 Change capacitor Frame sizes R5 and R6 Every ten years See Capacitors on page 265 Replace battery in the Assistant control panel All Every ten years See Control Panel on page 265 Heatsink The heatsink fins accumulate dust from the cooling air Since a dusty heatsink is less efficient at cooling the drive overtemperature faults become more likely In a normal environment not dusty not clean check the heatsink annually in a dusty environment check more often Clean the heatsink as follows when necessary 1 Remove power from drive 2 Remove the cooling fan see section Drive Module Fan Replacement on page 259 3 Blow clean compressed air not humid from bottom to top and simultaneously use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust Maintenance ACH550 UH User s Manual 259 Note If there is a risk of the dust entering adjoining equipment perform the cleaning in another room 4 Replace the cooling fan 5 Restore power Drive Module Fan Replacement The drive module fan cools the heatsink Fan failure can be predi
213. auxiliary motor starts if e Two auxiliary motors are running e ACH550 output frequency exceeds the limit 8111 1 Hz e Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8111 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 147 Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 8112 LOW FREQ 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 30 0 US Sets the frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor stops if The first auxiliary motor is running alone e ACH550 output frequency drops below the limit f Hz 4 8112 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit fax 8112 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D P 8109 Ss After the first auxiliary motor stops a F Output frequency increases by the value P 8112 A i 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 It y fi In effect the output of the speed regulated motor increases to P nah TA HIN MIN B compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor See figure where A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 P 8116 gt B Output frequency decrease during the stop delay e C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as C frequency decreases 1 On e Grey path Shows hysteresis if time is reversed the path 1 t backwards is not the same For details on the path for 0 starting see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1
214. be grounded at the installation site Conductors must be adequately sized as required by safety regulations Power cable shields must be connected to the drive PE terminal in order to meet safety regulations Power cable shields are suitable for use as equipment grounding conductors only when the shield conductors are adequately sized as required by safety regulations In multiple drive installations do not connect drive terminals in series Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks A Warning Do not attempt to install or remove EM1 or EM3 screws while power is applied to the drive s input terminals Unsymmetrically grounded networks are defined in the following table In such networks the internal connection provided by the EM3 screw on frame sizes R1 R4 only must be disconnected by removing EM3 If the grounding configuration of the network is unknown remove EM3 Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual 275 Note ACH550 UH drives are shipped with the screw removed but included in the conduit box Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks EM3 Must Be Out Grounded at the L1 Grounded at the L1 corner of the mid point of a delta delta leg tt Ll2 Y L2 L3 L3 Single phase L1 Three phase L1 grounded at an Variac without L1 end point solidly grounded neutral L2 An N L3 EM3 an M4x16 screw makes an internal ground connection m Li that redu
215. bk Ref 4006 UNITS 0 31 4 Selects the unit for the PID controller actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 and 0132 See parameter 3405 for list of available units 4007 UNIT SCALE 0 4 1 1 Defines the decimal point location in PID controller actual values Enter the decimal point location counting in from the right of the entry 4007 Value Entry Display e See table for example using pi 3 14159 0 0003 3 1 0031 3 1 2 0314 3 14 3 3142 3 142 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 131 Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4008 0 VALUE 1000 0 1000 0 0 1 0 0 Defines together with the next parameter the scaling applied to the PID controller s actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 and Seale P4007 1000 0132 e Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 P 4009 P 4008 5 l T nog 0 100 1000 Internal scale 4009 100 VALUE 1000 0 1000 0 0 1 100 0 Defines together with the previous parameter the scaling applied to the PID controller s actual values e Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 Start Up 132 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4010 SET POINT SEL 0 19 1 1 v Defines the reference signal source for the
216. ble shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor If this is not possible leave the shield unconnected Thermistor relay OMIO board DI6 24 VDC Thermistor 0 OMIO board ii Di6 24 VDC i 10 nF For other faults or for anticipating motor overheating using a model see Group 30 Fault Functions Group 35 Motor Temp Meas Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3501 SENSOR TYPE 0 6 1 0 Identifies the type of motor temperature sensor used PT100 C or PTC ohms See parameters 1501 and 1507 0 NONE 1 1 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses one PT 100 sensor e Analog output A01 or A02 feeds constant current through the sensor e The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises as does the voltage over the sensor e The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input Al1 or Al2 and converts it to degrees centigrade 2 2 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses two PT 100 sensors e Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 3 3 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses three PT 100 sensors e Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 4 PTC Sensor configuration uses one PTC Ohm e The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor 4000 e The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor t
217. ble Requirements for CE amp C Tick Compliance below Grounding See Ground Connections in Input Power Connections above For CE compliant installations and installations where EMC emissions must be minimized see Effective Motor Cable Screens below Drive s Motor Connection Terminals The drive s motor and input power terminals have the same specifications See Drive s Power Connection Terminals above Motor Cable Requirements for CE amp C Tick Compliance The requirements in this section apply for CE or C Tick compliance Minimum Requirement CE amp C Tick The motor cable must be a symmetrical three conductor cable with a concentric PE conductor or a four conductor cable with a concentric shield however a symmetrical constructed PE conductor is always recommended The following figure shows the minimum requirement for the motor cable screen for example MCMK NK Cables Insulation Jacket Copper Wire Screen Helix of Copper Tape Inner Insulation pe Input filters designed for ACH550 cannot be used in an isolated or high impedance earthed industrial distribution network able Core Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual 281 Recommendation for Conductor Layout The following figure compares conductor layout features in motor cables Recommended CE amp C Tick Allowed CE 8 C Tick Symmetrical shielded cable three phase A separate PE conductor is required if the con
218. cal Data ACH550 UH User s Manual 279 Ground Fault Protection ACH550 internal fault logic detects ground faults in the drive motor or motor cable This fault logic Is NOT a personal safety or fire protection feature Can be set to trigger only a warning using parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT Could be tripped by leakage currents input power to ground associated with the use of an optional RFI EMC filter Grounding and Routing Background Motor cables require extra care in grounding and routing The reasons have to do with the following factors Parasitic capacitance Capacitors are essentially conductors that don t touch but are in close proximity to each other So for example there is a weak capacitive connection between cables and any conductors they are near Such unintentional but inevitable conductive paths are called parasitic capacitors Currents flowing through these paths often create problems For example current leaks to control cables can create noise interference leaks to the motor can damage bearings and leaks to the drive or other electronic cabinets can damage components Proximity As the conductors get closer together capacitance increases Proximal area As the area in close proximity increases the capacitance increases e g close parallel paths increase parasitic capacitance between conductors AC frequency For a given capacitance increased AC frequency increases current conductance Hence c
219. ceived 13 15 Unused Fieldbus Adapter ACH550 UH User s Manual 241 The state diagram below describes the start stop function of CONTROL WORD CW and STATUS WORD SW bits From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit1 0 ae OFF3 OFF2 FAULT SW Bit3 1 SW Bit5 0 ACTIVE ACTIVE SW Bit4 0 i CW Bit7 1 n f 0 l 0 V gt gt From any state OFF1 CW Bit0 0 SWITCH ON SW Bit1 0 OFF1 MAINS QFF INHIBITED SW Bit6 1 eee Oo N ACTIVE n f 0 0 Power ON CW Bit0 0 gt ABCD NOT READY PE TO SWITCH On SW Bit0 0 CW Bit3 0 CW xxxx X1XX XXXX x110 OPERATION READY TO 0 SW Bit2 0 MIBIEN WERON SW Bit0 1 OPERATION INHIBITED CW xxxx X1XX xxxx x111 gt BCD READY T OPERATE SW BINGI CW Bit4 0 CW Bit3 1 and gt SW Bit12 1 OPERATION a C D ENABLED SW Bit2 1 A q CW Bit5 0 CW xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111 RFG OUTPUT ENABLED O il B KEY San aa CW xxxx x1xx xx11 1111 gt State mm State change RFG ACCELERATOR CW CONTROL WORD ENABLED SW STATUS WORD c lt RFG Ramp Function Generator CW xxxx x1xx x111 1111 Param 0104 CURRENT f Param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ n Speed OPERATING SW Bit8 1 Hi Fieldbus Adapter 242 ACH550 UH User s Manual Reference As described earlier in Control Interface the REFERENCE word is a speed or frequency reference Refe
220. celerate when the PID sleep function ends To control PID sleep use parameters 4022 4026 or 4122 4126 2019 ID RUN Performing ID run 2020 RESERVED 2021 START ENABLE 1 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 1 signal is missing MISSING To control Start Enable 1 function use parameter 1608 To correct check e Digital input configuration Communication settings 2022 START ENABLE 2 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 2 signal is missing MISSING To control Start Enable 2 function use parameter 1609 To correct check e Digital input configuration e Communication settings 2023 EMERGENCY Emergency stop activated STOP 2024 ENCODER ERROR The drive is not detecting a valid encoder signal Check for and correct Encoder presence and proper connection reverse wired loose connection or short circuit Voltage logic levels are outside of the specified range A working and properly connected Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC 01 Wrong value entered in parameter 5001 PULSE NR A wrong value will only be detected if the error is such that the calculated slip is greater than 4 times the rated slip of the motor Encoder is not being used but parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 1 ENABLED 2025 FIRST START Signals that a the drive is performing a First Start evaluation of motor characteristics This is normal the first time the motor is run after motor parameters are entered or changed See paramete
221. cement procedure 259 fan enclosure filter maintenance procedure 262 UL type 12 replacement procedure 260 Index 304 fault codes comm FBA cerea ery a comm failure EFB current at history parameter digital input status at history parameter frequency at history parameter functions parameter group history history parameter group last history parameter listing previous history parameter reset reset select parameter speed at history parameter status at history parameter time of history parameters torque at history parameter voltage at history parameter words data parameters fault code 28 serial 1 err 2 000202 fault logging Assistant panel features N2TEIGDUS Na ae toate is GG ae eee feedback multiplier PID parameter feedback select PID parameter field weakening point fieldbus see comm command words data parameters CPI firmware revision parameter parameter refresh parameter parameters oc eee ee aaa status words data parameters status parameter type parameter fieldbus termination filter enclosure R7 R8 exhaust maintenance interval R7 R8 exhaust maintenance procedure R7 R8 inlet maintenance interval R7 R8 inlet maintenance procedure filter enclosure air maintenance procedure firmware test date parameter firmware version parame
222. ces electro magnetic emission Where EMC electro magnetic compatibility is a concern and the network is symmetrically grounded EM3 may be installed For reference the diagram at right illustrates a symmetrically grounded network L2 L3 Floating Networks A Warning Do not attempt to install or remove EM1 EM3 F1 or F2 screws while power is applied to the drive s input terminals For floating networks also known as IT ungrounded or impedance resistance grounded networks Disconnect the ground connection to the internal RFI filters Frame sizes R1 R4 Remove the EM1 screw unit is shipped with EM3 removed see Connection Diagrams on page 17 Frame sizes R5 R6 Remove both the F1 and F2 screws see page 18 Where EMC requirements exist check for excessive emission propagated to neighboring low voltage networks In some cases the natural suppression in transformers and cables is sufficient If in doubt use a supply transformer with static screening between the primary and secondary windings Do NOT install an external RFI EMC filter such as one of the kits listed in EN 61800 3 Compliant Motor Cables on page 281 Using an RFI filter grounds the input power through the filter capacitors which could be dangerous and could damage the unit Technical Data 276 ACH550 UH User s Manual Drive s Power Connection Terminals The following table provides specifications for the drive s pow
223. ch that the actual value follows the process reference If demand continues to increase PFA adds additional auxiliary pumps using the same process When demand drops such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit user defined by a frequency limit the PFA automatically stops an auxiliary pump The PFA also increases the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s missing output e An Interlock function when enabled identifies off line out of service motors and the PFA skips to the next available motor in the sequence An Autochange function when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear equalizes duty time between the pump motors Autochange periodically increments the position of each motor in the rotation the speed regulated motor becomes the last auxiliary motor the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed regulated motor etc Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least one auxiliary constant speed motor is running Default value is 0 Example An ACH550 operates three parallel pumps that maintain water pressure in a pipe 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant pressure reference that controls the pressure in the pipe The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water consumption levels As water consumption
224. cification Alarm Enabled Change of State COS enabled Override value is received but there is no action taken Analog Output The analog output objects support the following features Analog Output value in engineering units Override value is used to change the Analog Output value It is not possible to return to the previous value by removing the override The override feature is used only to change the value Binary Output The binary output objects support the following features Binary Output value Override value is used to change the Binary Output value It is not possible to return to the previous value by removing the override The override feature is used only to change the value Metasys Integration The following diagram shows the drives integration to the Johnson Controls Metasys system NiLAN N2 Fieldbus ce ce Embedded Fieldbus 196 ACH550 UH User s Manual The following diagram shows the drives integration to the Johnson Controls Metasys Companion system PC Version m Panel Version LTD mim RS232 RS485 Converter N2 Fieldbus A A On the N2 Fieldbus each ACH550 drive can be accessed by the full complement of Metasys FMS features includi
225. circuit boards can be landfilled The DC capacitors contain electrolyte and the printed circuit boards contain lead both of which will be classified as hazardous waste within the EU They must be removed and handled according to local regulations For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling instructions please contact your local ABB distributor Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual 297 Applicable Standards Drive compliance with the following standards is identified by the standards marks on the type code label Mark Applicable Standards EN 50178 1997 Electronic equipment for use in power installations C EN 60204 1 1997 Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 corrigendum Sep 1998 General requirements Provisions for compliance The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing e An emergency stop device e A supply disconnecting device EN 60529 1991 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures IP code corrigendum May 1993 amendment A1 2000 EN 61800 3 1996 EMC product standard including specific test methods Amendment A11 2000 EN 61800 3 1996 EMC product standard including specific test methods Amendment A11 2000 UL 508C and UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment second Dus C22 2 No 14 edition and CSA Standard for Industrial Control Equipment LISTED G C22 2 No
226. clear the point before a subsequent reset can be issued 99 ERROR STATUS 1 of the 5 mandatory FLN points required for compatibility with Siemens control systems It has no functionality in the drive application None Embedded Fieldbus 216 ACH550 UH User s Manual BACnet Technical Data Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement PICS PICS Summary BACnet Standard Device Profile This version of ACH550 BACnet fully conforms to the Application Specific Controller standard device profile B ASC Services Supported The following services are supported by the ACH550 Am Response to Who Is also broadcast on power up amp other reset Have Response to Who Has e ReadProperty e WriteProperty e DeviceCommunicationControl e ReinitializeDevice Data Link Layer The ACH550 implements MS TP Master Data Link Layer All standard MS TP baud rates are supported 9600 19200 38400 amp 76800 MAC ID Device Object Instance The ACH550 supports separate MAC ID and Device Object Instance parameters Set the MAC ID using drive parameter 5302 Default 5302 1 Set the Device Object Instance using drive parameters 5311 and 5317 Default Both 5311 and 5317 0 which causes the MAC ID to double as the Device Object Instance For Device Object Instance values not linked to the MAC ID set ID values using 5311 and 5317 For IDsin the range 1 to 65 535 Parameter 5311sets the
227. consistent 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE must be 3 PFAWOSCALAR SCALAR SPEED when 8123 PFA ENABLE is activated Diagnostics 254 ACH550 UH User s Manual rault raut Name In Description and Recommended Corrective Action Code Panel 1009 PAR PcU1 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal frequency or speed Check for both of the following e 1 lt 60 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED lt 16 0 8 lt 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 120 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Motor Poles lt 0 992 1010 PAR PFA Both the override mode and PFA are activated at the same time These OVERRIDE modes are mutually incompatible because PFA interlocks cannot be observed in the override mode 1011 PAR OVERRIDE Overeride is enabled but parameters are incompatible Verify that1701 is PARS not zero and depending on 9904 value 1702 or 1703 is not zero 1012 PAR PFC IO 1 IO configuration is not complete not enough relays are parameterized to PFC Or a conflict exists between Group 14 parameter 8117 NR OF AUX MOT and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 1013 PAR PFC 10 2 IO configuration is not complete the actual number of PFC motors parameter 8127 MOTORS does not match the PFC motors in Group 14 and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 1014 PAR PFC IO 3 IO configuration is not complete the drive is unable to allocate a digital input interlock for each PFC motor par
228. cted by the increasing noise from fan bearings and the gradual rise in the heatsink temperature in spite of heatsink cleaning If the drive is operated in a critical part of a process fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms start appearing Replacement fans are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts To monitor the running time of the cooling fan see Group 29 Maintenance Trig on page 107 Frame Sizes R1 R4 To replace the fan 1 Remove power from drive 2 Remove drive cover 3 For Frame Size e R1 R2 Press together the retaining clips on the fan cover sides and lift R3 R4 Press in on the lever located on the left side of the fan mount and rotate the fan up and out 4 Disconnect the fan cable 5 Install the fan in reverse order xo021 6 Restore power Maintenance 260 ACH550 UH User s Manual Frame Sizes R5 and R6 To replace the fan Bottom View R5 1 Remove power from drive 2 Remove the screws attaching the fan 3 Remove the fan e R5 Swing the fan out on its hinges e RE Pull the fan out 4 Disconnect the fan cable 5 Install the fan in reverse order 6 Restore power xoo22 Frame Sizes R7 and R8 Refer to the installation instructions supplied with the fan kit Enclosure Fan Replacement UL Type 12 Enclosures UL type 12 enclosures include an additional fan or fans to move air through the enclosure Frame Sizes R1 to R
229. ctions of the ACH550 the internal clock has to be set first Date is used to determine weekdays and is visible in Fault logs Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 41 To set the clock follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu al Scroll to Clock Set with the UP DOWN buttons and select ENTER to enter the Clock Set mode Scroll to Clock Visibility with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL to change 3 the visibility of the clock KO Scroll to Show Clock with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL to make the clock visible Scroll to Set Time with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL Change the hours and minutes with the UP DOWN buttons and select OK to save LA the values The active value is displayed in inverted color Scroll to Time Format with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL a Gb a Pit CDa Cl The different formats are displayed Select a format with the UP DOWN 4A buttons and select SEL to confirm the 8 selection Scroll to Set Date with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL KOLK Start Up 42 ACH550 UH User s Manual Change the days months and year with the UP DOWN buttons and select OK to EA save the values The active value is v 10 displayed in inverted color lt BG Scroll to Date Format with the UP DOWN buttons and select SEL EA 11 e7 The Date formats are displayed Select a da
230. ctively Also see Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks and Floating Networks on page 274 Warning Do not attempt to install or remove EM1 EM3 F1 or F2 screws while power is applied to the drive s input terminals Note For more technical information contact the factory or your local ABB sales representative Safety ACH550 UH User s Manual Use of Warnings and Notes GB There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual e Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact or give information on a subject e Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death and or damage to the equipment They also tell you how to avoid the danger The warning symbols are used as follows Dangerous voltage warning warns of high voltage which can cause physical injury and or damage to the equipment General warning warns about conditions other than those caused by electricity which can result in physical injury and or damage to the equipment Safety ACH550 UH User s Manual 1 Table of Contents Table of Contents Safety Use of Warnings and Notes 2 eee eee eee 4 Table of Contents Installation Installation Flow Chart 0 0 00 ccc cc ee eee eee ee 7 Preparing for Installation maagang 20g eG os Bais ote at kka a aaa mpa 8 Installing th Drive Kapa scare tas ae ee LA Leeks eae ee eed S 11 Start Up HVAC Control Panel Features 0 0 ccc eee 28 S
231. d Starts the speed regulated motor B Autochange occurs e Identifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation 1PFA etc PID output associated with each motor Switches the above motor on but only if the new speed regulated motor had been running as a constant speed motor This step keeps an equal number of motors running before and after autochange e Continues with normal PFA operation Start Up 150 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S Starting Order Counter Output The operation of the starting order counter frequenc The relay output parameter definitions 1401 1403 and pay ta No aux raux Pa 1410 1412 establish the initial motor sequence The lowest thax parameter number with a value 31 PFA identifies the relay connected to 1PFA the first motor and so on e Initially 1 PFA speed regulated motor 2PFA 1st auxiliary motor etc e The first autochange shifts the sequence to 2PFA speed regulated motor 3PFA 1st auxiliary motor 1 PFA last auxiliary motor Area The next autochange shifts the sequence again and so on Autochange e If the autochange cannot start a needed motor because all is Allowed PID output inactive motors are interlocked the drive displays an alarm gt 2051 PFA INTERLOCK P 8119 100 e When ACH550 power supply is switched off the counter preserves the current Autochange rotation
232. d Discrete Input 0x02 Read discrete inputs status For the ACH550 the individual bits Status of the status word are mapped to Inputs 1 16 or 1 32 depending on the active profile Terminal inputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Input 33 e g DI1 Input 33 Read Multiple 0x03 Read multiple holding registers For the ACH550 the entire Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Multiple Input 0x04 Read multiple input registers For the ACH550 the 2 analog input Registers channels are mapped as input registers 1 amp 2 Force Single Coil 0x05 Write a single discrete output For the ACH550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Single 0x06 Write single holding register For the ACH550 the entire Holding Register parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Diagnostics 0x08 Perform Modbus diagnostics Subcodes for Query 0x00 Restart 0x01 amp Listen Only 0x04 are supported Force Multiple Coils OxOF Write multiple discrete outputs For the ACH550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Multiple 0x10 Write multiple holding registers For the ACH550 the entire Holding
233. d de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2022 on panel display The drive will not start until start enable 2 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 2 signal Bit 3 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 2 signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal e See DI1 INV above 1610 DISPLAY ALARMS Controls the visibility of the following alarms 2001 Overcurrent alarm 2002 Overvoltage alarm 2003 Undervoltage alarm 2009 Device overtemperature alarm For more information see section Alarm listing 0 NO The above alarms are suppressed 1 YES All of the above alarms are enabled 1611 PARAMETER VIEW Selects the parameter view i e which parameters are shown Note This parameter is visible only when it is activated by the optional FlashDrop device FlashDrop allows fast customization of the parameter list e g selected parameters can be hidden For more information see MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual JAFE68591074 English FlashDrop parameter values are activated by setting paramet
234. d faults display fault 16 EARTH FAULT and if running the drive coasts to stop 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 3 1 0 Defines the drive response if the fieldbus communication is lost 0 NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 28 SERIAL 1 ERR and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP7 Displays a warning 2005 IO COMM and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value 3 LAST SPEED Displays a warning 2005 lo COMM and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value Caution If you select CONST SP7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when fieldbus communication is lost 3019 COMM FAULT TIME 0 0 60 0 s 0 1s 10 0 s Sets the communication fault time used with 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC e Brief interruptions in the fieldbus communication are not treated as faults if they are less than the COMM FAULT TIME value 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Sets a fault level for analog input 1 See 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION 3022 A12 FAULT LIMIT 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Sets a fault level for analog input 2 See 3001 AIxMIN FUNCTION 3023 WIRING FAULT 0 1 1 1 Defines the drive response to cross wiring faults and to ground faults detected when the drive i
235. del Number ACH550 Applications Software Version 0504 Firmware Revision 206D BACnet Protocol Revision 2 Product Description The ACH550 is a high performance adjustable frequency drive specifically designed for commercial automation applications This product supports native BACnet connecting directly to the MS TP LAN All standard MS TP baud rates are supported as well as master mode functionality Over BACnet the drive can be fully controlled as a standard adjustable frequency drive In addition up to 16 configurable I O ports are available over BACnet for user applications BACnet Standardized Device Profile Annex L O BACnet Operator Workstation B OWS O BACnet Building Controller B BC O BACnet Advanced Application Controller B AAC BACnet Application Specific Controller B ASC O BACnet Smart Sensor B SS O BACnet Smart Actuator B SA List all BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks Supported Annex K DS RP B DS WP B DM DDB B DM DOB B DM DCC B DM RD B Segmentation Capability O Segmented requests supported Window Size O Segmented responses supported Window Size Standard Object Types Supported An object type is supported if it may be present in the device For each standard Object Type supported provide the following data 1 Whether objects of this type are dynamically creatable using the CreateObject service 2 Whether objects of this type are dynamically detectable usi
236. deleted underload parameters 3013 3015 3701 USER LOAD C MODE i Motor torque Supervision mode for the user adjustable load curves This functionality replaces the former A underload supervision in Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS e 0 NOT SEL Supervision is not active aga Kora P3712 n sa 1 ng P3715 P3718 UNDERLOAD Supervision for the torque P3714 P3717 dropping below the underload curve 2 OVERLOAD Supervision for the torque Allowed operating area exceeding the overload curve 3 BOTH Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload curve or exceeding the P3705 overload curve Overload area Underload area P3708 i T t H H P3704 P3707 P3710 P3713 P3716 Output frequency Hz 3702 USER LOAD C FUNC Action wanted during load supervision 1 FAULT A fault is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 2 ALARM An alarm is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 3703 USER LOAD C TIME Defines the time limit for generating a fault Half of this time is used as the limit for generating an alarm 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 Defines the frequency value of the first curve definition point Must be smaller than 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 Defines the torque value of t
237. derload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 Defines the torque value of the fifth overload curve definition point Start Up 128 Group 40 Process PID Set 1 This group defines a set of parameters used with the Process PID PID1 controller Typically only parameters in this group are needed PID Controller Basic Set up In PID control mode the drive compares a reference signal setpoint to an actual signal feedback and automatically adjusts the speed of the drive to match the two signals The difference between the two signals is the error value Typically PID control mode is used when the speed of a fan or pump needs to be controlled based on pressure flow or temperature In most cases when there is only 1 transducer signal wired to the ACH550 only parameter group 40 is needed ACH550 UH User s Manual A Schematic of setpoint feedback signal flow using parameter group 40 is PANEL Hand Auto Selection HAND AUTO presented Panel REF1 P1101 REF1
238. details see the document supplied with the FBA module Start Stop Direction Control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction control of the drive requires Drive parameter values set as defined below e Fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Reference 1 Drive Parameter Value Description moenus DCU N2 FLN BACnet ABB DRV PROFILE 1001 EXT1 10 coMM Start Stop by 40001 40031 BO1 24 BV10 COMMANDS fieldbus with Ext1 bits 0 3 bits O 1 selected 1002 ExT2 10 comm Start Stop by 40001 40031 BO1 24 BV10 COMMANDS fieldbus with Ext2 bits 0 3 bits O 1 selected 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction by 4002 40031 BO2 22 BV11 fieldbus 40032 bit 3 1 For Modbus the protocol reference can depend on the profile used hence two columns in these tables One column refers to the ABB Drives profile selected when parameter 5305 O ABB DRV LIM or 5305 2 ABB DRV FULL The other column refers to the DCU profile selected when parameter 5305 1 DCU PROFILE See ABB Control Profiles Technical Data on page 182 2 The reference provides direction control a negative reference provides reverse rotation Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 165 Input Reference Select Using the fieldbus to provide input references to the dri
239. ductors and a concentric or otherwise conductivity of the cable shield is lt 50 of the symmetrically constructed PE conductor and a conductivity of the phase conductor shield Shield PE Shield Conductor and Shield PE Shield Not allowed for motor cables CE amp C Tick A four conductor system three phase conductors and a protective conductor without a shield Allowed for motor cables with phase P conductor cross section up to 10 mn B80 Effective Motor Cable Screens The general rule for cable screen effectiveness is the better and tighter the cable s screen the lower the radiated emission level The following figure shows an example of an effective construction for example Olflex Servo FD 780 CP Lappkabel or MCCMK NK Cables Insulation Jacket Inner Insulator L2 L1 Braided Metallic Screen L3 EN 61800 3 Compliant Motor Cables To comply with EN 61800 3 requirements Motor cables must have an effective screen as described in Effective Motor Cable Screens on page 281 Motor cable screen wires must be twisted together into a bundle the bundle length must be less than five times its width and connected it to the terminal marked at the bottom right hand corner of the drive Motor cables must be grounded at the motor end with an EMC cable gland The ground must contact the cable screen all the way around the cable For EN 61800 3 First Environment Restricted Distribution CISPR11 Class A and EN 61800
240. e e Requires 4022 7 INTERNAL e See figure A PID output level B PID process feedback t lt P4024 A gt a t gt P 4024 P 4023 a B A C lt P 4026 Setpoint X P 4025 4005 1 P 4025 Setpoint t P 4025 4005 0 gt D Stop el Start 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 60 0 s Sets the time delay for the PID sleep function a motor speed frequency below 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL for at least this time period enables the PID sleep function stopping the drive e See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above 4025 WAKE UP DEVIATION 0 0 1000 0 1 0 0 Defines the wake up deviation a deviation from the setpoint greater than this value for at least the time period 4026 WAKE UP DELAY re starts the PID controller e Parameters 4006 and 4007 define the units and scale e Parameter 4005 0 A Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation e Parameter 4005 1 Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation tr 4025 Wake up level can be above or below setpoint Y Setpoint See figures t e C Wake up level when parameter 4005 1 P 4025 e D Wake up level when parameter 4005 0 e E Feedback is above wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up e F Feedback is below wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up 4026 WAKE UP DELAY 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s Defines the wake up delay a deviation from the setpoint greater than 4025 WAKE UP DEV
241. e This is very important for proper installation PC00013 Maintenance ACH550 UH User s Manual 263 4 Reinstall the 3 filter restraining brackets These will prevent the filter from being pulled out of the filter frame e Install the center bracket first e Install the 2nd bracket overlapping the center bracket oe by 1 2 to the left cf e Install the 3nd bracket overlapping the center bracket by 1 2 to the right CLI 1st filter retaining bracket st and 2nd filter retaining brackets All 3 filter retaining brackets 5 Install the filter frame back to the cabinet door Carefully align the mounting hooks to the slots in the cabinet door The hooks should be pointing down Press in at the center of the filter frame with your knee and gently press down with your hands at the top of the frame The filter frame will slide down approximately 3 4 inch and should be sealed securely to the door around the entire filter frame n PC00007 PC00008 Frame Sizes R7 R8 UL type 12 Enclosure Exhaust Filters The exhaust filters in the R7 R8 UL type 12 enclosure are located in the exhaust box at the top of the enclosure There are 2 filter frames attached to the exhaust box 1 Remove each filter frame Lift up on the filter frame until it slides approximately 34 inch IIWANAN il e Pull away from the exhaust box to remove Maintenance 264 For each filter frame remove the
242. e Feedback Values in the FLN Protocol Technical Data section Scaling does not apply for the BACnet protocol Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 171 Diagnostics EFB Fault Queue for Drive Diagnostics For general ACH550 diagnostics information see Diagnostics starting on page 248 The three most recent ACH550 faults are reported to the fieldbus as defined below Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 0401 Last Fault 40401 17 90 AV18 0412 Previous Fault 1 40402 18 91 AV19 0413 Previous Fault 2 40403 19 92 AV20 Serial Communication Diagnostics Network problems can be caused by multiple sources Some of these sources are Loose connections Incorrect wiring including swapped wires Bad grounding Duplicate station numbers Incorrect setup of drives or other devices on the network The major diagnostic features for fault tracing on an EFB network include Group 53 EFB Protocol parameters 5306 5309 The Parameter Descriptions section describes these parameters in detail Diagnostic Situations The sub sections below describe various diagnostic situations the problem symptoms and corrective actions Normal Operation During normal network operation 5306 5309 parameter values act as follows at each drive 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES advances advances for each application message properly received and addressed to this drive 53
243. e Org Profibus DP is a registered trademark of Siemens AG 2004 2005 2006 ABB Inc All Rights Reserved ACH550 UH User s Manual Safety gt PPP PPP PPE Warning The ACH550 adjustable speed AC drive should ONLY be installed by a qualified electrician Warning Even when the motor is stopped dangerous voltage is present at the Power Circuit terminals U1 V1 W1 and U2 V2 W2 and where present UDC UDC BRK and BRK Warning Dangerous voltage is present when input power is connected After disconnecting the supply wait at least 5 minutes to let the intermediate circuit capacitors discharge before removing the cover Warning Even when power is removed from the input terminals of the ACH550 there may be dangerous voltage from external sources on the terminals of the relay outputs R01 R03 Warning When the control terminals of two or more drive units are connected in parallel the auxiliary voltage for these control connections must be taken from a single source which can either be one of the units or an external supply Warning The ACH550 will start up automatically after an input voltage interruption if the external run command is on Warning The heat sink may reach a high temperature See Technical Data on page 266 Warning If the drive will be used in a floating network remove screws at EM1 and EM3 Frame size R1 R4 or F1 and F2 Frame size R5 or R6 See diagrams on page 17 and page 18 respe
244. e cumulative kilowatt hour counter 1 RESET 0 NO The control input is rising edge sensitive so once the command is issued this point automatically returns to its inactive state This momentary operation avoids any need for an explicit command to clear the point before a subsequent reset can be issued Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 213 FLN Detailed Point Descriptions i pag Drive Point Description Parameter 50 PRC PID GAIN Sets the proportional gain of the active Process PID set as 4001 SET1 selected by Point 54 PRC PID SEL 1 SET2 0 SET1 4101 SET2 51 PRC PID ITIM Sets the integration time of the active Process PID set as 4002 SET1 selected by Point 54 PRC PID SEL 1 SET2 0 SET1 4102 SET2 52 PRC PID DTIM Sets the derivation time of the active Process PID set as 4001 SET1 selected by Point 54 PRC PID SEL 1 SET2 0 SET1 4101 SET2 53 PRC PID DFIL Sets the time constant for the error derivative of the active 4004 SET1 Process PID set as selected by Point 54 PRC PID SEL 4104 SET2 1 SET2 0 SET1 54 PRC PID SEL Selects the active Process PID set 1 SET2 0 SET1 4027 55 EXT PID GAIN Sets the proportional gain of the External PID controller 4201 56 EXT PID ITIM Sets the integration time of the External PID controller 4202 57 EXT PID DTIM Sets the derivation time of the External PID co
245. e of the analog input e See MAXIMUM Al1 above 1306 FILTER Al2 0 0 10 0s 0 1s 0 1s Defines the filter time constant for analog input 2 A12 e See FILTER Al1 above Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 83 Group 14 Relay Outputs This group defines the condition that activates each of the relay outputs Group 14 Relay Outputs Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 0 45 1 1 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 1 what relay output 1 means O NOT SEL Relay is not used and is de energized 1 READY Energize relay when drive is ready to function Requires e Run enable signal present No faults exist e Supply voltage is within range e Emergency Stop command is not on 2 RUN Energize relay when the drive is running 3 FAULT 1 Energize relay when power is applied De energizes when a fault occurs 4 FAULT Energize relay when a fault is active 5 ALARM Energize relay when an alarm is active 6 REVERSED Energize relay when motor rotates in reverse direction 7 STARTED Energize relay when drive receives a start command even if Run Enable signal is not present De energized relay when drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs 8 SUPRV1 OVER Energize relay when first supervised parameter 3201 exceeds the limit 3203 e See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 113 9 suprv1 under Energize relay whe
246. e until the supervised parameter goes above the Lo 3202 7 highest limit Lo 3202 making that limit the active limit HI 3203 That limit remains active until the supervised parameter goes below the lowest limit HI 3203 making that limit m active Case A e Case A Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 A RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER Or SUPRV2 Energized 1 anms i OVER Initially the relay is de energized It is energized 0 gt whenever the supervised parameter goes above the active limit Case B A Case B Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 Energized 1 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER Initially the relay is energized It is de energized 0 whenever the supervised parameter goes below the active limit Note Case LO gt HI represents a special hysteresis with two separate supervision limits 1 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO Depends on selection 60 0 Hz Sets the low limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Depends on selection 60 0 Hz Sets the high limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM 101 199 1 104 Selects the second supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 114 Group 32 Supervision Code Description Range Resolutio
247. econds 0145 MOTOR TEMP 10 200 C 0 bara Ohm Motor temperature in degrees centigrade PTC resistance in Ohms e Applies only if motor temperature sensor is set up See parameter 3501 Start Up 66 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 01 Operating Data Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0146 MECH ANGLE 0 32767 1 0 01 0 Defines the motor shaft s angular position to about 0 01 32 768 divisions for 360 The position is defined as 0 at power up During operation the zero position can be set by AZ pulse input if parameter 5010 Z PLS ENABLE 1 ENABLE e Parameter 5011 POSITION RESET if parameter 5010 Z PLS ENABLE 2 DISABLE Any status change of parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 0147 MECH REVS 32767 32767 1 0 A signed integer that counts full revolutions of the motor shaft The value e Increments when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE changes from 32767 to 0 e Decrements when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE changes from O to 32767 0148 Z PLS DETECTED 0 1 1 0 When a Z pulse defines the zero position the shaft must pass through the zero position to trigger a Z pulse Until then the shaft position is unknown the drive uses the shaft position at power up as zero This parameter signals when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE is valid This parameter starts at zero on power up and changes to 1 only if e Parameter 5010 Z PLS ENABLE ENABLE and An encoder Z pulse has
248. ed reference needs to be controlled through digital inputs DI5 amp DI6 By activating digital input 5 the speed reference increases by activating digital input 6 the speed reference decreases If both digital inputs are active or inactive the reference does not change Note When constant speed 1 is activated using digital input 3 DI3 the reference speed is the value of parameter 1202 The value remains as the reference speed when digital input 3 is deactivated X1 17 SCR Signal cable shield screen l2 Ali Not configured 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 Al2 Not configured 6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings a 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA H C5 H9 AGND Analog output circuit common S P Al2 0 4 20 mA 1 2 40f24v Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 1141 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 12 DCOM Digital input common for all LU 143 D1 Start Stop Activate to start drive LU M41 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 LU 115 DI3 Constant Preset speed 1 P 1202 LU M6 DI4 Safety interlock 1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 Ll 1471 DI5 Reference up Activate to increase reference 18 DI6 Reference down Activate to decrease reference
249. elay DI4 Second PFA Relay DI5 Third PFA Relay DI6 Fourth PFA Relay 5 6 Not allowed Not allowed INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled 4 DI4 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with D14 to the interlock signal for each PFA relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on The number of PFA relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFA The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG No PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI3 Free Not allowed DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI5 DI6 Free 1 DI1 DI3 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed Reg Motor D14 First PFA Relay DI5 First PFA Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 2 DI1 DI3 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed Reg Motor D14 First PFA Relay DI5 First PFA Relay DI5 Second PFA Relay DI6 Second PFA Relay DI6 Free 3 Not allowed DI1 DI3 Free D14 First PFA Relay DI5 Second PFA Relay DI6 Third PFA Relay 4 6 Not allowed Not allowed Start Up 154 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 5 DI5 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI5 to the interlock signal for each PFA relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on e The number of PFA relays number of parameters 1401 1403
250. emperature rises over the PTC reference temperature T ef as does the voltage over the resistor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input Al1 and converts it into ohms e The figure shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of 550 the motor operating temperature 1330 Temperature Resistance 100 Normal 0 1 5 kohm Excessive gt 4 kohm Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 121 Group 35 Motor Temp Meas Code Description Range Resolution Default S 5 THERMISTOR 0 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect either a PTC sensor or a normally closed thermistor relay to a digital input The drive reads the digital input states as shown in the above table e When the digital input is 0 the motor is overheated e See the figures in the introduction to this Group 6 THERMISTOR 1 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor e Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect a normally open thermistor relay to a digital input The drive reads the digital input states as shown in the above table e When the digital input is 1 the motor is overheated See the figures in the introduction to this Group 3502 INPUT SELECTION 1 8 1 1 Defines the input used for the temperature sensor 1 Al1 PT100 and PTC 2 Al2 PT100
251. ence Code Description Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Do not edit Any non zero value entered for parameter 9802 Contains the identification and COMM PROT SEL sets this parameter automatically The program revision of the format is XXYY where xx protocol ID and YY program protocol revision 5302 EFB STATION ID Set each drive on the network Sets MS TP MAC ID A Defines the node address of with a unique value for this temporary value of 0 the RS485 link parameter places the protocol When this protocol is selected Channel in reset the default value for this parameter is 1 Note For a new address to take affect the drive power must be cycled OR 5302 must first be set to O before selecting a new address Leaving 5302 0 places the RS485 channel in reset disabling communication 5303 EFB BAUD RATE When this protocol is selected When this protocol is Defines the communication the default value for this selected the default speed of the RS485 link in parameter is 9 6 value for this parameter kbits per second kbits s is 9600 1 2 kbits s Do not edit 2 4 kbits s 4 8 kbits s 9 6 kbits s 19 2 kbits s 38 4 kbits s 57 6 kbits s 76 8 kbits s Embedded Fieldbus 162 ACH550 UH User s Manual EFB Protocol Reference Code Description Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 5304 EFB PARITY When this When this protocol is selected t
252. endent In general for Actual Values scale the feedback integer using the parameter s resolution See Parameter Descriptions section for parameter resolutions For example Feedback Parameter ANG Integer Resolution Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 1 10 0 1 1 Where parameters are in percent the Parameter Descriptions section specifies what parameter corresponds to 100 In such cases to convert from percent to engineering units multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100 and divide by 100 For example Feedback Parameter pa pa ni at Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution Integer Resolution defines 100 Value of 100 Ref 100 Scaled Value 10 0 1 1500 rpm 10 0 1 1500 RPM 100 15 rpm 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 0 196 500 Hz 100 50 Hz 1 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED as the 100 reference and that 9908 1500 rpm 2 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ as the 100 reference and that 9907 500 Hz Although Actual Value scaling could differ from the above for the N2 and FLN protocols it currently does not To confirm see the following sections as appropriate e N2 Analog Input Objects in the N2 Protocol Technical Data section Scaling Driv
253. ent ABB Drives Profile FBA STATUS WORD Bit mame wale Correspond to AN arai the state diagram 0 RDY ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON 0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON 1 RDY RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE 0 OFF1 ACTIVE 2 RDY REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED 0 OPERATION INHIBITED 3 TRIPPED 0 1 FAULT 0 No fault 4 OFF 2 STA 1 OFF2 inactive 0 OFF2 ACTIVE 5 OFF 3 STA 1 OFF3 inactive 0 OFF3 ACTIVE 6 SWC ON INHIB 1 SWITCH ON INHIBIT ACTIVE 0 SWITCH ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE 7 ALARM 1 Warning alarm See Alarm Listing in the Diagnostics section for details on alarms 0 No warning alarm 8 AT SETPOINT 1 OPERATING Actual value equals within tolerance limits the reference value 0 Actual value is outside tolerance limits not equal to reference value 9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 0 Drive control location LOCAL 10 ABOVE LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter s value 5 supervision high limit Bit remains 1 until supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit See group 32 Supervision 0 Supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit Bit remains O until supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit See group 32 Supervision 11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location 2 EXT2 selected 0 External control location 1 EX11 selected 12 EXT RUN ENABLE 1 External Run Enable signal received 0 No External Run Enable signal re
254. er on page 23 Apply Power on page 25 Start Up on page 26 Installation 8 ACH550 UH User s Manual Preparing for Installation Lifting the Drive R1 R6 Lift the drive only by the metal chassis IP2040 R7 R8 Ba A Warning Handle and ship floor mounted enclosures only in the upright position These units are not designed to be laid on their backs m 1 Use a pallet truck to move the transport package E enclosure to the installation site pa PC00005 2 Remove the cabinet side panels for access to the cabinet pallet mounting bolts 6 torx screws hold each cabinet side panel in place Leave the side panels off until later 2 3 Remove the 4 bolts that secure the cabinet to the shipping pallet A Warning Use the lifting lugs bars at the top of the unit to lift R7 R8 drives 4 Use a hoist to lift the drive Do not place drive in final position until mounting site is prepared Unpack the Drive iS 1 Unpack the drive 2 Check for any damage and notify the shipper immediately if damaged components are found 3 Check the contents against the order and the shipping seme label to verify that all parts have been received Installation ACH550 UH User s Manual 9 Drive Identification Drive Labels To determine the type of drive you are installing refer to either so Serial number label attached on upper part of TA POST TG the chokeplate between
255. er 9902 to 31 LOAD FD SET 0 DEFAULT Complete long and short parameter lists are shown 1 FLASHDROP FlashDrop parameter list is shown Does not include short parameter list Parameters that are hidden by the FlashDrop device are not visible Start Up 92 Group 17 Override ACH550 UH User s Manual This group defines the source for the override activation signal the override speed frequency and pass code and how the override is enabled and disabled When override DI is activated the drive stops and then accelerates to the preset speed or frequency When the DI is deactivated the drive stops and reboots If the start command run enable and start enables are active in the AUTO mode the drive starts automatically and continues normally after override mode In the HAND mode the drive returns to OFF mode When override is active Drive runs at preset speed Drive ignores all keypad commands Drive ignores all commands from communication links Drive ignores all digital inputs except override activation deactivation RUN ENABLE and START ENABLE Drive displays alarm message 2020 OVERRIDE MODE The following faults are ignored 3 DEVICE OVERTEMP 5 OVERLOAD 6 DC UNDERVOLT 7 Al1 LOSS 8 Al2 LOSS 9 MOTOR TEMP 10 PANEL LOSS 12 MOTOR STALL 14 EXTERNAL FLT 1 15 EXTERNAL FLT 2 17 UNDERLOAD 18 THERM FAIL 21 CURR MEAS 22 SU
256. er Devices Standard embedded fieldbus EFB at E E terminals X1 28 32 Fieldbus adapter FBA module mounted in slot 2 option Rxxx Two basic serial communications configurations are available e Embedded fieldbus EFB See Embedded Fieldbus on page 158 Fieldbus adapter FBA With one of the optional FBA modules in the drive s expansion slot 2 the drive can communicate to a control system using one of the following protocols Profibus DP LonWorks CANopen DeviceNet ControlNet Ethernet The ACH550 detects automatically which communication protocol is used by the plug in fieldbus adapter The default settings for each protocol assume that the profile used is the protocol s industry standard drive profile e g PROFldrive for PROFIBUS AC DC Drive for DeviceNet All of the FBA protocols can also be configured for the ABB Drives profile Configuration details depend on the protocol and profile used These details are provided in a user s manual supplied with the FBA module Fieldbus Adapter ACH550 UH User s Manual 229 Details for the ABB Drives profile which apply for all protocols are provided in ABB Drives Profile Technical Data on page 238 Control Interface In general the basic control intertace between the fieldbus system and the drive consists of e Output Words CONTROL WORD REFERENCE
257. er connection terminals U1 V1 W1 Frame U2 V2 W2 Earthing PE Terminal Size BRK UDC Terminals Min Wire Size Max Wire Size Torque Max Wire Size Torque mm AWG mm AWG Nm lb ft mm AWG Nm lb ft RiNotet 9 75 18 16 6 1 3 1 16 6 13 1 RaNote1 0 75 18 16 6 1 3 1 16 6 13 1 RaNote1 25 14 25 3 2 7 2 25 3 2 7 R4Note1 10 8 50 1 0 5 6 4 50 1 0 5 6 R5 16 6 70 2 0 15 11 70 2 0 15 11 R6 g5Note2 3 0 185 350 MCM 40 30 185 350MCM 40 30 R7 16 6 185 350 MCM 40 30 Attach appropriate ring lugs to R8 16 6 2x240 2x500 MCM 57 42 e a ba 1 Do not use aluminum cable with frame sizes R1 R4 2 See the following section for smaller wire sizes on frame size R6 Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size A Ring Lugs Warning For R6 power terminals if compression lugs are supplied they can only be used for wire sizes that are 95 mm 3 0 AWG or larger Smaller wires will loosen and may damage the drive and require ring lugs as described below 2 3 On the R6 frame size if the cable size used is less than 95 mm 3 0 AWG or if no compression lugs are supplied use ring lugs according to the following procedure Select appropriate ring lugs from the following table Attach the supplied terminal lugs to the drive end of the cables Isolate the ends of the ring lugs with insulating tape or shrink tubing Technical Data
258. er reference value and actual value Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4006 4106 amp 4007 4107 0133 PID 2 DEVIATION The difference between the PID 2 controller reference value and actual value e Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4206 8 4207 0134 COMM RO WORD 0 65535 0 Free data location that can be written from serial link Used for relay output control e See parameter 1401 0135 COMM VALUE 1 32768 32767 0 Free data location that can be written from serial link 0136 COMM VALUE 2 32768 32767 0 Free data location that can be written from serial link 0137 PROCESS VAR 1 Process variable 1 Defined by parameters in Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables 0138 PROCESS VAR 2 Process variable 2 Defined by parameters in Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables 0139 PROCESS VAR 3 Process variable 3 Defined by parameters in Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables 0140 IRUN TIME 0 499 99 kh 0 kh The drive s accumulated running time in thousands of hours kh 0141 MWH COUNTER 0 65 535 MWh The drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours Can not be reset 0142 REVOLUTION CNTR 0 9999 0 The motor s accumulated revolutions in millions of revolutions 0143 DRIVE ON TIME HI 0 65535 days 0 The drive s accumulated power on time in days 0144 DRIVE ON TIME LO 0 43200hh mm ss 0 The drive s accumulated power on time in 2 second ticks 30 ticks 60 s
259. erence scaling 00 ee eeee 246 technical data 2200005 246 gand kite ino ives ine ees Baas whey oat 5 ground cable wire requirements 274 ground fault protection 279 QFOUNCING s o2 sone Yet eased antes haw eure 279 H heatloss asiaani i a a ee 287 heatsink maintenance interval 258 maintenance procedure 258 l id run fail fault code 0 250 IEC ratings see ratings impedance grounded network see floating network incomp swtype fault code 252 information parameter group 115 input power branch circuit protection 270 cable wire requirements 273 TUSES DAA Ha cata Haase NG BRA AN 270 specifications Aa 270 Index ACH550 UH User s Manual input power connection floating networks VOSTO RO a ma AKALA eles 276 terminal size a 276 I K0 e NAA APA AA 276 installation compatibility e sa aT 0 000000 eee 10 environment 000 e eee eee 10 TOW Chart Had pa Ea E altho hada gay 7 lOCALION HaHa ne Kdrama Gee athaln ces 11 preparation 0 0 00 ee 8 procedures 00 eee eee es 7 T001 a eit fe nana Ha Gak mak NE NEL ae Ga 10 insulation CHECK wa iab nahh Bidet a She dad 19 integration time PID parameter 130 integration time parameter 102 interlocks Parameter ieee LA
260. et protocol via the RS485 serial link X1 communications terminal Start Up 158 ACH550 UH User s Manual Embedded Fieldbus Overview The ACH550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard serial communication protocols When using serial communication the ACH550 can either Receive all of its control information from the fieldbus or Be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available control locations such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel Fieldbus Controller Fieldbus Other Devices Connect using either Standard embedded fieldbus EFB at H H terminals X1 28 32 IA Al Fieldbus adapter FBA module mounted in slot 2 option Rxxx Two basic serial communications configurations are available e Embedded fieldbus EFB Using the RS485 interface at terminals X1 28 32 on the control board a control system can communicate with the drive using the Modbus protocol For protocol and profile descriptions see Modbus Protocol Technical Data ABB Control Profiles Technical Data etc starting on page 174 Modbus Metasys N2 APOGEE FLN BACnet e Fieldbus adapter FBA See Fieldbus Adapter on page 228 Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual Control Interface Pl
261. external fault is active See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 15 EXTERNAL FLT 2 Digital input defined to report second external fault is active See parameter 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 Diagnostics ACH550 UH User s Manual 251 Fault Fault Name In Pee 3 Code Panel Description and Recommended Corrective Action 16 EARTH FAULT Possible ground fault detected in the motor or motor cables The drive monitors for ground faults while the drive is running and while the drive is not running Detection is more sensitive when the drive is not running and can produce false positives Possible corrections e Check for correct faults in the input wiring e Verify that motor cable does not exceed maximum specified length A delta grounded input power supply and motor cables with high capacitance may result in erroneous error reports during non running tests To disable response to fault monitoring when the drive is not running use parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT To disable response to all ground fault monitoring use parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT 17 UNDERLOAD Motor load is lower than expected Check for and correct e Disconnected load e Parameters 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNCTION 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE 18 THERM FAIL Internal fault The thermistor measuring the internal temperature of the drive is open or shorted Contact your local ABB sales representative 19 OPEX LINK Internal
262. f Digital ON OFF R Input 6 Note For Present Value Access Types R Read only W Writeable C Commandable Commandable values support priority arrays amp relinquish defaults Binary Output Object Instance Summary The following table summarizes the Binary Output Objects supported Instance a PRE Active Present Value ID Object Name Description Inactive Text Access Type BOO RO1 COMMAND This object controls the output state ON OFF C of Relay 1 This control requires that parameter 1401 value COMM BO1 RO2 COMMAND This object controls the output state ON OFF C of Relay 2 This control requires that parameter 1402 value COMM BO2 RO3 COMMAND This object controls the output state ON OFF C of Relay 3 This control requires that parameter 1403 value COMM Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 221 of Relay 6 This control requires that parameter 1412 value COMM also requires OREL 01 option Instance or Active Present Value ID Object Name Description Inactive Text Access Type BO3 RO4 COMMAND This object controls the output state ON OFF C of Relay 4 This control requires that parameter 1410 value COMM also requires OREL 01 option BO4 RO5 COMMAND This object controls the output state ON OFF C of Relay 5 This control requires that parameter 1411 value COMM also requires OREL 01 option BO5 RO6 COMMAND
263. fault A communication related problem has been detected on the fiber optic link between the OITF and OINT boards Contact your local ABB sales representative 20 OPEX PWR Internal fault Low voltage condition detected on OINT power supply Contact your local ABB sales representative 21 CURR MEAS Internal fault Current measurement is out of range Contact your local ABB sales representative 22 SUPPLY PHASE Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high Check for and correct e Missing mains phase Blown fuse 23 ENCODER ERR Not used Available only with encoder and parameter group 50 23 ENCODER ERR The drive is not detecting a valid encoder signal Check for and correct e Encoder presence and proper connection reverse wired loose connection or short circuit Voltage logic levels are outside of the specified range A working and properly connected Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC 01 e Wrong value entered in parameter 5001 PULSE NR A wrong value will only be detected if the error is such that the calculated slip is greater than 4 times the rated slip of the motor Encoder is not being used but parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 1 ENABLED 24 OVERSPEED Motor speed is greater than 120 of the larger in magnitude of 2001 MINIMUM SPEED or 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED Check for and correct e Parameter settings for 2001 and 2002 e Adequacy of motor braking torque e Applicability of torque control e Brake chopper and
264. ference source 9 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 10 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 11 DIJU 4D RNC Same as DI3U 4D R above except that e Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 12 DIJU 4D NC Same as DI3U 4D above except that e Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 13 DI5U 6D NC Same as DI3U 4D above except that e Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 14 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 15 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 a11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 16 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 17 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below Start Up
265. from dangerous potential Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual Input Power Cables Wiring Input wiring can be either 273 A four conductor cable three phases and ground protective earth routed through conduit e Four insulated conductors routed through conduit Size wiring according to local safety regulations appropriate input voltage and the drive s load current In any case the conductor must be less than the maximum limit defined by the terminal size see Drive s Power Connection Terminals on page 276 The table below lists copper and aluminum cable types for different load currents These recommendations apply only for the conditions listed at the top of the table IEC NEC Based on Based on e EN 60204 1 and IEC 60364 5 2 2001 e NEC Table 310 16 for copper wires e PVC insulation e 90 C 194 F wire insulation 30 C 86 F ambient temperature e 40 C 104 F ambient temperature 70 C 158 F surface temperature e Not more than three current carrying e Cables with concentric copper shield conductors in raceway or cable or earth Not more than nine cables laid on cable ladder hate ay runea A r j side by side Copper cables with concentric copper shield boat Gu able Load AlCable Max Load Cu Wire Size Current mm Current mm a AWG kemil A A
266. g plate Sets the maximum drive output voltage supplied to the motor P 9905F e The ACH550 cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater than the mains voltage Output frequency P 9907 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 0 15 lon 1 5 lon 0 1A 1 5 lon v Defines the nominal motor current e Must equal the value on the motor rating plate e Range allowed 0 2 2 0 Iy where In is drive current 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 10 0 500 Hz 0 1 Hz 60 Hz US v Defines the nominal motor frequency e Range 10 500 Hz typically 50 or 60 Hz e Sets the frequency at which output voltage equals the MOTOR NOM VOLT e Field weakening point Norm freq Supply Volt Mot Nom Volt 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 50 30000 rpm 1 rpm Size dependent y Defines the nominal motor speed e Must equal the value on the motor rating plate 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER 0 15 1 5 PN 0 1 Hp 0 2 HP US v Defines the nominal motor power e Must equal the value on the motor rating plate 9910 MOTOR ID RUN 0 1 1 0 v This parameter controls a self calibration process called the Motor ID Run During this process the drive operates the motor and makes measurements in order to identify motor characteristics and create a model used for internal calculations An ID Run is especially effective when e Operation point is near zero speed e Operation requires a torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback i e without
267. h the standard display mode press EXIT until the LCD display shows status information as described below Status Information Top The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive e HAND Indicates that the drive control is local that is from the control panel e AUTO Indicates that the drive control is remote such as the basic I O X1 or fieldbus e Indicates the drive and motor rotation status as follows Control panel display Significance Rotating arrow clockwise or e Drive is running and at setpoint counterclockwise e Shaft direction is forward or reverse Rotating dotted arrow blinking Drive is running but not at setpoint Stationary dotted arrow Start command is present but motor is not running E g start enable is missing Upper right shows the active reference Middle Using parameter group 34 the middle of the LCD display can be configured to display e One to three parameter values The default display shows parameters 0103 OUTPUT FREQ in percentages 0104 CURRENT in amperes and 0120 Al1 in milliamperes Use parameters 3401 3408 and 3415 to select the parameters from Group 01 to display Entering parameter 0100 results in no parameter displayed For example if 3401 0100 and 3415 0100 then only the parameter Start Up 32 ACH550 UH User s Manual specified by 3408 appears in the Control Panel display You
268. hange the value of the parameter 1602 once e This entry reverts back to 0 automatically 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 6 8 1 0 Selects the source for the fault reset signal The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists 0 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the only fault reset source e Fault reset is always possible with control panel 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as a fault reset source e Activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source e See DI1 above 7 START STOP Defines the Stop command as a fault reset source Do not use this option when fielbus communication provides the start stop and direction commands 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as a fault reset source The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The bit 4 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 resets the drive 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a fault reset source e De activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source e See DI1 INV above Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 89 Group 16 System Controls Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1605 USER PAR SET CHG 6 6 1 0 Defines control for changing the user parameter set See parameter 9902 A
269. he EMC requirements and for proper operation of the module 7 X00301 3 Open the appropriate knockout in the conduit box and install the cable clamp for the network cable Do likas 4 Route the network cable through the cable clamp e mmnm paan 5 Connect the network cable to the module s network connector 6 Tighten the cable clamp 7 Install the conduit box cover 1 screw 8 For configuration information see the following X00302 e Communication Set up FBA below e Activate Drive Control Functions FBA on page 232 e The protocol specific documentation provided with the module Fieldbus Adapter 232 ACH550 UH User s Manual Communication Set up FBA Serial Communication Selection To activate the serial communication use parameter 9802 COMM PROTOCOL SEL Set 9802 4 EXT FBA Serial Communication Configuration Setting 9802 together with mounting a particular FBA module automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined in the user s manual supplied with the FBA module e Parameter 5101 is automatically configured Parameters 5102 5126 are protocol dependent and define for example the profile used and additional I O words These parameters are referred to as the fieldbus configuration parameters See the user s manual provided with the FBA module for details on the fieldbus configura
270. he default Defines the data length parity Protocolis value for this parameter is 0 and stop bits tobe used with selected Seis MS TP character the RS485 link communication the default format i value for i The same settings must be this used in all on line stations parameter 0 8N1 8 data bits No parity is 1 one stop bit 1 8N2 8 data bits No parity two stop bits 2 8E1 8 data bits Even parity one stop bit 3 801 8 data bits Odd parity one stop bit 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE When this N A When this protocol is selected the Selects the communication protocolis default value for this parameter is 0 profile used by the EFB selected Changing the value for this parameter has no protocol the default affect on this protocol s behavior value for 0 ABB DRV LIM Operation of this Control Status Words conform to ABB Drives Ha kata Profile as used in ACH400 i 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conform to 32 bit DCU Profile 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conform to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACH600 800 5310 EFB PAR10 Not used Sets them response turnaround time in for Comm milliseconds When this protocol is selected setup the default value is 3 msec 0 msec 5 msec 5311 EFB PAR11 Not used for Comm setup This parameter together with parameter 5317 EFB PAR 17 sets BACnet instance IDs e For the range 1 to 65 535 This para
271. he drive displays a fault 14 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input e See DI INV above 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 6 6 1 0 Defines the External Fault 2 signal input and the drive response to an external fault See parameter 3003 above 3005 MOT THERM PROT 0 2 1 1 Defines the drive response to motor overheating 0 NOT SEL No response and or motor thermal protection not set up 1 FAULT When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C displays a warning 2010 MOT OVERTEMP When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 110 C displays a fault 9 MOT OVERTEMP and the drive coasts to stop 2 WARNING When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C displays a warning 2010 MOT OVERTEMP Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 109 Group 30 Fault Functions Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3006 IMOT THERM TIME 256 9999 s 1 1050 s Sets the motor thermal time constant for the motor temperature Motor load model e This is the time required for the motor to reach 63 of the final temperature with steady load t e For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA ak class motors use the rule of thumb MOTOR THERM TIME equals Temp Rise4 i 35 times t6 where t6 in seconds is specified by the motor 100 ins manufacturer as the time that the m
272. he drive state to READY TO SWITCH ON 2 Wait at least 100 ms before proceeding CW 0000 0000 0000 0111 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO OPERATE 4 CW 0000 0000 0000 1111 This CW value changes the drive state to OPERATION ENABLED The drive starts but will not accelerate 5 CW 0000 0000 0010 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG output and changes the drive state to RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED 6 CW 0000 0000 0110 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG output and changes the drive state to OPERATING The drive accelerates to the given reference and follows the reference Embedded Fieldbus 190 ACH550 UH User s Manual The state diagram below describes the start stop function of CONTROL WORD CW and STATUS WORD SW bits for the ABB Drives profile From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit1 0 OFF3 SW Bi5 0 sw Bit4 0 sw Bi3 1 E f 0 l 0 CW Bit7 1 V gt From any state V SWITCH ON f 0 I0 Power ON CW Bit0 0 gt A CD NOT READY ae TO SWITCH On SW Bito 0 CW Bit3 0 CW XXXX XXXX XXXX X110 OPERATION READY TO NN SW Bit2 0 INHIBITED switcHon 1 SW Bito 1 CW xxxx XXXX XXXX X111 LS C D R n0110 Lowen CW Bit5 0 CW Bit3 1 and SW Bit12 1 V OPERATION D ENABLED SW Bit2 1
273. he first underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 Defines the torque value of the first overload curve definition point 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 Defines the frequency value of the second curve definition point Must be smaller than 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 Defines the torque value of the second underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 Defines the torque value of the second overload curve definition point 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 Defines the frequency value of the third load curve definition point 3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 Defines the torque value of the third underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 Defines the torque value of the third overload curve definition point 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 Defines the frequency value of the fourth load curve definition point 3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 Defines the torque value of the fourth underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 127 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 Defines the torque overvalue of the fourth load curve definition point 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 Defines the frequency value of fifth load curve definition point 3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 Defines the torque value of the fifth un
274. he reference range Doing so means EXT REF 1 MIN that if the control signal is lost which is a O V input the result is full reverse operation Instead use the following set up so that loss of the analog input EXT REF 1 MAX triggers a fault stopping the drive 2V 4 mA e Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 1304 MINIMUM Al2 at OV OmA 20 2 V or 4 mA EXT REF 1 MIN e Set parameter 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT to a value 5 or higher EXT REF 1 MIN e Set parameter 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION to 1 FAULT Hysteresis 4 of Full Scale 4 Al2 JoYsT Defines analog input 2 Al2 configured for joystick operation as the reference source e See above Al1 JOYST description 5 DIJU 4D R Defines digital inputs as the speed reference source motor potentiometer control e Digital input DI3 increases the speed the u stands for up Digital input D14 decreases the speed the D stands for down e A Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset e Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change 6 DI3U 4D Same as above DI3U 4D R except A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored When the drive restarts the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference 7 DI5U 6D Same as above DI3u 4D except that DI5 and DI6 are the digital inputs used 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as the re
275. hey can all be supported simultaneously Does the BBMD support registrations by O Yes Foreign Devices O No ANSI X3 4 Character Sets Supported O IBM Microsoft DBCS O ISO 8859 1 O ISO 10646 UCS 2 O ISO 10646 UCS 4 O JIS C 6226 If this product is a communication gateway describe the types of non BACnet equipment network s that the gateway supports Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 219 BACnet Object Definitions Object Property Support Matrix The following table summarizes the Object Types Properties Supported Object Type Property Device Binary Binary Binary Analog Analog Analog Input Output Value Input Output Value v v v v v v Object Identifier Object Name v v v v v Object Type v v v v v System Status Vendor Name Vendor Identifier Model Name Firmware Revision Appl Software Revision Protocol Version Protocol Revision Services Supported Object Types Supported Object List Max APDU Length Segmeniation Support APDU Timeout Number APDU Retries Max Master Max Info Frames Device Address Binding If Nf Sf Sf Sf Sf Sf Sf Sf Nf Nf Nf Sf Sf Sf Sf Sf Sf Sf SSNS Database Revision Present Value Status Flags Event State SESE SES Le A Bl Rl oR Out of Service Units ICU EN Ko Priority Array AP AT sf sf sf SES
276. ic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset e Automatically resets the fault DC UNDERVOLTAGE after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3107 AR Al lt MIN 0 1 1 0 Sets the automatic reset for the analog input less than minimum value function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset e Automatically resets the fault Al lt MIN after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Warning When the analog input signal is restored the drive may restart even after a long stop Make sure that automatic long delayed starts will not cause physical injury and or damage equipment 3108 AR EXTERNAL FLT 0 1 1 0 Sets the automatic reset for external faults function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset e Automatically resets the fault EXTERNAL FAULT 1 Or EXTERNAL FAULT 2 after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 113 Group 32 Supervision This group defines supervision for up to three signals from Group 01 Operating Data Supervision monitors a specified parameter and energizes a relay output if the parameter passes a defined limit Use Group 14 Relay Outputs to define the relay and whether the relay activates when the signal is too low or too high Gro
277. ign the cover and slide it on 2 Tighten the captive screws around the edge of the cover 3 R1 R4 Slide the hood down over the top of the cover 4 R1 R4 Install the two screws that attach the hood 5 Re install the control panel KI Note The control panel window must be closed to comply with UL type 12 6 Optional Add a lock not supplied to secure the control panel window R7 R8 Covers A 1 If side panels were removed and not remounted aala mount them now Each panel requires 6 torx 1 1 screws 2 Re mount all high voltage shields 3 Close all internal swing out panels and secure in place with the quarter turn screws 4 Close the cabinet door and secure in place with J the quarter turn screws WIA SY R70020 Installation ACH550 UH User s Manual 25 Apply Power Always re install the covers before turning power on A Warning The ACH550 will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on 1 Apply input power When power is applied to the ACH550 the green LED comes on Note Before increasing motor speed check that the motor is running in the desired direction To change rotation direction switch motor leads as shown below Drive QU1 OVI O W1 QGND QU2 0V20QW2 To change rotation direction switch motor leads
278. ignments are defined in the following table and depend on The number of PFA relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFA Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 151 Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DIT Speed Reg Motor Not allowed DI2 DI6 Free 1 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFA Relay DI2 First PFA Relay DI2 DI6 Free DI3 DI6 Free 2 DIT Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFA Relay DI2 First PFA Relay DI2 Second PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay DI3 DI6 Free DI4 DI6 Free 3 DIT Speed Reg Motor DIT First PFA Relay DI2 First PFA Relay DI2 Second PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay DI3 Third PFA Relay DI4 Third PFA Relay DI4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 4 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFA Relay DI2 First PFA Relay DI2 Second PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay DI3 Third PFA Relay DI4 Third PFA Relay DI4 Fourth PFA Relay DI5 Fourth PFA Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 5 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFA Relay DI2 First PFA Relay DI2 Second PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay DI3 Third PFA Relay DI4 Third PFA Relay DI4 Fourth PFA Relay DI5 Fourth PFA Relay DI5 Fifth PFA Relay DI6 Fifth PFA Relay DI6 Free 6 Not allowed DI1 First PFA Relay DI2 Second PFA Re
279. ilowatt power ratings apply to most IEC 4 pole motors The Horsepower ratings apply to most 4 pole NEMA motors Sizing The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range To achieve the rated motor power given in the table the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current Note 1 The ratings apply in ambient temperature of 40 C 104 PF Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual 269 Derating The load capacity current and power decreases for certain situations as defined below In such situations where full motor power is required oversize the drive so that the derated value provides sufficient capacity For example if your application requires 15 4 A of motor current and a 12 kHz switching frequency calculate the appropriate drive size requirement as follows The minimum size required 15 4 A 0 80 19 25 A Where 0 80 is the derating for 12 kHz switching frequency see Switching Frequency Derating below Referring to lon in the ratings tables page 266 the following drives exceed the lon requirement of 19 25 A ACH550 UH 023A 4 or ACH550 UH 024A 2 Temperature Derating In the temperature range 40 C 50 C 104 F 122 F the rated output current is decreased 1 for every 1 C 1 8 F above 40 C 104 F Calculate the output current by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor
280. ime PID parameter 130 derivation time parameter 102 device overtemperature faultcode 249 device type N2 0 0 e eee eee eee 196 CIAQGNOSUCS Ga at ve he date a ee eh eae 248 EFB comm 000000e eee 171 FBA COMM e255 eric e KANA KG 236 differences list downloads 39 digital cable requirements 0c eee ee eee 285 digital input at fault history parameters 71 connections eae 286 specifications a 284 status data parameter 64 digital output connections ee aee 286 specifications AEEA TR 284 dimensions mounting a NAG a KA ate eae 2S 290 outside enclosure 000 292 direction control parameter 5 73 display format PID parameter 130 download TANURE vient min Sa Ga haaha Bake 40 handling inexact transfers 39 parameter sets a 37 drive control terminal descriptions 286 device type N2 196 EFB comm installation 160 fan replacement a 59 FBA module installation 231 id fault code 2 0 cee eee ee 51 identification 9 proper lifting 0 ee eee eee 8 rating parameter 004 115 temperature data parameter 63 We19 NE sic ato toa htt Bhai nala 291 drive on time data parameters 65
281. imit parameter 8112 8113 or 8114 for this time period before the auxiliary motor stops e See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation Start Up 148 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 8117 NR OF AUX MOT 0 3 1 1 v Sets the number of auxiliary motors e Each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals e The Autochange function if used requires an additional relay output for the speed regulated motor The following describes the set up of the required relay outputs Relay Outputs As noted above each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and relays e The ACH550 provides relay outputs RO1 RO3 e An external digital output module can be added to provide relay outputs RO4 RO6 e Parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 define respectively how relays RO1 RO6 are used the parameter value 31 PFA defines the relay as used for PFA e The ACH550 assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending order If the Autochange function is disabled the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 PFA and so on If the Autochange function is used the assignments rotate Initially the soeed regulated motor is the one connected to the first relay with a p
282. in the trial time the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains stopped Trial time e Starting then requires a successful reset performed from the control r a Time panel or from a source selected by 1604 FAULT RESET SEL x XA g Example Three faults have occurred in the trial time The last is reset x Automatic reset only if the value for 3101 NR OF TRIALS is 3 or more 3102 TRIAL TIME 1 0 600 0 s 0 1s 30 0s Sets the time period used for counting and limiting the number of resets See 3101 NR OF TRIALS 3103 DELAY TIME 0 0 120 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Sets the delay time between a fault detection and attempted drive restart e If DELAY TIME zero the drive resets immediately 3104 AR OVERCURRENT 0 1 1 0 Sets the automatic reset for the overcurrent function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset e Automatically resets the fault OVERCURRENT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE 0 1 1 0 Sets the automatic reset for the overvoltage function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset e Automatically resets the fault DC OVERVOLT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE 0 1 1 0 Sets the automatic reset for the undervoltage function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automat
283. increases first one constant speed pump operates then the second As flow increases the pressure at the output end of the pipe drops relative to the pressure measured at the input end As auxiliary motors step in to increase the flow the adjustments below correct the reference to more closely match the output pressure When the first auxiliary pump operates increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 When both auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 reference step 1 parameter 8104 reference step 2 When three auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 Start Up 146 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference e Applies only when at least two auxiliary constant speed motors are running e See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP1 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference e Applies only when at least three auxiliary constant speed motors are running e See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP1 8109 START FREQ 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 60 0 US Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor starts if e No auxiliar
284. ine This section describes the use of the N2 Fieldbus with the ACH550 drives connection and does not describe the protocol in detail Supported Features In the N2 Fieldbus protocol the ACH550 drive appears as a virtual object Kag AE AA eae Melasys Analog Inputs Binary Inputs Virtual Object ACH550 Analog Outputs C p Binary Outputs p Note Metasys inputs are drive outputs and drive inputs are Metasys outputs a l l l l l l l l al Internal values Float Integer Byte j A virtual object is made up of e Analog Inputs e Binary Inputs e Analog Outputs e Binary Outputs e Internal values for Floating point Integer and Byte values The ACH550 drive does not support N2 Fieldbus communication internal values All of the Analog and Binary I O objects are listed below starting with N2 Analog Input Objects on page 196 Analog Input The analog input objects support the following features e Analog Input actual value in engineering units e Low Alarm limit Low Warning limit e High Warning limit e High Alarm limit e Differential value for the hysteresis of the Alarms and Warnings Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 195 Change of State COS enabled Alarm Enabled Warning Enabled Override value is received but there is no action taken Binary Input The binary input objects support the following features Binary Input actual value Normal Alarm state spe
285. ines the control for the PID sleep function 0 NOT SEL Disables the PID sleep control function 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function e Activating the digital input activates the sleep function e De activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function e See DI1 above 7 INTERNAL Defines the output rpm frequency process reference and process actual value as the control for the PID sleep function Refer to parameters 4025 WAKE UP DEV and 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function e De activating the digital input activates the sleep function e Activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function e See DI1 INV above Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 135 Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0 0 120 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 7200 rpm 1 rpm Sets the motor speed frequency that enables the PID sleep function a motor speed frequency below this level for at least the time period 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY enables the PID sleep function stopping the driv
286. ing 6 DECELERATE 1 Drive is decelerating 0 Drive is not decelerating 7 AT SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint 0 Drive has not reached setpoint 8 LIMIT 1 Operation is limited by Group 20 settings 0 Operation is within Group 20 settings 9 SUPERVISION 1 A supervised parameter Group 32 is outside its limits 0 All supervised parameters are within limits 10 REV REF 1 Drive reference is in reverse direction 0 Drive reference is in forward direction 11 REV ACT 1 Drive is running in reverse direction 0 Drive is running in forward direction 12 PANEL LOCAL 1 Control is in control panel or PC tool local mode 0 Control is not in control panel local mode 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL 1 Control is in fieldbus local mode steals control panel local 0 Control is not in fieldbus local mode 14 EXT2 ACT 1 Control is in EXT2 mode 0 Control is in EXT1 mode 15 FAULT Drive is in a fault state 0 Drive is not in a fault state Embedded Fieldbus 188 ACH550 UH User s Manual DCU Profile STATUS WORD See Parameter 0304 Bit Name Value Status 16 ALARM 1 An alarm is on 0 No alarms are on 17 REQ MAINT 1 A maintenance request is pending 0 No maintenance request is pending 18 DIRLOCK 1 Direction lock is ON Direction change is locked out 0 Direction lock is OFF 19 LOCALLOCK 1 Local mode lock is ON Local mode is locked out 0 Local mode l
287. internal control functionality Embedded Fieldbus 214 ACH550 UH User s Manual FLN Detailed Point Descriptions aii Drive Point Description Parameter 69 FLN LOC REF Commanded by FLN to temporarily steal input reference control of the drive from its normal source and place it under FLN control This functionality is analogous to placing the drive in HAND mode at the panel with the reference control being taken by FLN instead HAND mode at the panel has priority over this point Thus this point is only effective in temporarily taking control from the analog inputs or some other internal control functionality 70 DI 1 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 1 1 ON 0 OFF 0118 bit 2 71 DI2 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 2 1 ON 0 OFF 0118 bit 1 72 DI3 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 3 1 ON 0 OFF 0118 bit O 73 DI4 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 4 1 ON 0 OFF 0119 bit 2 74 DI5 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 5 1 ON 0 OFF 0119 bit 1 75 DI 6 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 6 1 ON O OFF 0119 bit 0 76 RO1 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Relay Output 1 1 ON 0 OFF 0122 bit 2 77 RO 2 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Relay Output 2 1 ON 0 OFF 0122 bit 1 78 RO 3 ACTUAL Indicate
288. is value may be reset by commanding FLN point 49 RESET KWH 11 DRIVE MWH The drive s cumulative power consumption in megawatt 0141 hours This value cannot be reset 12 RUN TIME The drive s cumulative run time in hours This value maybe 0114 reset by commanding FLN point 48 RESET RUN TIME 13 DC BUS VOLT The DC bus voltage level of the drive 0107 14 OUTPUT VOLT The AC output voltage applied to the motor 0109 15 PRC PID FBCK The Process PID feedback signal 0130 16 PRC PID DEV The deviation of the Process PID output signal from its 0132 setpoint 17 MOTOR TEMP The measured motor temperature as set up in Group 35 0145 18 ROTATION CNT The motor s cumulative revolution count in mega 0142 revolutions 19 N A 20 OVRD TIME 1 of the 5 mandatory FLN points required for compatibility None with Siemens control systems It has no functionality in the drive application Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 211 FLN Detailed Point Descriptions Point Description Drive Parameter 21 FWD REV ACT Indicates the rotational direction of the motor regardless of control source 1 REV 0 FWD 22 FWD REV CMD Commanded by FLN to change the rotational direction of the drive e Parameter 1001 must be set to COMM for FLN to control the direction of the motor by EXT1 e Parameter 1002 must be set to COMM for FLN to control the direction of the motor by EXT2 23 RUN STOP
289. ivated START Timer de activated STOP See Group 36 Timer Functions 12 14 TIMER 2 4 Assigns Start Stop control to Timer 2 4 See Timer Function 1 above 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 14 1 1 v Defines external control location 2 EXT2 the configuration of start stop and direction commands e See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS above 1003 DIRECTION 1 3 1 1 y Defines the control of motor rotation direction 1 FORWARD Rotation is fixed in the forward direction 2 REVERSE Rotation is fixed in the reverse direction 3 REQUEST Rotation direction can be changed on command Start Up 74 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 11 Reference Select This group defines How the drive selects between command sources e Characteristics and sources for REF1 and REF2 iPanel REF1 pir ats al ngat Gays 2a REFI P1101 Panel REF 2 P1106 REF1 PANEL l l i PID1 OUT 0 17 P1107 REF2 Hand Auto Selection REF2 119 P1108 gas hy Na NG IE AN HAND iPanel REF 1 a ee AUTO DI P1103 Ip3494 P1102 l l Al P1105 EXT 1 ee EAT I JEXT 2 iPanel Ref 2 7 tt Pee 1 _ P1106 aya P1108 DA cna 0 17 P1107 i AH pse P1108 l EXT2 19 Group 11 Reference Select Code Description Range Resolution Defa
290. l display shows a fault code and text See Diagnostics starting on page 248 for a complete description Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT 0402 PREVIOUS FAULT1 and 0403 PREVIOUS FAULT2 store the most recent faults For fieldbus access the drive reports faults as a hexadecimal value assigned and coded according to the DRIVECOM specification See table below Not all profiles support requesting fault codes using this specification For profiles that support this specification the profile documentation defines the proper fault request process Drive Fault Code DRIVECOM fan 1 OVERCURRENT 2310h 2 DC OVERVOLT 3210h 3 DEV OVERTEMP 4210h 4 SHORT CIRC 2340h 5 Reserved FF6Bh 6 DC UNDERVOLT 3220h 7 Al1 LOSS 8110h 8 Al2 LOSS 8110h 9 MOT TEMP 4310h 10 PANEL LOSS 5300h 11 ID RUN FAIL FF84h 12 MOTOR STALL 7121h 14 EXTERNAL FLT 1 9000h 15 EXTERNAL FLT 2 9001h 16 EARTH FAULT 2330h 17 UNDERLOAD FF6Ah 18 THERM FAIL 5210h 19 OPEX LINK 7500h 20 OPEX PWR 5414h 21 CURR MEAS 2211h Fieldbus Adapter ACH550 UH User s Manual Drive Fault Code DRIVECOM eect 22 SUPPLY PHASE 3130h 23 ENCODER ERR 7301h 24 OVERSPEED 7310h 25 Reserved FF80h 26 DRIVE ID 5400h 27 CONFIG FILE 630Fh 28 SERIAL 1 ERR 7510h 29 EFB CONFIG FILE 6306h 30 FORCE TRIP FF90h 31 EFB 1
291. lay DI3 Third PFA Relay DI4 Fourth PFA Relay DI5 Fifth PFA Relay DI6 Sixth PFA Relay Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual Default S 152 Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution 2 DI2 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with D12 to the interlock signal for each PFA relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on e The number of PFA relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFA e The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 Free Not allowed DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI3 DI6 Free 1 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFA Relay DI3 First PFA Relay DI3 DI6 Free DI4 DI6 Free 2 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFA Relay DI3 First PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay DI4 Second PFA Relay DI4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 3 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFA Relay DI3 First PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay DI4 Second PFA Relay DI4 Third PFA Relay DI5 Third PFA Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 4 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFA Relay DI3 First PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay DI4 Second PFA Relay DI4 Third PFA Relay DI5 Third PFA Relay DI5 Fourth PFA Relay D16 Fou
292. lect ENTER CA 3 ww G Select a macro with the Up Down buttons and select SAVE CA 4 N 4 u Restoring Defaults To restore the factory default settings select the application macro HVAC Default Control Wiring Each macro has specific requirements for control wiring For general details about the ACH550 control wiring terminals see Control Terminal Descriptions on page 285 Specific wiring requirements are included with each macro description Start Up 46 HVAC Default ACH550 User s Manual This macro provides the factory default parameter settings for the ACH550 UH Factory defaults can be restored at any time by setting parameter 9902 to 1 The diagram below shows typical wiring using this macro When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 44 Alo SCR Signal cable shield screen O 2 Al External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC O 5 Al2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 4 20 mA Q gt Al1 0 4 20 mA on A0 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA PS P gt Al2 0 4
293. lect using 5314 select an actual value for this register 40010 Actual 6 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5315 to select using 5315 select an actual value for this register 40011 Actual 7 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5316 to select using 5316 select an actual value for this register 40012 Actual 8 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5317 to select using 5317 select an actual value for this register 40031 ACH550 CONTROL R W Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU WORD LSW profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0301 40032 ACH550 CONTROL R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU WORD MSW profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0302 40033 ACH550 STATUS R Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU WORD LSW profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0303 40034 ACH550 STATUS R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU WORD MSW profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0304 Embedded Fieldbus 180 ACH550 UH User s Manual For the Modbus protocol drive parameters in group 53 report the parameter mapping to 4xxxx Registers Code Description 5310 EFB PAR 10 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40005 5311 EFB PAR 11 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40006 5
294. llates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation Reduce GAIN 4001 until the oscillation stops Set GAIN 4001 to 0 4 to 0 6 times the above value Decrease the INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the feedback signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation Increase INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the oscillation stops Set INTEGRATION TIME 4002 to 1 15 to 1 5 times the above value If the feedback signal contains high frequency noise increase the value of Parameter 1303 FILTER Al1 or 1306 FILTER Al2 until the noise is filtered from the signal o o o o Start Up 130 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 40 Process PID Set 1 0 1 3600 0 Integration time seconds See 4001 for adjustment procedure A Error B Error value step C Controller output with Gain 1 D Controller output with Gain 10 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 60 0 s Defines the PID Controller s integration time A A Integration time is by definition is the time required to increase the output by the error value B e Error value is constant and 100 D P 4001 10 e Gain 1 e Integration time of 1 second denotes that a 100 change is C P 4001 1 achieved in 1 second 0 0 NOT SEL Disables integration I part of controller t
295. llowing from the motor ratings plate e Voltage e Nominal motor current e Nominal frequency e Nominal speed e Nominal power Edit parameters 9905 9909 to the correct values e Assistant Control Panel The Start up Assistant walks you through this data entry see page 34 e Basic Control Panel Refer to Parameters Mode on page 32 for parameter editing instructions Installation ACH550 UH User s Manual 27 Macros Note Selecting the appropriate macro should be part of the original system design since the control wiring installed depends on the macro used 1 Review the macro descriptions in Application Macros on page 44 Use the macro that best fits system needs 2 Edit parameter 9902 to select the appropriate macro Use either of the following e Use the Start up Assistant which displays the macro selection immediately after motor parameter setup Refer to Parameters Mode on page 32 for parameter editing instructions Tuning Parameters The system can benefit from one or more of the ACH550 special features and or fine tuning 1 Review the parameter descriptions in Parameter Descriptions starting on page 61 Enable options and fine tune parameter values as appropriate for the system 2 Edit parameters as appropriate Fault and Alarm Adjustments The ACH550 can detect a wide variety of potential system problems For example initial system operation may generate faults or alarms tha
296. located to PFA if the autochange function is used e If Autochange function is not used the speed regulated motor does not need to have a relay output allocated to PFA but it needs to be included in this value 8128 AUX START ORDER Sets the start order of the auxiliary motors 1 EVEN RUNTIME Time sharing is active The start order depends on the run times 2 RELAY ORDER The start order is fixed to be the order of the relays Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 157 Group 98 Options This group configures for options in particular enabling serial communication with the drive Group 98 Options Code Description Range Resolution Default S 9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 5 1 0 Selects the communication protocol 0 NOT SEL No communication protocol selected 1 STD MODBUS The drive communicates with Modbus via the RS485 channel X1 communications terminal e See also parameter Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL 2 N2 Enables fieldbus communication with the drive using Metasys N2 protocol via the RS485 serial link X1 communications terminal 3 FLN Enables fieldbus communication with the drive using FLN protocol via the RS485 serial link X1 communications terminal 4 EXT FBA The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in option slot 2 of the drive See also parameter Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE 5 BACNET Enables fieldbus communication with the drive using BACn
297. ls generate errors e CRC calculations for possible errors Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 143 Group 53 EFB Protocol This group defines set up variables used for an embedded fieldbus EFB communication protocol Refer to communication protocol documentation for more information on these parameters Group 53 EFB Control Code Description Range Resolution Default S 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID 0000 FFFF hex 1 0000 hex Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol e Format XXYY where xx protocol ID and YY program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID 0 65535 1 1 v Defines the node address of the RS485 link e The node address on each unit must be unique 5303 EFB BAUD RATE 1 2 76 8 kbits s 9 6 kbits s Defines the communication speed of the RS485 link in kbits per second kbits s 1 2 kbits s 2 4 kbits s 4 8 kbits s 9 6 kbits s 19 2 kbits s 38 4 kbits s 57 6 kbits s 76 8 kbits s 5304 EFB PARITY 0 3 0 Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 link communication e The same settings must be used in all on line stations 0 8N1 8 data bits No parity one stop bit 1 8N2 8 data bits No parity two stop bits 2 8E1 8 data bits Even parity one stop bit 3 801 8 data bits Odd parity one stop bit 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 0 2 1 0 Selects the communication 1 ACH550 profile used
298. ltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the unit If frequent bypassing is required use mechanically interlocked switches or contactors A Warning Do not connect any motor with a nominal voltage less than one half of the drive s nominal input voltage A Warning Disconnect the drive before conducting any voltage tolerance Hi Pot test or insulation resistance Megger test on the motor or motor cables Do not conduct these tests on the drive Motor Connection Specifications Motor Connection Specifications Voltage U2 0 U4 3 phase symmetrical Umax at the field weakening point Frequency 0 500 Hz Frequency Resolution 0 01 Hz Current See Ratings on page 266 Field Weakening Point 10 500 Hz Selectable 1 4 8 or 12 kHz Switching Frequency 1 4 or 8 kHz for 600 V R6 frame size that is for ACH550 xx 077A 6 ACH550 xx 144A 6 Cable Temperature Rating 90 C 194 F rating minimum Max Motor Cable Length Frame Size fsw 1 or 4 kHz fsw 8 kHz or 12 kHz R1 100 m 330 ft 100m 330 ft Maximum Motor Cable R2 most 200 m 650 ft 100 m 330 ft Length R6 600 V 100 m 330 ft 100 m 330 ft R3 R4 200 m 650 ft 100 m 330 ft R5 R6 300 m 980 ft 150 m 490 ft R7 R8 300 m 980 ft Does not apply Warning Using a motor cable longer than specified in the chart above may cause permanent damage to the drive Techni
299. ltcode 253 PFC mode fault code 253 PFC ref neg fault code 253 restore Assistant panel 36 save changes parameter 89 parameter view parameter 91 parameters GARING na pA ANNA PAA ie Wah AY 29 view changes aan 35 parity RS232 parameter 142 parity errors count parameter 142 PE earth earth fault parameter 110 PE earth connection terminal size anaana 276 TOFQUC a eet sai tonti i KG ipi giia 276 Index ACH550 UH User s Manual PFA acceleration time parameter aux motor start delay parameter aux motor stop delay parameter control parameter group deceleration time parameter enable parameter low frequency parameters number of aux motors parameter reference step parameters start delay parameter start frequency parameters PFC aux start order parameter PFC pump fan control see PFA pump fan alternation PID 0 actual signal parameter 100 actual signal parameter actual input select parameters actual value max parameters actual value min parameters adjustment procedure comm value 1 data parameter comm value 2 data parameter correction source parameter decimal point actual signal parameter derivation filter parameter derivation time parameter deviation data parameter error feedb
300. lue 0 0 is the default value e You can use External PID PID2 as an additional PID controller to Process PID PID1 to trim or fine tune the speed of the ACH550 An example of the trimming is a return fan that follows the speed of the supply fan As the return fan needs to run faster or slower then the supply fan in order to create under or overpressure correction factors to the supply fan speed are needed Use External PID PID2 in the return fan drive to provide these corrections Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4001 GAIN 0 1 100 0 0 1 2 5 Defines the PID Controller s gain e The setting range is 0 1 100 e At 0 1 the PID Controller output changes one tenth as much as the error value e At 100 the PID Controller output changes one hundred times as much as the error value Use the proportional gain and integration time values to adjust the responsiveness of the system e A low value for proportional gain and a high value for integral time ensures stable operation but provides sluggish response If the proportional gain value is too large or the integral time too short the system can become unstable Procedure Initially set e 4001 GAIN 0 1 e 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 20 seconds Start the system and see if it reaches the set point quickly while maintaining stable operation If not increase GAIN 4001 until the actual signal or drive speed osci
301. m Cable Length for EN 61800 3 CE First Environment Unrestricted Distribution CISPR11 Class B Compliance Conducted Emissions Only Drive Type Switching Frequency Parameter 2606 1 or 4 kHz 2606 1 or 4 8 kHz 2606 8 Max Length RFI EMC Filter Max Length RFI EMC Filter ACH550 xx 059A 4 ACH550 xx 072A 4 ACH550 xx 078A 4 ACH550 xx 097A 4 ACH550 xx 03A3 4 R1 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft AGH550 xx 04A1 4 ACS400 IF11 3 ACS400 IF11 3 ACH550 xx 06A9 4 ACH550 xx 08A8 4 ACH550 xx 012A 4 ACH550 xx 015A 4 R2 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft AGHS550 xx 023A 4 ACS400 IF21 3 ACS400 IF21 3 ACH550 xx 031A 4 R3 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft AGH550 xx 038A 4 ACS400 IF31 3 ACS400 IF31 3 ACH550 xx 045A 4 ACH550 xx 044A 4 R4 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft ACS400 1F41 3 ACS400 1F41 3 Warning Do not use RFI EMC filters in a floating or impedance grounded network Technical Data 284 ACH550 UH User s Manual Control Connections Control Connection Specifications Control Connection Specifications Analog Inputs and See table heading Drive Control Terminal Description on page 286 Outputs Digital Inputs Digital input impedance 1 5 kQ Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V Max contact voltage 30 V DC 250 V AC e Max contact current power 6 A 30 V DC 1500 VA 250 V AC Relays Max
302. m limit used The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is a parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input di1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used e Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value e De activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used e See DI1 INV above Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 97 Group 20 Limits Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 600 0 0 0 0 1 300 0 Sets the first minimum limit for torque Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 600 0 0 0 0 1 300 0 Sets the second minimum limit for torque Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 0 0 600 0 0 1 300 0 Sets the first maximum limit for torque Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 0 0 600 0 0 1 300 0 Sets the second maximum limit for torque Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque Start Up 98 ACH550 UH User s Manual 21 Start Stop This group defines how the motor starts and stops The ACH550 supports several start and stop modes Group 21 Start Stop Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2101 ISTART FUNCTION 1
303. mbient Environment Requirements Storage and Transportation in the Installation Site protective package 0 1000 m 0 3 300 ft e 1000 2000 m 3 300 6 600 ft if Al ice Py and l derated 1 every 100 m above 1000 m 300 ft above 3 300 ft e Min 15 C 5 F no frost allowed 40 70 C 40 158 F e Max fsw 1 or 4 40 C 104 F 50 C 122 F if Py and l derated to 90 e Max fsw 8 40 C 104 F if A muni Px and I gt derated to 80 temperature e Max fsw 12 30 C 86 F if Py and lp derated to 65 to 50 for 600 V R4 frame sizes that is for ACH550 xx 032A 6 Ach550 xx 062A 6 Relative lt 95 non condensing humidity e No conductive dust allowed Storage The ACH550 should be installed in No conductive dust allowed aha a to enclosure chemical gases Class 1C2 Contamination KAG solid particles Class 1S2 levels Cooling air must be clean free from T IEC 721 3 3 corrosive materials and free from ransportation electrically conductive dust e No conductive dust allowed e Chemical gases Class 3C2 e Chemical gases Class 2C2 Solid particles Class 3S2 Solid particles Class 2S2 The following table lists the standard stress testing that the ACH550 passes Stress Tests Without Shipping Package Inside Shipping Package Mechanical conditions In accordance In accordance with ISTA 1A and 1B Sinusoidal with I
304. meter sets the ID directly 5317 must be 0 For example the following values set the ID to 49134 5311 49134 and 5317 0 e For IDs gt 65 335 The ID equals 5311 s value plus 10 000 times 5317 s value For example the following values set the ID to 71234 5311 1234 and 5317 7 Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 163 EFB Protocol Reference Code Description Modbus N2 FLN BACnet 5314 EFB PAR14 Not used for Comm setup Enables autobaud detection 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 5315 EFB PAR15 Displays the detected baud rate when autobaud detection is used 5317 EFB PAR17 This parameter works with parameter 5311 to set BACnet instance IDs See parameter 5311 Note After any changes to the communication settings protocol must be reactivated by either cycling the drive power or by clearing and then restoring the station Id 5302 Embedded Fieldbus 164 ACH550 UH User s Manual Activate Drive Control Functions EFB Controlling the Drive Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to Tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function Define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control Define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sections describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function For the protocol specific
305. n 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp function generator input to 0 e See DI1 INV above Start Up 102 Group 23 Speed Control ACH550 UH User s Manual This group defines variables used for speed control operation Group 23 Speed Control Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2301 PROP GAIN 0 00 200 00 Sets the relative gain for the speed controller e Larger values may cause speed oscillation e The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step error remains constant Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set proportional gain Controller output Kp re 0 01 3 00 Gain Kp 1 T Integration time 0 y A Tp Derivation time 0 Error Value Controller Output e Error value t gt 2302 INTEGRATION TIME 0 00 600 00 s Sets the integration time for the speed A O controller Yo which the controller output changes for a constant error value K e Shorter integration times correct continuous errors faster Control becomes unstable if the integration time is too short e The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step error remains constant 0 01s 2 50 Controller Output Gain Ky 1 Ti Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation time 0 eS N e Error value t Note You can use
306. n AA AS Example To avoid speeds at which a fan system vibrates AA badly Determine problem speed ranges Assume they are found to 23 be 18 23 Hz and 46 52 Hz NG Set 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 1 1 Set 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 18 Hz Set 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 23 Hz Set 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 46 Hz HL AH f2L f2H gt frer Hz Set 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 52 HZ 18 23 46 52 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0 30000 rpm 1rpm 0 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 1 The value must be less than or equal to 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI e Units are rpm unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR SPEED then units are Hz 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 1 The value must be greater than or equal to 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO e Units are rpm unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR SPEED then units are Hz 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 2 See parameter 2502 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 HZ Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 2 See parameter 2503 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 3 See parameter 2502 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 HI 0
307. n Default S 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO Depends on selection 4 6A Sets the low limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI Depends on selection 4 6A Sets the high limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 101 199 1 105 Selects the third supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO Depends on selection 100 096 Sets the low limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI Depends on selection 100 096 Sets the high limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 115 Group 33 Information This group provides access to information about the drive s current programs versions and test date Group 33 Information Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3301 FW VERSION 0000 FFFF hex 1 Firmware ver Contains the version of the drive s firmware 3302 LP VERSION 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 Contains the version of the loading package 3303 TEST DATE yy ww 1 0 Contains the test date yy ww 3304 DRIVE RATING Indicates the drive s current and voltage rating The format is XXXY where e XXX The nominal current rating of the drive in amps If present an A indicates a decimal point in the rating for the current For example XXX 8A8 indicates a nominal current rati
308. n Range Resolution Default S 0401 LAST FAULT Fault code text 1 0 0 Clear the fault history on panel NO RECORD n Fault code of the last recorded fault 0402 FAULT TIME 1 Date dd mm yy 1 0 power on days The day on which the last fault occurred Either as e A date if real time clock is operating e The number of days after power on if real time clock is not used or was not set 0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time hh mm ss 2s 0 The time at which the last fault occurred Either as e Real time in format hh mm ss if real time clock is operating e The time since power on less the whole days reported in 0402 in format hh mm ss if real time clock is not used or was not set 0404 SPEED AT FLT 1 rpm 0 The motor speed rpm at the time the last fault occurred 0405 FREQ AT FLT 0 1 Hz 0 0 The frequency Hz at the time the last fault occurred 0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT 0 1V 0 0 The DC bus voltage V at the time the last fault occurred 0407 CURRENT AT FLT 0 1A 0 0 The motor current A at the time the last fault occurred 0408 TORQUE AT FLT 0 1 0 0 The motor torque at the time the last fault occurred 0409 STATUS AT FLT 1 0000 hex The drive status hex code word at the time the last fault occurred 0410 DI 1 3 AT FLT 000 111 1 000 bin 0 7 decimal The status of digital inputs 1 3 at the time the last fault occurred 0411 DI 4 6 AT FLT 000 111 1 000 bin 0 7 decimal The status of digital inputs 4 6 at
309. n booster sel signal is released If parameter range is 01 30 00 then booster is Booster active a active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after activation DI is released Activation DI lt lt Booster time Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 125 Group 36 Timer Functions Code Description Range Resolution Default 3626 TIMER 1 SRC 0 31 1 0 Defines the time periods used by the timer O NOT SEL No timers have been selected 1 P1 Time Period 1 selected in the timer 2 P2 Time Period 2 selected in the timer 3 P2 P1 Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer 4 P3 Time Period 3 selected in the timer 5 P3 P1 Time Periods 1 and 3 selected in the timer 6 P3 P2 Time Periods 2 and 3 selected in the timer 7 P3 P2 P1 Time Periods 1 2 and 3 selected in the timer 8 P4 Time Period 4 selected in the timer 9 P4 P1 Time Periods 4 and 1 selected in the timer 10 P4 P2 Time Periods 4 and 2 selected in the timer 11 P4 P2 P1 Time Periods 4 2 and 1 selected in the timer 12 P4 P3 Time Periods 4 and 3 selected in the timer 13 P4 P3 P1 Time Periods 4 3 and 1 selected in the timer 14 P4 P3 P2 Time Periods 4 3 and 2 selected in the timer 15 P4 P3 P2 P1 Time Periods 4 3 2 and 1 selected in the timer 16 BOOSTER B Booster selected in the timer 17 B P1 Booster and Time Period 1 selected in the
310. n first supervised parameter 3201 drops below the limit 3202 e See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 113 10 suprv2 over Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 exceeds the limit 3206 e See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 113 11 suprv2 under Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 drops below the limit 3205 See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 113 12 suprv3 over Energize relay when third supervised parameter 3207 exceeds the limit 3209 e See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 113 13 suprv3 under Energize relay when third supervised parameter 3207 drops below the limit 8208 e See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 113 14 AT SET POINT Energize relay when the output frequency is equal to the reference frequency 15 FAULT RST Energize relay when the drive is in a fault condition and will reset after the programmed auto reset delay e See parameter 3103 delay time 16 FLT ALARM Energize relay when fault or alarm occurs 17 EXT CTRL Energize relay when external control is selected 18 REF 2 SEL Energize relay when ExT2 is selected 19 CONST FREQ Energize relay when a constant speed is selected 20 REF LOSS Energize relay when reference or active control place is lost 21 OVERCURRENT Energize relay when an overcurrent alarm or fault occurs 22 OVERVOLTAGE Energize relay when an overvol
311. n that activates relay 2 what relay output 2 means e See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 0 45 1 3 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 3 what relay output 3 means e See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1404 RO1ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Defines the switch on delay for relay 1 On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to Control event LE PFA Relay status ih il HA aa 1404 ON DELAY 1405 OFF DELAY 1405 RO1 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Defines the switch off delay for relay 1 On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFA Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 85 Group 14 Relay Outputs Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1406 IRO 2 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s Defines the switch on delay for relay 2 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1407 RO 2 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s Defines the switch off delay for relay 2 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1408 RO3 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Defines the switch on delay for relay 3 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1409 RO3 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Switch off delay for relay 3 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 6 0 45 1 0 1412 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 4 6 what relay output 4 6 means e See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1413 RO4 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s Defines the switch on delay for relay 4 e See RO 1 ON
312. nable signal 0 OPERATION Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED INHIBITED 4 RAMP_OUT_ 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED 0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to Zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force 5 RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED 0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held 6 RAMP IN 1 RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation Enter OPERATING ZERO 0 RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to Zero 7 RESET 0 51 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if 1604 COMM 0 OPERATING Continue normal operation 8 9 Unused 10 REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled 0 e CW 40or Ref 20 Retain last CW and Ref e CW 0 and Ref 0 Fieldbus control enabled e Ref and deceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRLLOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 EXT2 Effective if 1102 COMM 0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 EXT1 Effective if 1102 COMM 12 15 Unused Fieldbus Adapter 240 ACH550 UH User s Manual Status Word As described earlier in Control Interface the contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the status word cont
313. nal PID Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4232 CORRECTION SRC 1 2 1 1 Defines the trimming reference for the Add correction source Ramped Ref 1 PID2 REF Uses appropriate REF MAX SWITCH A OR B Switch par 4230 Trim Trimmeg e 1105 REF 1 MAX when REF1 is Ext ref 1 i Scale Mul Mul 2 C active A max A pl off gt x z 4 S 1108 REF 2 MAX when REF2 is Ext ref 2 prop or gt active B max B direct 2 PID2 OUTPUT Uses the absolute p Abs Max maximum speed or frequency Speed Freq Switch C C Select e 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED if 9904 par 4232 MOTOR CONTROL MODE 1 SPEED m Trimming PID2 ref or 2 TORQUE e 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY IF 9904 MOTOR CONTROL MODE 3 SCALAR PID2 ref PID 2 gt Trimming PID2 out Start Up 140 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 51 Ext Comm Module This group defines set up variables for a fieldbus adapter FBA communication module For more information on these parameters refer to the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Group 51 Ext Comm Module Code Description Range Resolution Default S 5101 FBA TYPE 1 0 Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module 0 NOT DEFINED Module not found or not properly connected or parameter 9802 is not set to 4 EXT FBA 1 PROFIBUS DP 16 INTERBUS 21 LONWORKS 32 CANOPEN 37 DEVICENET 64 MODBUS PLUS
314. ned BALA BG Ka 232 start stop control activate 232 state diagram ABB drives 241 status word eee eeaee 230 status word ABB drives 240 compression lugs eee eee eee 277 conduit KIS eve and hk oe E he Dama ea eis 15 config file CPI firmware revision parameter 140 fault code 0 02 eee eee 252 id revision parameter 140 revision parameter 140 connections EFB C0MM se ite aa el ee 160 FBA module 2 000 2005 231 constant speed see speed constant construction code a eae 9 contamination levels environment limit 0 295 shipping limit s so assis neas saraa ea 295 contrast control panel 28 control connection specifications 284 location data parameter 63 terminal descriptions 286 control board overtemperature fault parameter 111 temperature data parameter 66 control cable requirements 0c eee eee ee 284 ACH550 UH User s Manual control panel backup drive parameters 36 cable requirements 285 changed parameters mode 35 Clock S ti a ior eevee fc Fea a aah wy oh 40 comm error fault parameter 108 CONT ASE AA AA 28 display contrast 2 45 28 display decimal point form parameters 116 display ma
315. ng Change of State COS monitoring alarm notification scheduling trend and totalization On one N2 Fieldbus segment there can be up to 32 nodes while integrating ACH550 drives with Johnson Controls Metasys Drive Device Type For the Metasys and Metasys Companion products the device type for the ACH550 drive is VND N2 Analog Input Objects The following table lists the N2 Analog Input objects defined for the ACH550 drive N2 Analog Inputs Number Object P liea er art p Units Range Al1 OUTPUT FREQUENCY 0103 10 Hz 0 250 Al2 RATED SPEED Note 1 10 Yo 0 100 Al3 SPEED 0102 1 rpm 0 9999 Al4 CURRENT 0104 10 A 0 9999 Al5 TORQUE 0105 10 200 200 Al6 POWER 0106 10 kW 0 9999 Al7 DRIVE TEMPERATURE 0110 10 C 0 125 Al8 KILOWATT HOURS 0115 1 kWh 0 9999 Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 197 N2 Analog Inputs Number Object P ali er aes r Units Range Al9 MEGAWATT HOURS 0141 1 MWh 0 999 Al10 RUN TIME 0114 1 H 0 9999 Al11 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0107 1 0 999 Al12 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0109 1 V 0 999 Al13 PRC PID FEEDBACK 0130 10 Yo 0 100 Al14 PRC PID DEVIATION 0132 10 Yo 0 100 Al15 EXT PID FEEDBACK 0131 10 Yo 0 100 Al16 EXT PID DEVIATION 0133 10 0 100 Al17 LAST FAULT 0401 1 fault code Al18 PREV FAULT 0402 1 fault code Al19 OLDEST FAULT 0403 1 fault code Al20 Al 1 ACTUAL 0120 10 0 10
316. ng of 8 8 Amps e Y The voltage rating of the drive where Y 2 indicates a 208 240 Volt rating 4 indicates a 380 480 Volt rating 6 indicates a 500 600 Volt rating 3305 PARAMETER TABLE Contains the parameter table version of the drive s firmware Start Up 116 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables This group defines the content for control panel display middle area when the control panel is in the output mode Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 100 199 1 103 Selects the first parameter by number displayed on the control panel e Definitions in this group define display content when the control panel is in the control mode e Any Group 01 parameter number can be selected Using the following parameters the display value can be scaled converted to convenient units and or displayed as a bar graph The figure identifies selections made by parameters in this group 100 not selected First parameter not displayed 101 199 Displays parameter 0101 0199 If parameter does not D00001 exist the display shows n a 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Depends on selection 0 0 Hz Defines the minimum expected value for the first display parameter Display Use parameters 3402 3403 3406 and 3407 for example to convert a Value Group 01 parameter such as 0102 SPEED in rpm to the s
317. ng the DeleteObject service 3 List of the optional properties supported 4 List of all properties that are writable where not otherwise required by this standard 5 List of proprietary properties and for each its property identifier datatype and meaning 6 List of any property range restrictions See table at Object Property Support Matrix on page 219 Embedded Fieldbus 218 ACH550 UH User s Manual BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement Data Link Layer Options O BACnet IP Annex J O BACnet IP Annex J Foreign Device O ISO 8802 3 Ethernet Clause 7 O ANSI ATA 878 1 2 5 Mb ARCNET Clause 8 O ANSI ATA 878 1 RS 485 ARCNET Clause 8 baud rate s __ MS TP master Clause 9 baud rate s 9600 19200 38400 76800 O MS TP slave Clause 9 baud rate s __ O Point To Point EIA 232 Clause 10 baud rate s __ O Point To Point modem Clause 10 baud rate s 3 O LonTalk Clause 11 medium currently necessary for two way communication with MS TP slaves and certain other devices O Other Device Address Binding O Yes Is static device binding supported This is No Networking Options O Router Clause 6 List all routing configurations e g ARCNET Ethernet Ethernet MS TP etc O Annex H BACnet Tunneling Router over IP O BACnet IP Broadcast Management Device BBMD Indicating support for multiple character sets does not imply that t
318. ng the Start Up Assistant To start the Start Up Assistant follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu 4 press SAVE after every change 1 Select ASSISTANTS with the Up Down buttons and select ENTER KA 2 lt G Scroll to COMMISSION DRIVE with the Up Down buttons LA 3 N 4 Change the values suggested by the assistant to your preferences and then EG The Start Up Assistant will guide you through the start up Start Up by Changing the Parameters Individually To change the parameters follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu u 1 Select the Parameters mode with the UP DOWN buttons and select ENTER to A o 2 select the Parameters mode 7 u Select the appropriate parameter group Pa with the UP DOWN buttons and select pa See wT Start Up 30 ACH550 UH User s Manual Select the appropriate parameter in a 7 group with the UP DOWN buttons Select 4 EDIT to change the parameter value Press the UP DOWN buttons to change the parameter value GP id Cl Select SAVE to store the modified value or select CANCEL to leave the set mode 6 Any modifications not saved are cancelled al Select EXIT to return to the listing of parameter groups and again to return to CV 7 the main menu y To complete the control connections by manually entering the parameters see Par
319. nload does not include user sets of parameters gt Control a Ga Panel NABA Download a o o X0202 IP2100 IP2100 To download all parameters to drive follow these steps Select MENU to enter the menu u Select PAR BACKUP with the UP DOWN buttons 2 Scroll to Download to drive all and select SEL Ay 3 N 4 GF The text restoring parameters is displayed Select ABORT if you want A 4 to stop the process Start Up 38 ACH550 UH User s Manual After the download stops the message Parameter download v4 successful is displayed and the control panel goes back to PAR BACKUP menu Select EXIT to return 5 to the main menu Note Download Full Set writes all parameters to the drive including motor parameters Only use this function to restore a drive or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system Download Application Copies a partial parameter set from the Control Panel to a drive The partial set does not include internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any Group 51 and 53 parameters Use this option to transfer parameters to systems that use similar configurations the drive and motor sizes do not need to be the same Control gma Panel Upload 2 Download la to panel Ci application _ ee so UU z NG Xo202
320. nsor being used to measure the control variable These points have default units in Hz If other units are required e Unbundle these points with appropriate slopes and intercepts e The new intercept equals the lowest value of the desired range Embedded Fieldbus 206 ACH550 UH User s Manual e Calculate the new slope as follows Desired Range i e high low values x Slope of Existing Point Range of Existing Point 60 Hz 0 Hz x 0 01 100 0 New Slope 0 006 Example You are controlling water temperature from a cooling tower using the ACH550 to control a fan The temperature sensor has a range of 30 to 250 degrees Fahrenheit To unbundle the set point INPUT REF 2 for commanding in degrees Fahrenheit where 0 60 Hz is equal to 30 250 F New Intercept 30 the temperature that corresponds to 0 Desired Range x Slope of Existing Point Range of Existing Point 250 F 30 F x 0 1 100 0 New Slope 0 22 To unbundle the feedback PRC PID FBCK for monitoring in degrees Fahrenheit New Intercept 30 Desired Range x Slope of Existing Point New SI is Range of Existing Point _ 250 F 30 F x 0 01 0 022 100 0 Loop Gains PRC PID GAIN Point 50 and PRC PID ITIM Point 51 are PID parameters similar to the P and gains in the APOGEE TECs Because the ABB PI loop and the Siemens loop are structured differently there is no a one to one cor
321. ntroller 4203 58 EXT PID DFIL Sets the time constant for the error derivative of the External 4204 PID controller 59 LOCK PANEL Command by FLN to lock the panel and prevent parameter 1602 changes 1 LOCK 0 UNLOCK 60 INPUT REF 1 Sets Input Reference 1 Parameter 1102 must be set to COMM for FLN to control this value 61 INPUT REF 2 Sets Input Reference 2 Parameter 1106 must be set to COMM for FLN to control this value 62 EXT PID STPT The setpoint for the External PID controller 4211 The function of this point requires parameter 4210 PID Setpoint Select to be set to 19 Internal 63 EXT PID FBCK The External PID feedback signal 0131 64 EXT PID DEV The deviation of the External PID output signal from its 0133 setpoint 65 N A 66 SPD OUT MIN Sets the minimum output speed of the drive as a percentage 2007 of the motor nominal rating SCALAR 2001 SPEED 67 SPD OUT MAX Sets the maximum output speed of the drive as a percentage 2008 of the motor nominal rating SCALAR 2002 SPEED 68 FLN LOC CTL Commanded by FLN to temporarily steal start stop control of the drive from its normal source and place it under FLN control This functionality is analogous to placing the drive in HAND mode at the panel with the control being taken by FLN instead HAND mode at the panel has priority over this point Thus this point is only effective in temporarily taking control from the digital inputs or some other
322. nual 233 a eee Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 1002 EXT2 10 COMM Start Stop by controlled fieldbus with COMMANDS Ext2 selected 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction controlled by fieldbus Input Reference Select Using the fieldbus to provide input reference to the drive requires e Drive parameter value set as defined below e Fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent er Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 8 COMM Ref selected by fieldbus Required only if 2 references used 1103 REF1 SEL 8 COMM Input reference 1supplied by fieldbus 9 COMM AI1 10 COMM AI1 1106 REF2 SEL 8 COMM Input reference 1 supplied by fieldbus 9 COMM Al Required only if 2 references used 10 COMM AI Note Multiple references are supported only when using the ABB Drives profile Scaling Where required REFERENCES can be scaled See the Reference Scaling in the following sections as appropriate e ABB Drives Profile Technical Data e Generic Profile Technical Data System Control Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires e Drive parameter values set as defined below e Fieldbus controller command s in the appropriate location The location is defined
323. o read the Ratings table you need the Output current rating entry from the type code see above Also when using the Ratings tables note that there are different tables for each drive Voltage rating Installation 10 Motor Compatibility ACH550 UH User s Manual The motor drive and supply power must be compatible Motor Specification Verify Reference Motor type 3 phase induction motor Nominal current Motor value is within this range 0 15 1 5 lon lon normal use current e Type code label on drive entry for Output lon Or Type code on drive and rating table in Technical Data on page 266 Nominal frequency 10 500 Hz Voltage range Motor is compatible with the ACH550 voltage range 208 240 V for ACH550 xx xxxx 2 or 380 480 V for ACH550 xx xxxx 4 500 600 V for ACH550 xx xxxx 6 Insulation 500 600 V drives Either the motor complies with NEMA MG1 Part 31 ora du dt filter is used between the motor and drive For ACH550 xx xxxx 6 Tools Required To install the ACH550 you need the following e Screwdrivers as appropriate for the mounting hardware used e Wire stripper Tape measure Drill e Frame sizes R5 R8 with UL type 12 enclosure Punch for conduit mounting holes e Frame sizes R7 R8 pallet truck and hoist For installations involving frame size R6 R8 The appropriate crimping tool for
324. o the following as appropriate Terminal Description Specifications and Notes U1 V1 W1 3 phase power supply input Input Power Connections on page 270 PE Protective Ground Ground Connections on page 274 U2 V2 W2 Power output to motor Motor Connections on page 278 The ACH550 xx xxxx 2 208 240V series can be used with a single phase supply if output current is derated by 50 For single phase supply voltage connect power at U1 and W1 To locate input power and motor connection terminals see Connection Diagrams starting on page 17 For specifications on power terminals see Drive s Power Connection Terminals on page 276 e For frame sizes R1 R4 in unsymmetrically grounded networks see Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks on page 274 For floating or impedance grounded networks see Floating Networks on page 275 Installation 16 ACH550 UH User s Manual For frame size R6 see Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size on page 276 to install the appropriate cable lugs For details on control connections refer to the following sections Control Connections on page 284 Application Macros starting on page 44 Parameter Descriptions on page 61 Embedded Fieldbus on page 158 Fieldbus Adapter on page 228 For electro magnetic compliance EMC follow local codes and the requirements in Motor Cable Requirements for CE 8 C Tick Compliance on
325. ocation REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 Drive control location LOCAL 10 ABOVE LIMIT Supervised parameter s value 5 supervision high limit Bit remains 1 until supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit See group 32 Supervision Supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit Bit remains O until supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit See group 32 Supervision 11 EXT CTRL LOC External control location 2 EXT2 selected External control location 1 EX11 selected 12 EXT RUN ENABLE External Run Enable signal received No External Run Enable signal received 13 15 Unused Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 187 DCU Profile The following tables describe the STATUS WORD content for the DCU profile DCU Profile STATUS WORD See Parameter 0303 Bit Name Value Status 0 READY 1 Drive is ready to receive start command 0 Drive is not ready 1 ENABLED 1 External run enable signal received 0 No external run enable signal received 2 STARTED 1 Drive has received start command 0 Drive has not received start command 3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating 0 Drive is not modulating 4 ZERO SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed 0 Drive has not reached zero speed 5 ACCELERATE 1 Drive is accelerating 0 Drive is not accelerat
326. ock is OFF 20 CTL MODE 1 Drive is in vector control mode 0 Drive is in scalar control mode 21 25 Reserved 26 REQ CTL 1 Copy the control word 0 no op 27 REQ REF1 1 Reference 1 requested in this channel 0 Reference 1 is not requested in this channel 28 REQ REP2 1 Reference 2 requested in this channel 0 Reference 2 is not requested in this channel 29 REQ REF2EXT 1 External PID reference 2 requested in this channel 0 External PID reference 2 is not requested in this channel 30 ACK STARTINH 1 A start inhibit from this channel is granted 0 A start inhibit from this channel is not granted 31 ACK OFF ILCK 1 Start inhibit due to OFF button 0 Normal operation Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual State Diagram ABB Drives Profile To illustrate the operation of the state diagram the following example ABB DRV LIM implementation of the ABB Drives profile uses the control word to start the drive 189 First the requirements for using the CONTROL WORD must be met See above When the power is first connected the state of the drive is not ready to switch on See dotted lined path in the state diagram below Use the CONTROL WORD to step through the state machine states until the OPERATING State is reached meaning that the drive is running and follows the given reference See table below Step CONTROL WORD Value Description 1 CW 0000 0000 0000 0110 bit 15 bit 0 This CW value changes t
327. on Digital input de activated Constant Speed 1 activated 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input See above 7 DI1 2 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI1 and DI2 e Inverse operation uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated DI1 DI2 Function 1 1 No constant speed 0 1 Constant speed 1 1202 1 0 Constant speed 2 1203 0 O Constant speed 3 1204 8 DI2 3 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using Di2 and D13 e See above DI1 2 INV for code 9 DI3 4 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 and D14 e See above DI1 2 INV for code 10 DI4 5 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI4 and DI5 e See above DI1 2 INV for code 11 DI5 6 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI5 and DI6 e See above DI1 2 INV for code Start Up 80 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 12 Constant Speeds Code Description Range Resolution Default S 12 DI1 2 3 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI1 D12 and DI3 e Inverse operation uses three digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated DI1 DI2 DI3 Function 1 1 1 No constant speed 0 1 1 Constant speed 1 1202 1 O
328. onding drive parameter is 0120 Alt ANALOG INPUT 2 This object indicates the value of Percent R Analog Input 2 The corresponding drive parameter is 0121 Note For Present Value Access Types R Read only W Writeable C Commandable Commandable values support priority arrays amp relinquish defaults Analog Output Object Instance Summary The following table summarizes the Analog Output Objects supported Instance A ek 3 Present Value Object Name Description Units Access Type AO0 AO 1 This object controls Analog Output 1 The Percent C COMMAND corresponding drive parameter is 0135 COMM VALUE 1 Control requires parameter 1501 value 135 AO1 AO 2 This object controls Analog Output 2 The Percent C COMMAND corresponding drive parameter is 0136 COMM VALUE 2 Control requires parameter 1507 value 136 Embedded Fieldbus 224 ACH550 UH User s Manual Note For Present Value Access Types R Read only W Writeable C Commandable Commandable values support priority arrays amp relinquish defaults Analog Value Object Instance Summary The following table summarizes the Analog Value Objects supported Instance ID Object Name Description Units Present Value Access Type AVO OUTPUT SPEED This object indicates the calculated motor speed in RPM The corresponding drive parameter is 0102 RPM R AV1
329. one AV19 PREV FLT 1 This object indicates the second most recent fault entered in the drive s fault log The corresponding drive parameter is 0412 None AV20 PREV FLT 2 This object indicates the third most recent fault entered in the drive s fault log The corresponding drive parameter is 0413 None AV21 AO 1 ACT This object indicates Analog Output 1 s level The corresponding drive parameter is 0124 Milliamps AV22 AO 2 ACT This object indicates Analog Output 2 s level The corresponding drive parameter is 0125 Milliamps AV23 ACCEL1 TIME This object sets the Ramp1 acceleration time The corresponding drive parameter is 2202 Seconds AV24 DECEL1 TIME This object sets the Ramp1 deceleration time The corresponding drive parameter is 2203 Seconds AV25 MBOX PARAM This object defines the parameter to be read or written to by the mailbox function See BV15 and BV16 None AV26 MBOX DATA This object holds the mailbox function s parameter value a value that was read or is to be written See BV15 and BV16 None Embedded Fieldbus 226 ACH550 UH User s Manual Instance i BA f Present Value ID Object Name Description Units Access Type AV27 EXT PID STPT This object sets the External PID Percent C controller setpoint The corresponding drive parameter is 4211 Control requires parameter 4210 P
330. one required for cooling R7 R8 Free space at sides of enclosure None required for cooling ACH550 enclosures can be mounted side by side R7 R8 Also see Additional Free Space Recommendations on page 293 Requirement Air Flow 208 240 Volt Drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 208 240 Volt drives Drive Heat Loss Air Flow ACH550 xx Frame Size W BTU Hr m3 h ft min 04A6 2 R1 55 189 44 26 06A6 2 R1 73 249 44 26 07A5 2 R1 81 276 44 26 012A 2 R1 116 404 44 26 017A 2 R1 161 551 44 26 024A 2 R2 227 776 88 52 031A 2 R2 285 373 88 52 046A 2 R3 420 1434 134 79 Technical Data 288 ACH550 UH User s Manual Drive Heat Loss Air Flow ACH550 xx Frame Size BTU Hr m3 h 3 min 059A 2 R3 536 1829 134 79 075A 2 R4 671 2290 280 165 088A 2 R4 786 2685 280 165 114A 2 R4 1014 3463 280 165 143A 2 R6 1268 4431 405 238 178A 2 R6 1575 5379 405 238 221A 2 R6 1952 6666 405 238 248A 2 R6 2189 7474 405 238 Air Flow 380 480 Volt Drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 380 480 Volt drives Drive Heat Loss Air Flow ACH550 xx Frame Size BTU Hr m3 h ft min 03A3 4 R1 40 137 44 26 04A1 4 R1 52 177 44 26 06A9 4 R1 97 331 44 26 08A8 4 R1 127 433
331. or control Fuses The following tables provide fuse recommendations for short circuit protection on the drive s input power These recommendations are not requirements if branch circuit protection is otherwise provided per NEC UL508A manufacturers are not required to use the recommended fuses for the purpose of UL listing a panel that includes the ACH550 Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual 208 380 240 Volt Fuses 271 ACH550 UH Input Current Input Fuses see below A IEC269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann Type 04A6 2 4 6 10 10 JJS 10 06A6 2 6 6 07A5 2 7 5 012A 2 11 8 16 15 JJS 15 017A 2 16 7 25 25 JJS 25 024A 2 24 2 30 JJS 30 031A 2 30 8 40 40 JJS 40 046A 2 46 2 63 60 JJS 60 059A 2 59 4 80 JJS 80 075A 2 74 8 80 100 JJS 100 088A 2 88 0 100 110 JJS 110 114A 2 114 125 150 JJS 150 143A 2 143 200 200 JJS 200 178A 2 178 250 250 JJS 250 221A 2 221 315 300 JJS 300 248A 2 248 350 JJS 350 480 Volt Fuses ACH550 UH input Current A paa see below IEC269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann Type 03A3 4 3 3 10 10 JJS 10 04A1 4 4 1 06A9 4 6 9 08A8 4 8 8 15 JJS 15 012A 4 11 9 16 015A 4 15 4 20 JJS 20 023A 4 23 25 30 JJS 30 031A 4 31 35 40 JJS 40 038A 4 38 50 50 JJS 50 044A 4 44 60 JJS 60 045A 4 44 059A 4 59 63 80 JJS 80 072
332. ot copy the reference 1104 REF1 MIN 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm Sets the minimum for external reference 1 The minimum analog input signal as a percent of the full signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF1 MIN in Hz rpm e Parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 or 1304 MINIMUM Al2 sets the minimum analog input signal These parameters reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference 1105 REF1 MAX 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 60 0 Hz US 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 1800 rpm US Sets the maximum for external reference 1 The maximum analog input signal as a percent of full the signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF1 MAX in HZ rpm e Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 or 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 sets the maximum analog input signal A Ext ref A Ext ref P 1104 P1105 00 MIN MAX i l l P 1105 P 1104 _ Analog meee Se MIN i 1 input signal l Analog 2 gt r 7 gt P 1301 P 1302 P 1301 P1302 input signal or 1304 or 1305 or 1304 or 1305 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 77 Group 11 Reference Select Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1104 REF1 MIN 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm Sets the minimum for external reference 1 e The minimum analog input signal as a percent of the full signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF1 MIN in Hz rpm e Parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 or 1304 MINIMUM
333. otocol is in listen only mode Start Up 144 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 53 EFB Control Code Description Range Resolution Default S 5310 EFB PAR 10 to EFB PAR 20 0 65535 1 Protocol dep kaa These parameters are protocol specific Refer to the appropriate protocol in the Embedded Fieldbus section for these parameter descriptions Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 145 Group 81 PFA This group defines a Pump and Fan Alternation PFA mode of operation The major features of PFA are The ACH550 controls the motor of pump no 1 varying the motor speed to control the pump capacity This motor is the speed regulated motor Direct line connections power the motor of pump no 2 and pump no 3 etc The ACH550 switches pump no 2 and then pump no 3 etc on and off as needed These motors are auxiliary motors e The ACH550 PID control uses two signals a process reference and an actual value feedback The PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference When demand defined by the process reference exceeds the first motor s capacity user defined as a frequency limit the PFA automatically starts an auxiliary pump The PFA also reduces the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s addition to total output Then as before the PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump su
334. otor can safely operate at 63 six times its rated current fi e The thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s for a Class 20 trip curve 700 s and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s oy vo 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE 50 150 1 100 Sets the maximum allowable operating load of the motor Output current relative e When set to 100 the maximum allowable load is equal to the to dove HERE e CURR value of Start up Data parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURRENT e Adjust the load curve level if the ambient temperature differs from 150 nominal P 3007 100 Frequency z l l l P 3009 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD 25 150 1 70 Sets the maximum allowable current at zero speed e Value is relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ 1 250 Hz 1 35 Hz Sets the break point frequency for the motor load curve Example Thermal protection trip A loll A times when parameters 3006 3 57 ON MOT THERM TIME 3007 MOT t LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO 3 0 60 s SPEED LOAD have default 25 values ie 90s 2 0 4 lt a a me bi o ooo 300 s 600s l Output current o0 ka en a IN Nominal motor current 0 5 tit fo Output frequency e ZAN fark Break point frequency 0 02 04 06 0 8 1 0 1 2 A Trip time Start Up 110 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 30 Fault Functions Code Description Range Resolution Default
335. parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set proportional gain gt 2303 DERIVATION TIME 0 10000 ms Sets the derivation time for the speed controller Derivative action makes the control more responsive to error value changes The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change If the derivation time is set to zero the controller works as a PI controller otherwise as a PID controller The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Gain Kp 1 T Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation time gt 0 Tgz Sample time period 2 ms Ae Error value change between two samples Controller Output Error Value VA CC e Error value t 4 gt Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 103 Group 23 Speed Control Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2304 ACC COMPENSATION 0 00 600 00 s 0 01 s 0 00 Sets the derivation time for acceleration compensation Adding a derivative of the reference to the output of the speed controller compensates for inertia during acceleration 2303 DERIVATION TIME describes the principle of derivative action motor and the driven machine The figure shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp No Acceleration Compensation 4 4 Acceleration Compensation Speed reference
336. peed of a conveyor driven by the motor in ft min For such a conversion the P 3407 source values in the figure are the min and max motor speed and the display values are the corresponding min and max conveyor speed Use parameter 3405 to select the proper units for the display P3406 Note Selecting units does not convert values B P3402 P 3403 Source Value 3403 SIGNAL1 MAX Depends on selection 600 0 Hz Defines the maximum expected value for the first display parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 0 9 1 9 Defines the decimal point location for the first display parameter 1 7 Defines the decimal point location 3404 Value Display Range Enter the number of digits desired to the right of the decimal 0 3 32768 32767 point 1 3 1 Signed See table for example using pi 3 14159 7 3 14 8 BAR METER Specifies a bar meter display 3 13 142 9 DIRECT Decimal point location and units of measure are 7 3 011165535 identical to the source signal See Group 01 parameter listing in J Unsi ned Complete Parameter List for resolution which indicates the 5 3 9 decimal point location and the units of measure 6 3 14 7 3 142 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 117 Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables Code Description Range Resolution Defa
337. plays as 0001 All zeros and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 Bit 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 0 STOP FBLOCAL CTL 1 START FBLOCAL REF 2 REVERSE START DISABLE1 3 LOCAL START DISABLE2 4 RESET Reserved 5 EXT2 Reserved 6 RUN DISABLE Reserved 7 STPMODE R Reserved 8 STPMODE EM Reserved 9 STPMODE_C Reserved 10 RAMP 2 Reserved 11 RAMP OUT 0 REF CONST 12 RAMP HOLD REF AVE 13 RAMP IN O LINK ON 14 RREQ LOCALLOC REQ STARTINH 15 TORQLIM2 OFF INTERLOCK 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 Read only copy of the Fieldbus Command Word 2 e See parameter 0301 Start Up 68 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 03 Actual Signals Code Description Range Resolution Default 0303 FB STS WORD 1 1 hex Read only copy of the Status Word 1 e The drive sends status information to the fieldbus controller The status consists of two Status Words Bit 0303 STS CMD WORD 1 0304 FB STS WORD 2 0 READY ALARM 1 ENABLED REQ_MAINT 2 STARTED DIRLOCK 3 RUNNING LOCALLOCK 4 ZERO_SPEED CTL_MODE 5 ACCELERATE Reserved 6 DECELERATE Reserved 7 AT SETPOINT Reserved 8 LIMIT Reserved 9 SUPERVISION Reserved 10 REV REF REQ CTL 11 REV ACT REQ REF1 12 PANEL LOCAL REQ REF2 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL REQ REF2EXT 14 EXT2 ACT ACK STARTINH 15 FAULT ACK OFF ILCK 0304 FB STS WORD 2 1
338. power cable lugs See Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size e Mounting hardware screws or nuts and bolts four each The type of hardware depends on the mounting surface and the frame size Frame Size Mounting Hardware Note R1 R4 M5 10 R5 M6 1 4 in R6 M8 5 16 in R7 R8 M10 7 16 Secures free standing cabinets if required e For installations involving frame size R7 R8 Hoist Suitable Environment and Enclosure Confirm that the site meets the environmental requirements To prevent damage prior to installation store and transport the drive according to the environmental Installation ACH550 UH User s Manual 11 requirements specified for storage and transportation See Ambient Conditions on page 295 Confirm that the enclosure is appropriate based on the site contamination level UL type 1 enclosure The site must be free of airborne dust corrosive gases or liquids and conductive contaminants such as condensation carbon dust and metallic particles UL type 12 enclosure This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions Suitable Mounting Location Confirm that the mounting location meets the following constraints R1 R6 The drive must be mounted vertically on a smooth solid surface and in a suitable environment as defined above The drive must be located in a suitable environment as defined above
339. pported features NCU see network control unit NEMA 1 see UL type 1 NEMA 12 see UL type 12 NEMA ratings see ratings ACH550 UH User s Manual network control unit description 194 N2 DDL file 0 2 199 noise random sw freq parameter 106 NBI NB ANA PAA NATEN NA 287 O object virtual description 194 offset PID parameter 138 ok messages count parameter 142 operating data parameter group 63 OPEX link fault code a 251 OPEX power fault code 251 options parameter group 157 output frequency data parameter 63 output voltage data parameter 63 output wiring fault code 0002 eee eee eee 252 overcurrent automatic reset parameter 112 fault CODE 2 ad Sods aa ale haha 249 overspeed fault code 251 P panel display variables parameter group 116 panel loss fault code 250 par override pars fault code 254 par pfa override fault code 254 parameter analog input scale fault code 253 analog output scale fault code 253 CHANGE IOCK sie mad 2 aaa doled EARE 88 external relay output fault code fieldbus fault code hz rpm fault code PCU 1 power control unit fault code 238 254 PCU 2 power control unit fau
340. principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives Profile FBA CONTROL WORD Commanded Bit Name Value State Comments 0 OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE CONTROL z a 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205 Normal command sequence e Enter OFF1 ACTIVE e Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active 1 OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF2 inactive CONTROL 7 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence e Enter OFF2 ACTIVE e Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED Fieldbus Adapter ACH550 UH User s Manual 239 ABB Drives Profile FBA CONTROL WORD Commanded Bit Name Value State Comments 2 OFF3 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF3 inactive CONTROL 0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within in time specified by parameter 2208 Normal command sequence e Enter OFF3 ACTIVE e Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Be sure motor and driven equipment can be stopped using this mode 3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note the Run OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active See 1601 If 1601 is set to COMM this bit also actives the Run E
341. quires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 6 DI6 Two wire Start Stop e Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DI6 activated Start DI6 de activated Stop e Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FWD 7 DI6 5 Two wire Start Stop Direction e Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DI6 activated Start DI6 de activated Stop e Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI5 DI5 activated Reverse de activated Forward 8 KEYPAD Control Panel Start Stop and Direction commands are through the control panel when EXT1 is active e Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 9 DI1F 2R Start Stop Direction commands through DI1 and DI2 combinations Start forward DI1 activated and DI2 de activated Start reverse DI1 de activated and DI2 activated Stop both DI1 and Di2 activated or both de activated e Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 73 Group 10 AcStart Stop Dir Code Description Range Resolution Default S 10 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start stop and direction commands Bits 0 1 2 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the start stop and direction commands e See Fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 11 TIMER 1 Assigns Start Stop control to Timer 1 Timer act
342. r 9910 MOTOR ID RUN for a description of motor models 2026 RESERVED Not used 2027 USER LOAD This alarm warns that the condition defined by parameter 3701 USER CURVE LAOD C MODE has been valid longer that half of the time difined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 2028 START DELAY Shown during the Start delay See parameter 2113 START DELAY Note 1 Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions e g parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 5 ALARM or 16 FLT ALARM this alarm is not indicated by a relay output Diagnostics 258 Maintenance ACH550 UH User s Manual Warning Read Safety on page 3 before performing any maintenance on the equipment Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death Maintenance Intervals If installed in an appropriate environment the drive requires very little maintenance This table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB needed Maintenance Application Interval Instruction Check replace R7 R8 R7 R8 UL type 12 Check every 3 Frame Sizes R7 R8 UL enclosure inlet air filter enclosures months Replace as type 12 Enclosure Inlet Air Filter on page 262 Check replace R7 R8 R7 R8 UL type 12 Check every 6 Frame Sizes R7 R8 UL enclosure exhaust air enclosures months Replace as type 12 Enclosure Exhaust filter needed Filters on page 263 Check and clean All Depends on the See Heatsink on he
343. r Hz units determined by parameter 9904 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0 100 0 1 torque 0 600 External reference REF2 in 96 0113 CTRL LOCATION 0 2 1 Active control location Alternatives are 0 HAND 1 EXT1 2 EXT2 0114 IRUN TIME R 0 65 535 h 1h Oh The drive s accumulated running time in hours h Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when in parameter set mode 0115 KWH COUNTER R 0 65 535 kWh 1 kWh The drive s accumulated power consumption in kilowatt hours Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when in parameter set mode 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT 0 100 0 1 torque 0 600 Application block output signal Value is from either PFA control if PFA Control is active or Parameter 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 Start Up 64 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 01 Operating Data Code Description Range Resolution Default S 0118 DI1 3 STATUS 000 111 1 0 7 decimal Status of the three digital inputs Status is displayed as a binary number I e 1 indicates that the input is activated O indicates that the input is deactivated sk o JC eal ga T co DI 1 D 0119 DI4 6 STATUS 000 111 1 0 7 decimal Status of the three digital inputs See parameter 0118 DI1 3 STATUS 0120 JAH 0 100 0 1 Relative value of analog input 1 in 0121 Al2 0 100 0 1 The relative value of an
344. r analog inputs Group 13 Analog Inputs Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1301 MINIMUM Al1 0 0 100 0 0 1 20 0 Defines the minimum value of the analog input e Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range See example below e The minimum analog input signal corresponds to 1104 REF1 MIN or 1107 REF2 MIN e MINIMUM Al cannot be greater than MAXIMUM Al e These parameters reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference e See figure at parameter 1104 Example To set the minimum analog input value to 4 mA e Configure the analog input for 0 20 mA current signal e Calculate the minimum 4 mA as a percent of full range 20 mA 4 mA 20 mA 100 20 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 Defines the maximum value of the analog input e Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range e The maximum analog input signal corresponds to 1105 REF1 MAX or 1108 REF2 MAX e See figure at parameter 1104 1303 FILTER Al1 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 0 1s Defines the filter time constant for analog input 1 A11 A Unfiltered signal The filtered signal reaches 63 of a step change within the time specified 100 BIT TA Filtered signal t gt Time constant 1304 MINIMUM Al2 0 0 100 0 0 1 20 0 Defines the minimum value of the analog input e See MINIMUM Al1 above 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 Defines the maximum valu
345. r is reset by writing 0 to it 2905 RUN TIME TRIG 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 Sets the trigger point for the drive s run time counter 0 0 NOT SEL 2906 RUN TIME ACT 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 Defines the actual value of the drive s run time counter The parameter is reset by writing 0 0 to it 2907 USER MWh TRIG 0 0 6553 5 MWh 0 1 MWh 0 0 Sets the trigger point for the drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours counter 0 0 NOT SEL 2908 USER MWh ACT 0 0 6553 5 MWh 0 1 MWh 0 0 Defines the actual value of the drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours counter The parameter is reset by writing 0 0 to it Start Up 108 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 30 Fault Functions This group defines situations that the drive should recognize as potential faults and defines how the drive should respond if the fault is detected Group 30 Fault Functions Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION 0 3 1 0 Defines the drive response if the analog input Al signal drops below the fault limits and Al is used in reference chain e 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT set the fault limits 0 NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 7 All Loss or 8 Al2 LOSS and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP7 Displays a warning 2006 Al1 Loss or 2007 Al2 LOSS and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 3 LAST SPEED
346. r s Manual 179 The following table summarizes the 4xxxx drive control registers 40001 40099 for 4xxxx registers above 40099 see the drive parameter list e g 40102 is parameter 0102 Modbus Register Access Remarks 40001 CONTROL WORD R W Maps directly to the profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 0 or 2 ABB Drives profile Parameter 5319 holds a copy in hex format 40002 Reference 1 R W Range 0 20000 scaled to 0 1105 REF1 MAX or 20000 0 scaled to 1105 REF1 MAX 0 40003 Reference 2 R W Range 0 10000 scaled to 0 1108 REF2 MAX or 10000 0 scaled to 1108 REF2 MAX 0 40004 STATUS WORD R Maps directly to the profile s STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 0 or 2 ABB Drives profile Parameter 5320 holds a copy in hex format 40005 Actual 1 R By default stores a copy of 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Use select using 5310 parameter 5310 to select a different actual value for this register 40006 Actual 2 R By default stores a copy of 0104 CURRENT Use select using 5311 parameter 5311 to select a different actual value for this register 40007 Actual 3 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5312 to select using 5312 select an actual value for this register 40008 Actual 4 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5313 to select by 5313 select an actual value for this register 40009 Actual 5 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5314 to se
347. r than the time setting of the star delta starter 8123 PFA ENABLE 0 1 0 v Selects PFA control When enabled PFA control e Switches in or out auxiliary constant speed motors as output demand increases or decreases Parameters 8109 START FREQ 1 to 8114 LOW FREQ 3 define the switch points in terms of the drive output frequency e Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down as auxiliary motors are added and adjusts the speed regulated motor output up as auxiliary motors are taken off line e Provides Interlock functions if enabled e Requires 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR 0 NOT SEL Disables PFA control 1 ACTIVE Enables PFA control 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 0 0 Sets the PFA acceleration time for a zero to maximum frequency ramp This PFA acceleration ramp e Applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched off Replaces the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 Accel Decel e Applies only until the output of the regulated motor increases by an amount equal to the output of the switched off auxiliary motor Then the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 Accel Decel applies Start Up 156 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S O NOT SEL 0 1 1800 Activates this function using the value entered as the acceleration time OUT4 Ay Aux Motor KH A 0 e A speed regulated motor
348. ratings shaded columns e Frame size Ratings 208 240 Volt Drives Abbreviated column headers are described in Symbols on page 268 Type Code Valid up to 40 C 104 F ACH550 xx see below fon Ph Jar A HP Three phase supply voltage 208 240 V 04A6 2 4 6 1 0 R1 06A6 2 6 6 1 5 R1 07A5 2 7 5 2 0 R1 012A 2 11 8 3 0 R1 017A 2 16 7 5 0 R1 024A 2 24 2 7 5 R2 031A 2 30 8 10 0 R2 046A 2 46 2 15 0 R3 059A 2 59 4 20 0 R3 075A 2 74 8 25 0 R4 088A 2 88 0 30 0 R4 114A 2 114 40 0 R4 148A 2 143 50 0 R6 178A 2 178 60 0 R6 221A 2 221 75 0 R6 248A 2 248 100 R6 Technical Data ACH550 UH User s Manual Ratings 380 480 Volt Drives Abbreviated column headers are described in Symbols on page 268 Type Code Valid up to 40 C 104 F ACH550 xx see lon Py a below A HP Three phase supply voltage 380 480 V 03A3 4 3 3 1 5 R1 04A1 4 4 1 2 R1 06A9 4 6 9 3 R1 08A8 4 8 8 5 R1 012A 4 11 9 7 5 R1 015A 4 15 4 10 R2 023A 4 23 15 R2 031A 4 31 20 R3 038A 4 38 25 R3 045A 4 Note 1 44 30 R3 044A 4 Note 1 44 30 R4 059A 4 59 40 R4 072A 4 72 50 R4 078A 4 Note 1 77 60 R4 097A 4 Note 1 96 75 R4 077A 4 Note 1 77 60 R5 096A 4 Note 1 96 75 R5 125A 4 Note 1 124 100 R5 124A 4 Note 1 124 100 R6 157A 4 157 125 R6 180A 4 180 150
349. ration file parameter 5132 lt 5128 4 OFF LINE Adapter is off line 5 ON LINE Adapter is on line 6 RESET Adapter is performing a hardware reset 5132 FBA CPI FW REV 0000 FFFF hex 1 0000 hex Contains the revision of the module s CPI program Format is xyz where e x major revision number e y minor revision number e z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 141 Group 51 Ext Comm Module Code Description Range Resolution Default S 5133 FBA APPL FW REV 0000 FFFF hex 1 0000 hex Contains the revision of the module s application program Format is xyz see parameter 5132 Start Up 142 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 52 Panel Communication This group defines the communication settings for the control panel port on the drive Normally when using the supplied control panel there is no need to change settings in this group In this group parameter modifications take effect on the next power up Group 52 Panel Communication Code Description Range Resolution Default S 5201 STATION ID 1 247 1 1 Defines the address of the drive Two units with the same address are not allowed on line e Range 1 247 5202 BAUDRATE 9 6 115 2 kbits s 9 6 kbits s Defines the communication speed of the drive in kbits per second kbits s 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 115 2 5203 PARITY 0 3 1 0 Sets
350. reen RS485 Multidrop application RS485 interface 29 B Positive 28 SCR J2 J2 SCR 591B 30 A Negative 301A A A ON 31 AGND GND 31 AGND ON 32 SCR 32 Screen SCR OFF position ON position o Bus termination GND Connect the shield at each end of the cable to a drive On one end connect the shield to terminal 28 and on the other end connect to terminal 32 Do not connect the incoming and outgoing cable shields to the same terminals as that would make the shielding continuous For configuration information see the following Communication Set up EFB below Activate Drive Control Functions EFB on page 164 The appropriate EFB protocol specific technical data For example Modbus Protocol Technical Data on page 174 Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 161 Communication Set up EFB Serial Communication Selection To activate the serial communication set parameter 9802 COMM PROTOCOL SEL e 1 STD MODBUS 2 N2 e 3 FLN 5 BACNET Note If you cannot see the desired selection on the panel your drive does not have that protocol software in the application memory Serial Communication Configuration Setting 9802 automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined below In particular note that the station Id may require adjustment EFB Protocol Refer
351. reference scaling ABB drives profile 191 relay output control activate 167 SEt UP ace NG KA s NG Da Game NGA 161 start stop control activate 164 state diagram ee 190 status word eee eee 185 status parameter 143 termination 160 Index 302 comm FBA actual values anaana 230 analog output control activate 234 comm fault response 235 config file CPI firmware revision parameter 140 config file id revision parameter 140 config file revision parameter 140 configuration a 232 control interface 2 45 229 control word eee 229 control word ABB drives 238 CIAQGNOSUCS 2 recente idee ee ea 236 drive feedback 22000055 235 fieldbus control activate 232 fieldbus CPI firmware revision parameter 140 fieldbus parameters 140 fieldbus status parameter 140 fieldbus type parameter 140 input ref sel activate 233 installation aa NG kaaa na haha ha 231 OVErVIEW aoaaa eee 228 parameter group 140 PID control setpoint source activate 235 planning suk cet KNA cate ies 230 protocol listing 000 eae 228 reference 0 000 e eee eee 230 relay output control activate 234 SOUP is kanga aa e
352. rence Scaling The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives Profile FBA Reference Range ao Scaling Remarks REF1 32767 Speedor 20000 par 1105 Final reference limited by 32767 frequency 0 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 2001 2002 20000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency REF2 32767 Speedor 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 32767 frequency 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 2001 2002 10000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency Torque 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 0 0 2015 2017 torque1 or 10000 par 1108 2016 2018 torque2 10000 corresponds to 100 PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by Reference 0 0 4012 4013 PID set1 or 10000 par 1108 4112 4113 PID set2 10000 corresponds to 100 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM AI1 or COMM AI1 the reference is scaled as follows ABB Drives Profile FBA Reference Value Setting Al Reference Scaling REF 1 COMM AI1 COMM Al 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus Reference A Correction Coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1105 100 Al Input Signal 0 50
353. resistor 25 RESERVED Not used as of the publication of this manual 26 DRIVE ID Internal fault Configuration Block Drive ID is not valid Contact your local ABB sales representative Diagnostics 252 ACH550 UH User s Manual Fault Fault Name In ae a Code Panel Description and Recommended Corrective Action 27 CONFIG FILE Internal configuration file has an error Contact your local ABB sales representative 28 SERIAL 1 ERR Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct e Fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Communication settings Group 51 or 53 as appropriate Poor connections and or noise on line 29 EFB CONFIG Error in reading the configuration file for the embedded fieldbus FILE 30 FORCE TRIP Fault trip forced by the fieldbus See the fieldbus User s Manual 31 EFB 1 Fault code reserved for the embedded fieldbus EFB protocol application These codes are not used as of the publication of this manual 32 EFB 2 33 EFB 3 34 MOTOR PHASE Fault in the motor circuit One of the motor phases is lost Check for and correct e Motor fault e Motor cable fault e Thermal relay fault if used Internal fault 35 OUTPUT WIRING Possible power wiring error detected When the drive is not running it monitors for an improper connection between the drive input power and the drive output Check for and correct e
354. respondence between the gains The following formulas allow translation from ABB gains to Siemens gains and vice versa e To convert from ABB PI gains to Siemens P and gains P GAINsiemens Pl GAINapp x 0 0015 PI GAINagp Z AABB x 0 001 PIGAIN gg ots GAI Nsiemens To convert from Siemens P and gains to ABB PI gains P GAINapp Pl GAINsiemens x 667 PI GAINgjemens lemens x 667 PI GAINsiemens GAINgpp Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 207 Point Database The following table lists the point database for FLN ACH550 Application 2734 FLN Point Database Factory Engr Point Slope Intercept Subpoint Name Default Units On Text Off Text Type SI Units 01 LAO CTLR ADDRESS 99 1 0 02 LAO APPLICATION 2734 1 z 03 LAI FREQ OUTPUT 0 Hz 0 1 0 04 LAI PCT OUTPUT 0 PCT 0 1 0 05 LAI SPEED 0 RPM 1 0 06 LAI CURRENT 0 A 0 1 07 LAI TORQUE 0 PCT 0 1 200 08 LAI POWER 0 HP 0 134 0 0 KW lo 0 09 LAI DRIVE TEMP 77 F 0 18 32 25 C 0 1 0 10 LAI DRIVE KWH 0 KWH 1 11 LAI DRIVE MWH 0 MWH 1 12 LAI RUN TIME 0 HRS 1 13 LAI DC BUS VOLT 0 V 1 14 LAI OUTPUT VOLT 0 V 1 15 LAI PRC PID FBCK 0 PCT 0 1 16 LAI PRC PID DEV 0 PCT 0 1 17 LAI M
355. ress the UP DOWN buttons simultaneously Note The most typical and necessary parameters to change are parameter groups 99 Start up data 10 Start Stop Dir 11 Reference Select 20 Limits 21 Start Stop 22 Accel Decel 26 Motor Control and 30 Fault Functions Start Up 34 ACH550 UH User s Manual Note To restore the default factory settings select the application macro HVAC default Start Up Assistant Mode To start the Start Up Assistant follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu rc Select ASSISTANTS with the Up Down buttons and select ENTER 2 Scroll to COMMISSION DRIVE with the Up Down buttons and select SEL 3 Change the values suggested by the assistant to your preferences and then 4 Press SAVE after every change 4 Bid Did GF The Start Up Assistant will guide you through the start up The Start Up Assistant guides you through the basic programming of a new drive You should familiarize yourself with basic control panel operation and follow the steps outlined above At the first start the drive automatically suggests entering the first task Language Select The assistant also checks the values entered to prevent entries that are out of range The Start Up Assistant is divided into tasks You may activate the tasks one after the other as the Start Up Assistant suggests or independently Note If you want to set the parameters independently
356. rocess PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT 1000 0 1000 0 0 1 40 0 Sets a constant value used for the process reference e Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 4012 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 0 Sets the minimum value for the reference signal source See parameter 4010 4013 SETPOINT MAX 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 0 Sets the maximum value for the reference signal source See parameter 4010 4014 FBK SEL 1 10 1 1 Defines the PID controller feedback actual signal e You can define a combination of two actual values ACT1 and ACT2 as the feedback signal e Use parameter 4016 to define the source for actual value 1 ACT1 e Use parameter 4017 to define the source for actual value 2 ACT2 1 ACT1 Actual value 1 ACT1 provides the feedback signal 2 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 3 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 plus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 4 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 times ACT2 provides the feedback signal 5 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 divided by ACT2 provides the feedback signal 6 MIN A1 A2 The smaller of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 7 MAX A1 A2 The greater of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 8 SQRT A1 A2 Square root of the value for ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 9 SQA1 SQA2 Square root of ACT1 plus the square root of ACT2 provide
357. rol panel display with the display of a fault code Stopping the motor if it was on The fault code on the control panel display is temporary Pressing any of the following buttons removes the fault message MENU ENTER UP button or DOWN button The message reappears after a few seconds if the control panel is not touched and the fault is still active Diagnostics ACH550 UH User s Manual Flashing Green Alarms 249 For less severe errors called alarms the diagnostic display is advisory For these situations the drive is simply reporting that it had detected something unusual In these situations the drive Flashes the green LED on the drive does not apply to alarms that arise from control panel operation errors e Sets an appropriate bit in an Alarm Word parameter 0308 or 0309 See Group 03 Actual Signals on page 67 for the bit definitions e Overrides the control panel display with the display of an alarm code and or name Alarm messages disappear from the control panel display after a few seconds The message returns periodically as long as the alarm condition exists Correcting Faults The recommended corrective action for faults is e Use the Fault Listing table below to find and address the root cause of the problem e Reset the drive See Fault Resetting on page 254 Fault Listing Fault Code Fault Name In Panel Description and Recommended Corrective Action 1 O
358. rrecting Alarms The recommended corrective action for alarms is Determine if the Alarm requires any corrective action action is not always required e Use Alarm Listing below to find and address the root cause of the problem Alarm Listing The following table lists the alarms by code number and describes each Alarm p KP Code Display Description 2001 OVERCURRENT Current limiting controller is active Check for and correct e Excessive motor load Insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Faulty motor motor cables or connections 2002 OVERVOLTAGE Over voltage controller is active Check for and correct e Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply Insufficient deceleration time parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 2003 UNDERVOLTAGE Under voltage controller is active Check for and correct Undervoltage on mains 2004 DIR LOCK The change in direction being attempted is not allowed Either Do not attempt to change the direction of motor rotation or e Change parameter 1003 DIRECTION to allow direction change if reverse operation is safe 2005 I O COMM Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct Fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME e Communication settings Group 51 or 53 as appropriate e Poor connections and or noise on line Diagnostics 256 ACH
359. rs into an override parameter set see parameter 9902 and the parameters in Group 17 will be write protected except parameter 1704 To change the other parameters in the Group 17 override has to be disabled 1706 OVERRIDE DIR Selects the source of the override direction signal 0 FORWARD Assigns forward as the override direction 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the override direction signal Activating the digital input selects the forward direction e De activating the digital input selects the reverse direction 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the override direction signal e See DI1 above 7 REVERSE Assigns reverse as the override direction 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the override direction signal e De activating the digital input selects the forward direction Activating the digital input selects the reverse direction 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the override direction signal e See DI1 INV above 1707 OVERRIDE REF Selects the source of the override reference 1 CONSTANT Selects a preset frequency or speed for the override The frequency value is defined by parameter 1702 OVERRIDE FREQ and the speed value by parameter 1703 OVERRIDE SPEED 2 PID The reference is taken from the PID output see group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 Note The following conditions must be met when using PID in the override mode e PI
360. rth PFA Relay DI6 Free 5 Not allowed DI1 Free DI2 First PFA Relay DI3 Second PFA Relay DI4 Third PFA Relay DI5 Fourth PFA Relay DI6 Fifth PFA Relay 6 Not allowed Not allowed Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 153 Group 81 PFA Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3 DI3 Enables the Interlocks function and assigns a digital input starting with DI3 to the interlock signal for each PFA relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on e The number of PFA relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFA e The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI2 Free Not allowed DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI4 DI6 Free 1 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor D13 First PFA Relay DI4 First PFA Relay D14 D16 Free DI5 DI6 Free 2 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor D13 First PFA Relay DI4 First PFA Relay DI4 Second PFA Relay DI5 Second PFA Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 3 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFA Relay DI4 First PFA Relay D14 Second PFA Relay DI5 Second PFA Relay D15 Third PFA Relay DI6 Third PFA Relay DI6 Free 4 Not allowed DI1 DI2 Free DI3 First PFA R
361. s count parameter 142 critical speeds avoiding high parameters 104 low parameters a nannaa 104 parameter group 0 104 select parameter 2 104 C Tick marking eee eeee 298 current at fault history parameter 71 data parameter 000 63 max limit parameter 22 95 measurement fault code 251 rating Codai st maari ma NN ke Ale boas 9 D DC brake time parameter 99 DC bus voltage data parameter 63 Index ACH550 UH User s Manual DC current ref parameter 99 DC magnetizing time parameter 98 DC overvoltage fault code 249 DC stabilator parameter 106 DC undervoltage fault code 250 DDL file N2 0 199 deceleration at aux start PFA parameter 156 emergency time parameter 101 parameter group 00 100 ramp select parameter 100 ramp shape parameter 100 ramp time PFA parameter 156 ramp zero select parameter 101 time parameter a 100 default macro nannaa annann 46 derating AA diese AREEN ous 269 single phase supply 4 269 switching frequency 06 269 temperature 0000 269 derivation t
362. s NOT running When the drive is not running it monitors for Improper connections of input power to the drive output the drive can display fault 35 OUTPUT WIRING if improper connections are detected Ground faults the drive can display fault 16 EARTH FAULT if a ground fault is detected Also see parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT 0 DISABLE No drive response to either of the above monitoring results 1 ENABLE The drive displays faults when this monitoring detects problems Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 111 Group 30 Fault Functions Code Description Range Resolution 3024 CB TEMP FAULT Defines the drive response to control board overheating O DISABLE No response 1 ENABLE Displays fault 37 CB OVERTEMP and the drive coasts to stop Default S Start Up 112 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 31 Automatic Reset This group defines conditions for automatic resets An automatic reset occurs after a particular fault is detected The drive holds for a set delay time then automatically restarts You can limit the number of resets in a specified time period and you can set up automatic resets for a variety of faults Group 31 Automatic Reset Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3101 NR OF TRIALS 0 5 1 5 Sets the number of allowed automatic resets within a trial period defined by 3102 TRIAL TIME If the number of automatic resets exceeds this limit with
363. s lag pump 21 RO1B 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A fa Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A Mx Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 27 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 7 PUMPALTERN 1609 START ENABLE2 5 DI5 1105 REF1 MAX 62Hz 1860rpm 2208 EM DEC TIME 62HZ 1201 CONST SPEED SEL O NOT SEL 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 5 0s 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 31 PFA 2203 DECELER TIME 1 5 0s 1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX 62HZ 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN 0 0 4101 GAIN 1 0 1509 AO2 CONTENT MAX 100 0 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0s 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 D12 8123 PFA ENABLE 1 ACTIVE 1608 START ENABLE 1 0 NOT SEL Start Up ACH550 User s Manual Internal Timer 53 This macro configures for applications where a built in timer starts and stops the motor When the variable speed pump reaches a maximum speed limit auxiliary pumps start as needed When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID see General Considerations on page 44 Momentarily activating digital input 3 DI3 provides a boost function which operates the motor See group 36 Timer Functions for more information on setting up timers
364. s of 2 seconds 20 30 00 If parameter value is 07 00 00 then the period will aria be activated at 7 a m es The figure shows multiple periods on different 17 00 00 weekdays an When editing parameters to set times 1900 00 Use arrow keys to select desired hour setting 13 00 00 e Press NEXT to advance to minutes e Use arrow keys to select desired minutes setting 12 00 00 L e Press NEXT to advance to minutes Use arrow keys to select desired seconds setting 10 30 00 e Press SAVE 09 00 00 00 00 00 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 3603 STOP TIME 1 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines the daily stop time e The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds e If the parameter value is 09 00 00 then the period will be deactivated at 9 a m 3604 START DAY 1 1 7 1 1 Defines the weekly start day 1 Monday 7 Sunday If parameter value is 1 then period 1 weekly is active from Monday midnight 00 00 00 3605 STOP DAY 1 1 7 1 1 Defines weekly stop day 1 Monday 7 Sunday If parameter value is 5 then timer 1 weekly will be deactivated on Friday midnight 23 59 58 3606 START TIME 2 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines timer2 daily start time e See parameter 3602 3607 STOP TIME 2 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 12 00 00 Defines timer2 daily stop time e See parameter 3603 3608 START DAY 2 1 7 1 1 Defines timer 2 weekly start day e See parameter 3604 Start Up
365. s ramp pair 2 e Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection e See DI1 INV above 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 30 0 s Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 1 See A in figure e Actual acceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE e See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY 2203 DECELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 30 0 s Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 1 e Actual deceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE e See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 0 1000 0 s 0 1s 0 0 Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 1 See B in figure asa Linear e Shape is defined as a ramp unless additional time is specified here to reach the maximum frequency A longer time provides a softer transition at each end of the slope The shape becomes an s curve e Rule of thumb 1 5 is a suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the ma B 0 acceleration ramp time T 0 0 LINEAR Specifies linear acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 gt T 0 1 1000 0 S CURVE Specifies s curve acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 Pi MAX A S curve FREQ T B PA T tt A gt A 2202 ACCELERATION TIME B 2204 RAMP SHAPE 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 0 0 18
366. s the feedback signal 10 SQRT ACT1 Square root of ACT1 provides the feedback signal 11 COMM FBK 1 Signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 provides the feedback signal 12 COMM FBK 2 Signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 provides the feedback signal 13 AVE ACT1 2 The average of ACT1 and ACT2 provides the feedback signal 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER 32 768 32 767 0 001 0 000 Defines an extra multiplier for the PID FBK value defined by parameter 4014 e Used mainly in applications where the flow is calculated from the pressure difference 0 NOT USED 32 768 32 767 Multiplier applied to the signal defined by parameter 4014 FBK SEL Example FBK Multiplier x JA1 A2 4016 ACT1 INPUT 1 5 1 2 Defines the source for actual value 1 ACT1 1 Al 1 Uses analog input 1 for ACT1 2 Al 2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT1 3 Current Uses current for ACT1 scaled so e Min AcT1 0 current e Max ACT1 2 x nominal current 4 Torque Uses torque for ACT1 scaled so e Min ACT1 2 x nominal torque e Max ACT1 2 x nominal torque 5 Power Uses power for ACT1 scaled so e Min ACT1 2 x nominal power e Max ACT1 2 x nominal power 6 COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT1 7 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT1 Start Up 134 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 40 Process PID Set 1 Code Description Range Resolution Default S 4
367. s the status of Relay Output 3 1 ON O OFF 0122 bit 0 79 RO 4 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Relay Output 4 1 ON O OFF 0123 bit 2 80 RO 5 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Relay Output 5 1 ON O OFF 0123 bit 1 81 RO 6 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Relay Output 6 1 ON 0 OFF 0123 bit 0 82 Al 1 ACTUAL Indicates the input level of Analog Input 1 0120 83 Al2 ACTUAL Indicates the input level of Analog Input 2 0121 84 AO 1 ACTUAL Indicates the output level of Analog Output 1 0124 85 AO 2 ACTUAL Indicates the output level of Analog Output 2 0125 86 OK ALARM Indicates the current alarm state of the drive 1 ALARM 0 OK 87 OK MAINT Indicates the current maintenance state of the drive 1 MAINT 0 Ok Maintenance triggers are configured in drive parameter Group 29 88 ALARM WORD1 This point is a bit field indicating active alarms in the drive 0308 89 ALARM WORD2 This point is a bit field indicating active alarms in the drive 0309 90 LAST FAULT This point is first in the drive s fault log and indicates the most 0401 recent fault declared 91 PREV FAULT 1 This point is second in the drive s fault log and indicates the 0412 previous fault declared 92 PREV FAULT 2 This point is last in the drive s fault log and indicates the 0413 oldest fault in the log 93 OK FAULT Indicates the current fault state of the drive 1 FAULT 0 Ok Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH U
368. s values not available on the target drive LOC G DIFFERENCES VALUES UNDER MIN 3 VALUES OVER MAX 2 Using parameter default values when the download provides no values or invalid values INVALID VALUES 1 Providing a Differences List A listing of the EXTRA PARS 5 type and number of items that the target cannot MISSING VALUES 7 accept exactly as specified READY SEL You can either accept the default edits by pressing READY or view and edit each item as follows 1 Highlight an item type in the Differences List left screen below and press SEL to see the details for the selected type right screen below LOC G DIFFERENCES LOC G INVALID VAL VALUES UNDER MIN 3 9902 APLIC MACRO VALUES OVER MAX 2 2606 SWITCHING FREQ INVALID VALUES 1 ia Z EXTRA PARS 5 3401 DISP 1 SEL MISSING VALUES 7 READY SEL EXIT EDIT Start Up 40 ACH550 UH User s Manual In the above right details screen The first item that requires editing is automatically highlighted and includes details In general the first item listed in the details is the value defined by the backup file The second item listed is the default edit e For tracking purposes an asterisk initially appears by each item As edits are made the asterisks disappear 2 In the illustrated example the backup specifies a switching frequency of 12 kHz but the target drive is limited to
369. sent from the drives to the controlling system Embedded Fieldbus 160 ACH550 UH User s Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation EFB A Warning Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from the power source Drive terminals 28 32 are for R8485 communications Use Belden 9842 or equivalent Belden 9842 is a dual twisted shielded pair cable with a wave impedance of 120 Q Use one of these twisted shielded pairs for the RS485 link Use this pair to connect all A terminals together and all B terminals together Use one of the wires in the other pair for the logical ground terminal 31 leaving one wire unused Do not directly ground the RS485 network at any point Ground all devices on the network using their corresponding earthing terminals As always the grounding wires should not form any closed loops and all the devices should be earthed to a common ground Connect the RS485 link in a daisy chained bus without dropout lines To reduce noise on the network terminate the RS485 network using 120 Q resistors at both ends of the network Use the DIP switch to connect or disconnect the termination resistors See following diagram and table Terminated Terminated Station Station Station Station X1 Identification Hardware Description 28 Sc
370. ser s Manual 215 FLN Detailed Point Descriptions Point Description Drive Parameter 94 RESET FAULT Command by FLN to reset a faulted drive 1 RESET 0 NO Parameter 1604 must be set to COMM for FLN to control this state The control input is rising edge sensitive so once the command is issued this point automatically returns to its inactive state This momentary operation avoids any need for an explicit command to clear the point before a subsequent reset can be issued 95 MBOX PARAM Sets the parameter to be used by the mailbox function 96 MBOX DATA Sets or indicates the data value of the mailbox function 97 MBOX READ Command by FLN to read the parameter value specified by Point 95 MBOX PARAM The parameter value is returned in Point 96 MBOX DATA The control input is rising edge sensitive so once the command is issued this point automatically returns to its inactive state This momentary operation avoids any need for an explicit command to clear the point before a subsequent reset can be issued 98 MBOX WRITE Command by FLN to write the data value specified by Point 96 MBOX DATA to the parameter value specified by Point 95 MBOX PARAM The control input is rising edge sensitive so once the command is issued this point automatically returns to its inactive state This momentary operation avoids any need for an explicit command to
371. state of the Timer Timer activated ExT2 Timer de activated EXT1 See Group 36 Timer Functions 10 12 TIMER 2 4 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the Timer See Timer 1 above 1 DI1 INV Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 DI1 activated EXT1 DI1 de activated EXT2 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 INV above Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 75 Group 11 Reference Select Code Description Range Resolution Default S 1103 REF1 SELECT 0 21 1 1 v Selects the signal source for external reference REF1 0 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the reference source 1 Al1 Defines analog input 1 A11 as the reference source 2 Al2 Defines analog input 2 Al2 as the reference source 3 Al1 JOYST Defines analog input 1 A11 configured for joystick operation as the reference source e The minimum input signal runs the drive at the maximum reference in the reverse direction Define the minimum using parameter 1104 e The maximum input signal runs the drive at maximum EXT REF 1 MAXA reference in the forward direction Define the maximum using parameter 1105 e Requires parameter 1003 3 request EXT REF 1 MIN Warning Because the low end of the reference range commands full reverse operation do not use 0 V as gt the lower end of t
372. t YES NO Embedded Fieldbus 222 ACH550 UH User s Manual Instance ID Object Name Description Active Inactive Text Present Value Access Type BV9 RUN ENA ACT This object indicates the Run Enable command status regardless of the control source ENABLE DISABLE R BV10 RUN STOP CMD This object commands a drive start Control requires either e Parameter 1001 value COMM for control by EXT1 Or Parameter 1002 value COMM for control by EXT2 RUN STOP BV11 FWD REV CMD This object commands a motor rotation direction change Control requires 1003 REQUEST and either e Parameter 1001 value COMM for control by EXT1 Or Parameter 1002 value COMM for control by EXT2 REV FWD BV12 RUN ENA CMD This object commands Run Enable Control requires parameter 1601 value COMM ENABLE DISABLE BV13 EXT 1 2 CMD This object selects ext1 or ext2 as the active control source Control requires parameter 1102 value COMM EXT2 EXT1 BV14 FAULT RESET This object resets a faulted drive The command is rising edge triggered Control requires parameter 1604 value COMM RESET NO BV15 MBOX READ This object reads a parameter defined by AV25 MBOX PARAM and returns it in AV26 MBOX DATA READ RESET BV16 MBOX WRITE This object writes the data value specified by AV26 MBOX DATA to a
373. t e Source and connection for analog input e Parameter settings for AI1FLT LIMIT 3021 and 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION Al2 LOSS Analog input 2 loss Analog input value is less than AI2FLT LIMIT 3022 Check for and correct e Source and connection for analog input e Parameter settings for AI2FLT LIMIT 3022 and 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION MOT TEMP Motor is too hot based on either the drive s estimate or on temperature feedback e Check for overloaded motor e Adjust the parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 e Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 parameters 10 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either e Drive is in local control mode the control panel displays HAND or e Drive is in remote control mode REM and is parameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check e Communication lines and connections Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERROR e Parameters in Group 10 Command Inputs and Group 11 Reference Select if drive operation is REM 11 ID RUN FAIL The motor ID run was not completed successfully Check for and correct e Motor connections e Motor parameters 9905 9909 12 MOTOR STALL Motor or process stall Motor is operating in the stall region Check for and correct e Excessive load e Insufficient motor power e Parameters 3010 3012 14 EXTERNAL FLT 1 Digital input defined to report first
374. t External reference 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC Q 5 JAl2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common Ji Jumper Settings 917 AOT Output frequency 0 4 20 mA Sp alt o N 30 mA ete AB 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA H ee Ke r719 AGND Analog output circuit common 2 P AI2 0 4 20 mA 75 024v Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 141 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 112 DCOM Digital input common for all __ 7431DH Start Stop Activate to start drive _ __ 14 Dl2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 LU 115 DI3 Constant Preset speed 1 P 1202 LU 116 DI4 Safety interlock 1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 Lo 117 DI5 Safety interlock 2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A f Default operation Started gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B f 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A fi Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A f Default operation Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 27 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 2 SUPPLYFAN 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 4001 GAIN 0 7 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 D12 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 10 0 s 1609 START ENA
375. t indicate set up problems 1 Faults and alarms are reported on the control panel with a number Note the number reported 2 Review the description provided for the reported fault alarm Use the fault and alarm listings on pages 249 and 255 respectively or e Press the help key Assistant Control Panel only while fault or alarm is displayed 3 Adjust the system or parameters as appropriate Installation 28 ACH550 UH User s Manual Start Up HVAC Control Panel Features The ACH550 HVAC control panel ACS CP B features Status LED Green when normal if flashing or red see Diagnostics UP SOFT KEY 1 DOWN as D e wo B BIT OFF HAND SOFT KEY 2 HELP always available x0201 e Language selection for the display e Drive connection that can be made or detached at any time e Start up assistant to facilitate drive commissioning e Copy function for moving parameters to other ACH550 drives e Backup function for saving parameter sets e Context sensitive help e Real time clock General Display Features Soft Key Functions The soft key functions are defined by text displayed just above each key Display Contrast To adjust display contrast simultaneously press T and lt a or w as appropriate Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual Start Up Start Up can be performed in two ways e Using the Start Up Assistant e Changing the parameters individually Start Up by Usi
376. t react to the situation of feedback above setpoint if another zone s feedback is closer to its setpoint 13 2 ZONE MAX The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and feedback 2 The drive will control the zone and select the set which has a smaller difference sA negative difference a setpoint lower than the feedback is always smaller than a positive difference This keeps feedback values at or below the setpoint e Controller does not react to the situation of feedback below setpoint if another zone s feedback is closer to its setpoint 14 2 ZONE AVE The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and feedback 2 In addition it calculates the average of the deviations and uses it to control zone 1 Therefore one feedback is kept above its setpoint and another is kept as much below its setpoint 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for PID Set selection e Activating the digital input selects PID Set 1 De activating the digital input selects PID Set 2 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID Set selection e See DI1 INV above Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 137 Group 41 Process PID Set 2 This group defines second set of parameters used with the Process PID PID1 controller The operation of parameters 4101
377. tage alarm or fault occurs 23 DRIVE TEMP Energize relay when a drive overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 24 UNDERVOLTAGE Energize relay when an undervoltage alarm or fault occurs 25 Al1 LOSS Energize relay when Al signal is lost 26 Al2 Loss Energize relay when Al2 signal is lost 27 MOTOR TEMP Energize relay when a motor overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 28 STALL Energize relay when a stall alarm or fault exists 30 PID SLEEP Energize relay when the PID sleep function is active 31 PFA Use relay to start stop motor in PFA control See Group 81 PFA Control e Use this option only when PFA control is used Selection activated deactivated when drive is not running 32 AUTOCHANGE Energize relay when PFA autochange operation is performed Use this option only when PFA control is used 33 FLUX READY Energize relay when the motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque motor has reached nominal magnetizing 34 USER S2 Energize relay when User Parameter Set 2 is active Start Up 84 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 14 Relay Outputs Code Description Range Resolution Default S 35 COMM Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication e Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energizes relay 1 relay 6
378. taining information on selected operations of the drive Drive Actual Values for example group 01 parameters can be mapped to Input Words using group 51 parameters protocol dependent but typically parameters 5104 5126 Network planning should address the following questions e What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network e What control information must be sent down to the drives e What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling system Fieldbus Adapter ACH550 UH User s Manual 231 Mechanical and Electrical Installation FBA A Warning Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from the power source Overview The FBA fieldbus adapter is a plug in module that fits in the drive s expansion slot 2 The module is held in place with plastic retaining clips and two screws The screws also ground the shield for the module cable and connect the module GND signals to the drive control board On installation of the module electrical connection to the drive is automatically established through the 34 pin connector Mounting Procedure Note Install the input power and motor cables first 1 Insert the module carefully into the drive expansion slot 2 until the retaining clips lock the module into position 2 Fasten the two screws included to the stand offs Note Correct installation of the screws is essential for fulfilling t
379. tart ending when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when output frequency is equal to reference In the beginning the motor magnetizes within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current e See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR 5 FLYSTART TORQ BOOST Selects both the flying start and the torque boost mode SCALAR SPEED mode only e Flying start routine is performed first and the motor is magnetized If the speed is found to be zero the torque boost is done 8 RAMP Immediate start from zero frequency 2102 STOP FUNCTION 1 2 1 1 Selects the motor stop method 1 COAST Selects cutting off the motor power as the stop method The motor coasts to stop 2 RAMP Selects using a deceleration ramp e Deceleration ramp is defined by 2203 DECELER TIME 1 or 2206 DECELER TIME 2 whichever is active 2103 DC MAGN TIME 0 00 10 00 s 0 01 s 0 30 s Defines the pre magnetizing time for the DC Magnetizing start mode Use parameter 2101 to select the start mode After the start command the drive pre magnetizes the motor for the time defined here and then starts the motor e Set the pre magnetizing time just long enough to allow full motor magnetization Too long a time heats the motor excessively Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 99 Group 21 Start Stop Code Description Range Resolution Default S 2104 IDC CURR CTL 0 2 0 v Selects whether DC current is used for
380. tat Xa od eer ink tee oe as Be ee Aas LG DA Ora gS ow ese 29 MOGGS arid vnc pa fob kah ma Kana apan napunan sono wae dyad a 31 Application Macros lt c lt 50 03 32 sega hewn te Paae teta pee eb eee eae es 44 Parameter Descriptions icc 28 beeen eevee Pee ee eRe Lae Been 61 Embedded Fieldbus OVERVIOW ma KU Ng le A Oh pe cS ele ng ma at ie ta Bt 158 Planning sss toda ANG NG aad yee eae Byes Sah e Se Rees aS wee 159 Mechanical and Electrical Installation EFB 005 160 Communication Set up EFB 4 a aa GASA GANA Pewee ene as wee 161 Activate Drive Control Functions EFB 0 00 000 cee 164 Feedback from the Drive EFB 0 0 00 cc cee ee 169 Diagnostics EFB 2 paaa pa tem ori atau axe ee ata eta eek wera 171 Modbus Protocol Technical Data 0 0 0 eee ee 174 ABB Control Profiles Technical Data 0 0 0 cece eee 182 N2 Protocol Technical Data 0 eee 194 FLN Protocol Technical Data 0 aa 202 BACnet Technical Data aaaea eee 216 BACnet Object Definitions 4 a a naa Ya state KAI haah dhseanss 219 Fieldbus Adapter OVG6IVIEW 025 pp ANAL BOL NG aba Lpa NAN A DN ee baka 228 PANNING 30 eee ese eee BANG eee a eee oe eee haa 230 Mechanical and Electrical Installation FBA 20055 231 Communication Set up FBA 0600 es 232 Activate Drive Control Functions FBA 000 000 cee eee 232 Feedback from the Drive FBA
381. te format with the UP DOWN buttons CA 12 and select OK to confirm the selection wa GF Select EXIT twice to return to the main menu 4 13 Start Up ACH550 UH User s Manual 43 O Settings Mode To view and edit the I O settings follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu T Scroll to I O Settings with the UP DOWN buttons and select ENTER sa Scroll to the I O setting you want to view with the UP DOWN buttons and select A 3 SEL E u Select the setting you want to view with the UP DOWN buttons and select OK CA 4 h ZA wT You can change the value with the UP DOWN buttons and save it by selecting 5 SAVE yy If you do not want to change the setting select CANCEL 7 E Select EXIT to return to the main menu CV 6 Start Up 44 ACH550 User s Manual Application Macros Overview Macros change a group of parameters to new predefined values designed for specific applications Use macros to minimize the need for manual editing of parameters Selecting a macro sets all other parameters to their default values except Group 99 Start up Data parameters The PARAMETER LOCK 1602 The PARAM SAVE 1607 The COMM FAULT FUNC 3018 and COMM FAULT TIME 3019 The COMM PROT SEL 9802 Groups 50 53 serial communication parameters Group 29 Maintenance triggers After selecting a macro additional parameter changes can be made manually using
382. technical data information and specifications are valid at the time of printing The manufacturer reserves the right to modifications without prior notice Technical Data 300 Index Numerics Oxxxx register EFB function codes 177 EFB mapping ssena aaa Na PAWA aa 175 1xxxx register EFB function codes 178 EFB mapping a 177 3xxxx register EFB function codes 178 EFB mapping a 178 4xxxx register EFB function codes 180 EFB Mapping mawa arin at ve da aad to 178 A acceleration deceleration parameter group 100 at aux stop PFA parameter 155 compensation parameter 103 ramp select parameter 100 ramp shape parameter 100 ramp time PFA parameter 155 ramp zero select parameter 101 time parameter a 100 activate external PID parameter 138 actual input PID parameters 133 actual max PID parameters 134 actual min PID parameters 134 actual signals parameter group 67 actual value mapping FBA generic profile 247 actual values scaling EFBcomm 170 scaling FBA 02 2200000s 236 scaling FBA ABB drives profile 245 scaling FBA generic profile 247 scaling
383. ted motor The starting order of the other motors rotates The Autochange function requires External switchgear for changing the dive s output power connections e Parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt 0 Autochange is performed when The running time since the previous autochange reaches the time set by 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV The PFA input is below the level set by this parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Note The ACH550 always coasts to stop when autochange is performed In an autochange the Autochange function does all of the PID Output following see figure A 4PFA A e Initiates a change when the running time since the last 100 WA autochange reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV and PFA input is below limit 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Stops the speed regulated motor P 81197 3PFA e Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor 3PFA 1 e Increments the starting order counter to change the 4PFA starting order for the motors 2PFA T e Identifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated motor 1PFA 4 e Switches off the above motor s contactor if the motor was P 8122 running Any other running motors are not interrupted e Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated a PSG A i P8118 motor The autochange switchgear connects this motor to the ACH550 power output A Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFA START DELAY autochange not allowe
384. ter 99 start mode automatic 000 c eee eee 98 automatic torque boost 98 DC magnetizing a 98 flying start seie eee eee 98 start stop parameter group 98 start stop dir parameter group 72 starting order counter 150 Index ACH550 UH User s Manual start up MACOS ie Ka ANG ANN NAA a hare Dala 27 motor data cee ee eee 26 CUMIN aici ot 2328 eds AA 27 start up assistant 200000005 29 start up data parameter group 61 state diagram ComM EEB Aa naaa PERA NAGANA naba kda 190 comm ABB drives 00 241 station id RS232 parameter 142 status at fault history parameter 71 status word ABB drives FBA description 240 comm EFB definition 185 FBA aa NA Ae EA MG in AGA PARAN 230 FBA generic profile 246 stop aux motor PFA parameters 147 aux motor delay 147 DC brake time parameter 99 DC current ref parameter 99 emergency devices 272 emergency select parameter 99 flux braking parameter 105 function parameter a 98 parameter group aa 98 supervision parameter group 00 113 parameter low limit parameters 113 parameter selection
385. ter first environment definition FlashDrop parameter view parameter FLN fieldbus also see comm EFB description loop gains point database point descriptions reports supported features ACH550 UH User s Manual floating network connections a 275 warning about filters 283 warning about screws at EM1 EM3 17 warning about screws at F1 F2 18 flux braking parameter 105 flux optimization parameter 105 force trip fault code 252 frame errors count parameter 142 frame SiZe ia sien ee ale GAGs Dba na Spee 266 free fall stress testing 295 free space for access R7 R8 293 Tor C00lING a png oa ees Sees 287 frequency at fault history parameter 71 max limit parameter 96 min limit parameter 96 motor resolution 20 278 motor specification 278 switching parameter 106 fuses 270 208 240 volt drives 271 380 480 volt drives 271 500 600 volt drives 272 G gain PID parameter 129 generic profile actual value mapping 247 actual value scaling 247 OVErvieW auauua anaana nanana 246 ref
386. ter 1 CTRL ADDRESS The FLN address of the drive It can be set by FLN and by 5302 the panel 2 APPLICATION The Application ID for FLN on the ACH550 This ID is assigned by Siemens for each unique application It correlates directly to a particular point list approved at the time of release Therefore this point list shall remain fixed once approval is granted Any changes to the point list shall require a new Application ID and re approval by Siemens The Application ID assigned to ACH550 is 2934 FREQ OUTPUT The output frequency applied to the motor in Hertz 0103 PCT OUTPUT The ratio of output frequency or speed to the corresponding None This maximum rating depending on control mode ratio is For scalar mode it is the ratio of Output Frequency calculated parameter 0103 to Maximum Frequency parameter by the FLN 2008 application e For speed mode it is the ratio Speed parameter 0102 to Maximum Speed 2002 SPEED The calculated speed of the motor in RPM 0102 CURRENT The measured output current 0104 TORQUE The calculated output torque of the motor as a percentage of 0105 nominal torque 8 POWER The measured output power in KW The FLN point definition 0106 also supports horsepower by selecting English units DRIVE TEMP The measured heatsink temperature in C The FLN point 0110 definition also supports F by selecting English units 10 DRIVE KWH The drive s cumulative power consumption in kilowatt hours 0115 Th
387. the control panel Application macros are enabled by setting the value for parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO By default HVAC default value 1 is the enabled macro General Considerations The following considerations apply for all macros When using a direct speed reference in AUTO mode connect the speed reference to analog input 1 A11 and provide the START command using digital input 1 DI1 In HAND OFF mode the control panel provides the speed reference and START command When using process PID connect the feedback signal to analog input 2 Al2 As a default the control panel sets the Setpoint but analog input 1 can be used as an alternate source You can set up process PID using parameters Group 40 or using the PID control assistant recommended Application Macro Listing This section describes the following macros value Macro ate Macro 1 HVAC default 8 Internal timer 2 Supply fan 9 Internal timer with constant speeds 3 Return fan 10 Floating point 4 Cooling tower fan 11 Dual setpoint PID 5 Condenser 12 Dual setpoint PID with constant speeds 6 Booster pump 13 E bypass 7 Pump alternation 14 Hand Control Start Up ACH550 User s Manual Selecting an Application Macro To select a macro follow these steps Select MENU to enter the main menu u 1 Select ASSISTANTS with the Up Down buttons and select ENTER A 2 NA wT Scroll to APPLICATION and se
388. the mounting holes pai HULO UNA Type code label attached on the heat sink on the right side of the enclosure 3 PH 48 63 Hz 1 PH 4 63 Hz AB Input Voltage U1 200 240 Vac 200 240 Vac naaa in USA of c parts Current lin 59 4 A 59 4 A kAIC G Output 3 PH 0 500 Hz 3 PH 0 500 Hz Voltage U2 0 U1 Vac 0 U1 Vac Current l2n 59 4 A 28A Mfg Date 01 December 2005 Org Firmware V 2 06B e NG OOU SIN 2030700001 LULU ACH550 UH 059A 2 Type Code Use the following chart to interpret the type code found on either label ACH550 UH 08A8 4 AC HVAC Drive 550 product series Construction region specific 01 Setup and parts specific to IEC installation and compliance UH Setup and parts specific to US installation and NEMA compliance Output current rating See Ratings chart for details Voltage rating 2 208 240 VAC 4 380 480 VAC 6 500 600 VAC Enclosure protection class No specification UL type 1 NEMA 1 IP 21 B055 UL type 12 NEMA 12 IP 54 Fieldbus Adapters K451 DeviceNet Adapter K452 LonWorks Adapter K454 Profibus Adapter I O Options L502 Pulse Encoder Interface L511 Relay Output Extension L512 115 230 V Digital Input Interface Ratings and Frame Size Tables in the Ratings section on page 266 lists technical specifications and identifies the drive s frame size T
389. timer 18 B P2 Booster and Time Period 2 selected in the timer 19 B P2 P1 Booster and Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer 20 B P3 Booster and Time Period 3 selected in the timer function 21 B P3 P1 Booster and Time Period 3 and 1 selected in the timer 22 B P3 P2 Booster and Time Periods 3 and 2 selected in the timer 23 B P3 P2 P1 Booster and Time Periods 3 2 and 1 selected in the timer 24 B P4 Booster and Time Periods 4 selected in the timer 25 B P4 P1 Booster and Time Period 4 and Timer 1 selected in the timer 26 B P4 P2 Booster and Time Period 4 and 2 selected in the timer 27 B P4 P2 P1 Booster and Time Periods 4 2 and 1 selected in the timer 28 B P4 P3 Booster and Time Periods 4 and 3 29 B P4 P3 P1 Booster and Time Periods 4 3 and 1 selected in the timer 30 B P4 P3 P2 Booster and Time Periods 4 3 and 2 selected 31 B P4 P3 P2 P1 Booster and Time Periods 4 3 2 and 1 selected 3627 TIMER 2 SRC 0 31 1 0 e See parameter 3626 3628 TIMER 3 SRC 0 31 1 0 e See parameter 3626 3629 TIMER 4 SRC 0 31 1 0 e See parameter 3626 Start Up 126 ACH550 UH User s Manual Group 37 User Load Curve This new group defines supervision of user adjustable load curves motor torque as a function of frequency The curve is defined by five points The function replaces
390. tion parameters e Parameter 5127 forces the validation of changes to parameters 5102 5126 If parameter 5127 is not used changes to parameters 5102 5126 take affect only after the drive power is cycled e Parameters 5128 5133 provide data about the FBA module currently installed e g component versions and status The Parameters Description section lists the group 51 parameters Activate Drive Control Functions FBA Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to Tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function Define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control Define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sections describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function The last column in each table below is deliberately blank See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module for the appropriate entry Start Stop Direction Control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction control of the drive requires e Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent HA Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 1001 EXT1 10 COMM Start Stop controlled by fieldbus with COMMANDS Ext1 selected Fieldbus Adapter ACH550 UH User s Ma
391. tpoint is 0135 value Al1 9 COMM Al1 10 COMM AI1 Communication Fault When using fieldbus control specify the drive s action if serial communication is lost 7 kana Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 3018 COMM FAULT O NOT SEL Set for appropriate drive FUNC 1 FAULT response 2 CONST SP7 3 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM FAULT Set time delay before acting on a communication TIME loss Feedback from the Drive FBA Inputs to the controller drive outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol This feedback does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of feedback data For a complete listing see all parameters listed in Parameter Descriptions Drive Parameter Protocol Reference 0102 SPEED 0103 FREQ OUTPUT 0104 CURRENT 0105 TORQUE 0106 POWER 0107 DC BUS VOLT 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0301 FB STATUS WORD bit 0 STOP 0301 FB STATUS WORD bit 2 REV 0118 DI1 3 STATUS bit 1 DI3 Fieldbus Adapter 236 ACH550 UH User s Manual Scaling To scale the drive parameter values see the Actual Value Scaling in the following sections as appropriate ABB Drives Profile Technical Data Generic Profile Technical Data Diagnostics FBA Fault Handling The ACH550 provides fault information as follows The control pane
392. ts for switching frequency e Prompts for definition of Flux optimization Prompts for the use of Critical speeds Panel Display Prompts for display variable and unit settings Timed Functions Prompts for the use of Timed functions Output e Prompts for the signals indicated through the relay outputs e Prompts for signals indicated through the analog outputs AO1 and AO2 Sets the minimum maximum scaling and inversion values Changed Parameters Mode To view and edit a listing of all parameters that have been changed from macro default values follow these steps Select MENU to enter the menu u Select CHANGED PAR with the UP DOWN buttons and select ENTER A list of changed parameters is displayed Select EXIT to exit the parameters mode CV Start Up 36 Fault Logger Mode ACH550 UH User s Manual Use the Fault Logger Mode to see drive fault history fault state details and help for the faults 1 Select FAULT LOGGER in the Main Menu 2 Press ENTER to see the latest faults up to 10 faults maximum 3 Press DETAIL to see details for the selected fault e Details are available for the three latest faults 4 Press DIAG to see the help description for the fault See Diagnostics section Note If a power off occurs only the three latest faults will remain with details only in the first fault Drive Parameter Backup Mode
393. ue MS TP MAC ID Set drive parameter 5302 EFB STATION ID appropriate value e Once this parameter is set to a non zero value current BACnet settings are latched and used for communication until the channel is reset e In order to participate in MS TP token passing the MAC ID used must be within the limits defined by other masters Max Master property Embedded Fieldbus ACH550 UH User s Manual 227 6 Confirm proper BACnet communication When BACnet communication is operating properly drive parameter 5316 EFB PAR 16 the MS TP token counter should be continually increasing Drive parameter 5306 UART ERRORS should be stable With autobaud detection this parameter may increase until the proper baud rate is detected With autobaud detection once the proper baud rate is detected drive parameter 5315 EFB PAR 15 shows the active baud rate Embedded Fieldbus 228 ACH550 UH User s Manual Fieldbus Adapter Overview The ACH550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard serial communication protocols When using serial communication the ACH550 can either Receive all of its control information from the fieldbus or Be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available control locations such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel Connect using either Fieldbus Controller Fieldbus Oth
394. uit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC OQ 5 JAl2 PID feedback 0 2 10 V or 0 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common Ji J umper Settings H 117 AOT Output frequency 0 4 20 mA Sp an AYA 36 a on lt 8 AO2 Output current 0 4 20 mA H pa 4 9 AGND Analog output circuit common 2 P AI2 0 4 20 mA 1 2 40l24v Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 147 GND Auxiliary voltage output common M2 1DCOM Digital input common for all H3 Di Start Stop Activate to start drive T14 DI2 Run permissive Deactivate to stop drive P 1601 T15 DIS Constant Preset speed 1 P 1202 _ __ 16 DI4 Safety interlock 1 Deactivate to stop drive P 1608 Lo 147 DI5 Safety interlock 2 Deactivate to stop drive P 1609 18 DI6 Not configured 19 RO1C Relay output 1 P 1401 20 RO1A fi Default operation Started gt 19 connected to 21 21 RO1B f 22 RO2C Relay output 2 P 1402 23 RO2A fx Default operation Running gt 22 connected to 24 24 RO2B f 25 RO3C Relay output 3 P 1403 26 RO3A fr Default operation Fault 1 525 connected to 27 27 RO3B Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default Parameter Value Parameter Value 9902 APPLIC MACRO 4 CLNGTWRFAN 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 STARTED 4101 GAIN 1 0 1601 RUN ENABLE 2 DI2 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 0 s 1609 START ENABLE 2 5 DI5 Start Up 50 ACH550 User s Manual
395. ult S 1101 KEYPAD REF SEL 1 2 1 1 Selects the reference controlled in local control mode 1 REF1 Hz rpm Reference type depends on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE e Speed reference rpm if 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED e Frequency reference Hz if 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ 2 REF2 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 6 12 1 0 v Defines the source for selecting between the two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 Thus defines the source for Start Stop Direction commands and reference signals 0 EXT1 Selects external control location 1 EXT1 e See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS for ExT1 s Start Stop Dir definitions e See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT for EXT1 s reference definitions 1 DI1 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 DI1 activated ExT2 DI1 de activated EXT1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 above 7 EXT2 Selects external control location 2 EXT2 e See parameter 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS for EXT2 s Start Stop Dir definitions e See parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT for EXT2 s reference definitions 8 COMM Assigns control of the drive via external control location EXT1 or EXT2 based on the fieldbus control word e Bit 5 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 defines the active external control location EXT1 or EXT2 e See Fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 9 TIMER 1 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the
396. ult S 3405 OUTPUT1 DSP UNIT 0 127 1 Selects the units used with the first display parameter 0 NOTSEL 9 C 18 MWh 27 ft 36 s 45 Pa 54 Ib m 63 Mrev 1 A 10 1b ft 19 m s 28 MGD 37 z min 46 GPS 55 Ib h 64 d 2 V 11 mA 20 m h 29 inHg 38 l h 47 gal s 56 FPS 65 inWC 3 Hz 12 mV 21 dm s 30 FPM 39 m s 48 gal m 57 ft s 66 m min 4 13 kW 22 bar 31 kb s 40 m8 m 49 gal h 58 inH20 5 s 14 W 23 kPa 32 kHz 41 kg s 50 ft s 59 in wg 6 h 15 kWh 24 GPM 33 Ohm 42 kg m 51 ft m 60 ft wg 7 rpm 16 F 25 PSI 34 ppm 43 kg h 52 ft h 61 Ibsi 8 kh 17 hp 26 CFM 35 pps 44 mbar 53 lIb s 62 ms 117 ref 119 dev 121 SP 123 lout 125 Fout 127 Vdc 118 act 120 LD 122 FBK 124 Vout 126 Tout 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Depends on selection 1 Sets the minimum value displayed for the first display parameter 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Depends on selection 1 Sets the maximum value displayed for the first display parameter 3408 SIGNAL 2 PARAM 100 199 1 104 Selects the second parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 3409 SIGNAL 2 MIN Depends on selection 1 Defines the minimum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3402 3410 SIGNAL 2 MAX Depends on selection 1 Defines the maximum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3403 3411 OUTPUT 2 DSP FORM 0 8 1 Defines the decimal point location for the second
397. umber Object Drive Parameter Range B115 INPUT 6 STATUS 0119 bit mask 01 0 Off 1 On BI16 EXTERNAL 2 SELECT Status Word 0 EXT1 EXT2 B117 HAND AUTO Status Word 0 AUTO 1 HAND BI18 ALARM Status Word 0 OK 1 ALARM BI19 MAINTENANCE REQ Status Word 0 OK 1 MAINT REQ BI20 DRIVE READY Status Word 0 Not Ready 1 Ready BI21 AT SETPOINT Status Word 0 No 1 At Setpoint Bl22 RUN ENABLED Status Word 0 Not Enabled 1 Enabled Bl23 N2 LOCAL MODE Status Word 0 Auto 1 N2 Local Bl24 N2 CONTROL SRC Status Word 0 No 1 Yes Bl25 N2 REF1 SRC Status Word 0 No 1 Yes BI26 N2 REF2 SRC Status Word 0 No 1 Yes N2 Analog Output Objects The following table lists the N2 Analog Output objects defined for the ACH550 drive N2 Analog Outputs Number Object P Kaiia a a i Units Range AO1 REFERENCE 1 Reference 1 10 Yo 0 100 AO2 REFERENCE 2 Reference 2 10 Yo 0 100 AO3 ACCEL TIME 1 2202 10 s 0 1 1800 AO4 DECEL TIME 1 2203 10 s 0 1 1800 AO5 CURRENT LIMIT 2003 10 A 0 1 3 lon AO6 PID1 CONT GAIN 4001 10 Yo 0 1 100 AO7 PID1 CONT I TIME 4002 10 s 0 1 600 AO8 PID1 CONT D TIME 4003 10 s 0 10 AO9 PID1 CONT D FILTER 4004 10 s 0 10 AO10 PID2 CONT GAIN 4101 10 Yo 0 1 100 AO11 PID2 CONT I TIME 4102 10 s 0 1 600 AO12 PID2 CONT D TIME 4103 10 s 0 10 AO13 PID2 CONT D FILTER 4104 10 S 0 10 AO14 COMMAND AO 1 135 10 Yo 0 100 AO15
398. up 32 Supervision Code Description Range Resolution Default S 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 101 199 1 103 Selects the first supervised parameter Must be a parameter number from Group 01 Operating Data If the supervised parameter passes a limit a relay output is energized The supervision limits are defined in this group The relay outputs are defined in Group 14 Relay Outputs definition also specifies which supervision limit is monitored LO sHI Operating data supervision using relay outputs when e Case A Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 Lo 3202 2 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER Or SUPRV 2 OVER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal exceeds a given limit The relay remains active until the supervised value drops below the low limit Case A A e Case B Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 Energized 1 4 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV 1 UNDER or SUPRV 2 t UNDER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal 0 pa falls below a given limit The relay remains active untilthe 8 Case B A supervised value rises above the high limit Energized 1 Note Case LO lt HI represents a normal hysteresis 6 t gt LO gt HI Operating data supervision using relay outputs when 7 hey EO a p Seno Value of Supervised Parameter Active Limit Value of sa a parameter The lowest limit HI 3203 is active initially and remains A activ
399. uto 1 N2 BO18 SAVE PARAMETERS 1607 indirectly 0 N A 1 On Save Parameters B019 READ MAILBOX 0 No 1 Yes B020 WRITE MAILBOX 0 No 1 Yes 1 N2 LOCAL CTL and N2 LOCAL REF have priority over drive input terminals Use these binary outputs for temporary N2 control of the drive when comm is not the selected control source DDL File for NCU The listing below is the Data Definition Language DDL file for ACH550 drives used with the Network Control Units This listing is useful when defining drive I O objects to the Network Controller Units Below is the ACH550 DDL file listing KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK ABB Drives ACH 550 Variable Frequency Drive KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK CSMODEL Al ACH 550 VND BI Analog_Inputs Binary_Inputs AO Analog_Outputs Falls A A BO Binary_Outputs Embedded Fieldbus 200 CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSAI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI CSBI AT1 N N AT2 N N AT3 N N AT4 N N AT5 N N AT6 N N AT7 N N AT8 N N AI9 N N AT10 N AT11 N AT12 N AT1
400. ve requires Drive parameter values set as defined below e Fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Setting Modbus DCU N2 FLN BACnet ABB DRV PROFILE 1102 EXT1 EXT2 8 CcoMM Reference set 40001 40031 BO5 26 BV13 SEL selection by fieldbus bit 11 bit 5 1103 REF1 SEL 8 COMM Input reference 1 by 40002 AO1 60 AV16 fieldbus 1106 REF2 SEL 8 COMM Input reference 2 by 40003 AO2 61 AV17 fieldbus Reference Scaling Where required REFERENCES can be scaled See the following as appropriate e Modbus Register 40002 in the Modbus Protocol Technical Data section e Reference Scaling in the ABB Control Profiles Technical Data section e N2 Analog Output Objects in the N2 Protocol Technical Data section The slope of points 60 and 61 in the FLN Protocol Technical Data section Embedded Fieldbus 166 Miscellaneous Drive Control ACH550 UH User s Manual Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent
401. x parameters 117 display min parameters 117 display process variables parameter group 116 display selection parameters 116 display units parameters 117 TOALULES a AG Aa NGO ha AE 28 i o settings mode a 43 maintenance interval battery 258 maintenance procedure 265 MODES Aine a naa na KA AA kaa hare tae 31 operating the drive 0a 32 parameter editing 29 parameter lock parameter 88 parameters mode aaa 32 pass code parameter 88 reference control parameter 74 signal max parameters 116 signal min parameters 116 soft keys 02 00 c eee eee eee 28 start up assistant 29 start up assistant mode 34 status information 2 31 control panel Assistant battery maintenance procedure 265 fault logger mode 4 36 parameter backup mode 36 control word ABB drives FBA description 238 comm EFB description 182 EBA Nawa adi cdot ced tae e ea E A 229 FBA generic profile 246 COOMNG o gree BAL LARO ene a PAN RG 287 fan maintenance triggers 107 correction source PID parameter 139 cover CLAP AA 13 KEpIaGe ava pana mie ee bA eels 23 CRC error
402. y motors are running e ACH550 output frequency exceeds the limit f HZ A P8115 te 8109 1 Hz f Output frequency stays above a relaxed limit MAX f 8109 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D P 8109 1 After the first auxiliary motor starts P 8109 e Output frequency decreases by the value 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 P 8112 _ e In effect the output of the speed regulated motor drops to f compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor MIN See figure where e A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 B Output frequency increase during the start delay C A C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as 1 frequency increases 1 On 0 Note 8109 START FREQ 1 value must be between 8112 LOW FREQ 1 e 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 1 8110 START FREQ 2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 60 0 US Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary motor e See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The second auxiliary motor starts if e One auxiliary motor is running e ACH550 output frequency exceeds the limit 8110 1 e Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8110 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D 8111 START FREQ 3 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 60 0 US Sets the frequency limit used to start the third auxiliary motor e See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The third

ACH550-UH User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents